Strategic Command Manual Secesión

GAME MANUAL
CONTENTS
PREFACE 18
PART 1: GAMEPLAY 19
1. INTRODUCTION 19
2. GETTING STARTED 20
2.1. Installation 20
2.1.1. Minimum System Requirements 20
2.1.2. The Installation Process 21
2.1.3. File Locations 21
2.1.4. Resolving Issues 21
2.1.5. Uninstalling the Game 22
2.1.6. Game Updates 22
2.1.7. Game Forums 23
2.1.8. Help and Feedback 23
2.1.9. Error Handling 24
3. UNDERSTANDING THE GAME INTERFACE 24

3.1. Main Menu 24
3.1.1. Settings 24
3.1.2. Preferences 25
3.2. New Game 25
3.2.1. Choose Side 26
3.2.2. Difficulty 26
3.2.3. Computer Bonus 27
3.3. Options 27
3.3.1. Multiplayer Options 28
3.3.2. View 28
3.3.4. Artificial Intelligence 30
3.4. Advanced Options 30
3.4.1. View 30
3.4.2. Map Text 31
3.4.4. Scripts 32
3.5. The In-Game Interface 35
3.5.1. Left Hand Buttons 35
3.5.2. Top Row Buttons 36
3.5.3. Right Hand Buttons 44
3.5.4. Unit Display 44
3.5.5. Information Panel 45
3.6. Further Interface Information 48
3.6.1. National Colors 48
3.6.2. Glossary of Abbreviations 48
3.6.3. Symbols On The Map 48
3.6.4. Terrain Symbols 49
3.6.5. Resource Symbols 50
3.6.6. Miscellaneous Symbols 50
3.6.7. Combat Interface Definitions 51
3.6.8. Hiding the Interface 52
3.6.9. Target Types 52
3.6.10. Evasion 53
3.6.11. Unit Symbols 54
3.6.12. Zoom 56
3.6.13. Right Clicking on a Unit 57
3.6.14. Reinforcing Units 57
3.6.15. HQ Attachments 58
3.6.16. Indicator Sprites 58
3.6.17. Major Powers’ Flags 58
3.6.18. Forced March/Naval Cruise 58
3.6.19. HQ Highlights 59
3.6.20. Zone of Control Highlights 59
3.6.21. Elite HQ Highlights 59
3.6.22. Sleep Mode 59
3.6.23. Undo Moves 60
3.6.24. Fog of War Shroud 60
3.6.25. Front Line 61
3.6.26. Partisan Locations 61
4. 1861 BLUE AND GRAY TUTORIAL 61

4.1. Turn 1 62
4.1.1. Select the Campaign 62
4.1.2. Pop Up Messages 62
4.1.3. Confederate Turn 1 62
4.1.4. Surveying the Scene 63
4.1.5. Decisions 65
4.1.6. New Units 66
4.1.7. The Top Left Sidebar 67
4.1.8. Land Movement 68
4.1.9. The War at Sea 70
4.1.10. Research 71
4.1.11. Ending the Turn 72
4.2. Union Turn 2 72
4.2.1. The European Danger 72
4.2.2. The Convoy Map 74
4.2.3. Suspended Convoys 75
4.2.4. The Advance Continues 76
4.2.5. The Eastern Theater 77
4.2.6. Research 77
4.2.7. Diplomacy 77
4.2.8. Purchasing Units 79
4.2.9. Your Turn End 80
4.3. Summer 1861 81
4.3.1. Crushing the Missouri State Guard 81
4.3.2. West Virginia 83
4.3.3. Focus on the Objective 84
4.4. General Tips 84
4.4.1. Battle for Victory 84
4.4.2. Swapping Units 85
4.4.3. Forced March 85
4.4.4. HQ Settings 85
4.4.5. Transports 86
4.4.6. Reinforcements 87
4.4.7. Elite Reinforcements 88
4.4.8. Rail Movement 89
4.4.9. Upgrading Units 89
4.4.10. Beware of Partisans 90
4.4.11. Next Steps 91
5. GAME ESSENTIALS 91
5.1. Key Areas of Gameplay 91
5.2. Hotkeys 91
5.3. Major and Minor Powers 92
5.4. Indicator Sprites 93
5.5. Orders 93
5.6. Unit Modes 95
5.7. Zones of Control 96
5.8. Combat 97
5.9. Raiding 98
5.10. Conquering Countries 98
5.11. Fighting Spirit 99
5.12. HQs 99
5.13. Supply Rules 100
5.13.1. General Notes on Supply 100
5.13.2. Viewing Supply 101
5.13.3. Damage to Resources 101
25@
5.14. Partisans 101
5.15. Maintaining Units’ Combat Effectiveness 102
5.16. Decision Events 102
5.17. Politics and Diplomacy 102
5.18. Weather 103
5.18.1. Rain 103
5.18.2. Mud 104
5.18.3. Sandstorms 104
5.18.4. Snow 104
5.18.5. Frozen 104
5.18.6. Storms 104
5.18.7. Ice 105
5.19. The Research Mechanism 105
5.20. Manual Upgrades 105
5.21. Automatic Upgrades 107
5.22. Automatic Industrial Mobilization 108
5.23. Military Production 108
5.24. Further Gameplay Tips 108
5.25. Ending a Turn 110
5.26. Saving a Game 110
5.27. Exiting the Game 110
5.28. Winning the Game 110
5.29. Support 110
6. MOVEMENT AND COMBAT 111

6.1. Basics 111
6.1.1. Turn Activities 111
6.1.2. Turn Lengths 111
6.1.3. Visibility 112
6.2. Moving Units 112
6.2.1. Indicator Sprites 112
6.2.2. Dynamic Movement 113
6.2.3. Specifying Controlled Movement Paths 113
6.2.4. Unit Spotting Ranges During Movement 113
6.2.5. Surprise Contact 114
6.2.6. Zones of Control 115
6.3. Land Movement 116
6.3.1. Regular Movement 116
6.3.2. Rail Movement 116
6.3.3. Forced March 117
6.3.4. Swapping Units 117
6.3.5. The Effect of Terrain on Land Movement 117
6.3.6. Hex Ownership 118
6.4. Naval Movement 119
6.4.1. Regular Movement 119
6.4.2. Naval Cruise 119
6.4.3. Surface Raiders 120
6.4.4. Transport Movement 120
6.4.5. Amphibious Transports 121
6.4.6. Amphibious Transports (Long Range) 124
6.4.7. Submarine Movement 124
6.4.8. Oceans, Coasts and Rivers 125
6.5. Combat 127
6.5.1. Combat Predictions 127
6.5.2. Combat Results 127
6.5.3. Fighting Spirit Bonus 127
6.5.4. Land Combat 128
6.5.5. Naval Combat 131
6.5.6. Naval Mines 133
6.5.7. Purchasing Units 135
6.5.8. New Unit Arrivals 138
6.5.9. Reinforcing Units 139
6.5.10. Upgrading Units 140
6.5.11. Renaming Units 142
6.5.12. Disbanding Units 142
7. ADVANCED GAMEPLAY CONCEPTS 143
7.1. General Unit Characteristics 143
7.2. Combat Target Values 143
7.3. Headquarters Attachments 144
7.3.1. HQ Modes 145
7.4. Building Fortifications 146
7.5. Surrendering Nations 147
7.5.1. Surrendering Due to Losing the Capital 147
7.5.2. Alternative Capitals 147
7.5.3. Fighting on from Exile 148
7.5.4. Liberating Capitals 148
7.5.5. Surrendering Due to Low Fighting Spirit 148
7.6. Capturing Enemy Supply Centers 149
7.7. Plunder 149
7.8. Victory Conditions 150
7.9. The Game Engine’s Turn Sequence 150
7.10. Collecting Military Production Points 151
7.11. Supply 151
7.12. Resource Definitions 153
7.12.1. Major Powers’ Capitals 153
7.12.2. Industrial Centers 153
7.12.3. Primary Supply Centers 153
7.12.4. Secondary Supply Centers 153
7.12.5. Minor’s Capitals 153
7.12.6. Key Resources 154
7.13. Maximum Resource Strengths 154
7.13.1. Connected Resources 154
7.13.2. Unconnected Resources 154
7.13.3. Captured but Unconnected Enemy Resources 155
7.14. Supply Connection Rules 155
7.15. Besieging Resources 155
7.16. Port Supply to Land Forces 155
7.17. Artillery with Zero Supply 156
7.18. Raiding when at Zero Supply 156
7.19. Damage to Resources 156
7.20. Industrial Modifier 156
7.21. Unit Production 157
7.22. Reinforcement Costs 159
7.23. The Cost of Upgrading Units 159
7.24. Decision Events 159
7.25. Factors Influencing Combat Effectiveness 160
7.25.1. Experience 160
7.25.2. Factors Influencing Action Points 161
7.25.3. Roads and Supply 161
7.25.4. HQ Supply 162
7.25.5. The Supply Value of Low  Strength HQs 162
7.25.6. Reinforcing HQs 162
7.25.7. Raising HQs’ Minimum Supply Value 162
7.25.8. Boosting HQ Supply 163
7.25.9. HQ Supply During Amphibious Invasions 163
7.26. Naval Supply 164
7.27. Supply and Action Points Table 164
7.28. Supply & Reinforcements Table 164
7.28.1. Reinforcing Damaged HQs 165
7.28.2. Low Supply & Attrition Losses 166
7.29. Morale and Readiness 166
7.29.1. Morale Losses Due To Movement 167
7.29.2. Unit Attacks Inflicting Morale Losses 167
7.29.3. Unit Readiness and Its Effect  on Combat 168
7.29.4. The Effect of Entrenchment  on Combat 169
7.29.5. Gaining Entrenchment 170
7.29.6. Combat Losses 171
7.29.7. Variability in the Combat Results 173
7.30. Supply Values 173
7.30.1. Land Units 173
7.30.2. Naval Units 174
8. UNIT TYPES 174

8.1. Land Units 174
8.1.1. Target Types 174
8.1.2. Default Maximum Strength 175
8.1.3. Headquarters 175
8.1.4. Regiment 176
8.1.5. Brigade 176
8.1.6. Division/Mountain Division 176
8.1.7. Corps 177
8.1.8. Rangers 177
8.1.9. Marines 177
8.1.10. Engineers 178
8.1.11. Indians 178
8.1.12. Cavalry Units 179
8.1.13. Partisans 179
8.1.14. Field Artillery 180
8.1.15. Siege Artillery 180
8.1.16. Railroad Battery 180
8.1.17. Forts 181
8.1.18. Armored Train 181
8.1.19. Balloons 181
8.2. Naval Units 182
8.2.1. Resisting Amphibious Invasions 182
8.2.2. Raiding Ports 182
8.2.3. Battleships 183
8.2.4. Cruisers 183
8.2.5. Ironclads 183
8.2.6. Monitors 183
8.2.7. Ships of the Line 184
8.2.8. Frigates 184
8.2.9. Gunboats 184
8.2.10. River Ships 184
8.2.11. Submarines 185
8.2.12. Torpedo Boats 185
8.2.13. Transports 186
8.2.14. Amphibious Transports 186
8.2.15. Amphibious Transports  (Long Range) 186
8.2.16. Using Transports and Amphibious Transports 187
9. RESEARCH 187
9.1. Introduction 187
9.1.1. In Brief: The Research Mechanism 189
9.2. In Depth: The Research Mechanism 189
9.2.1. Progression every Turn 189
9.2.2. Research Breakthroughs 190
9.2.3. Catch Up Bonus 190
9.2.4. Spying & Intelligence 191
9.2.5. Examples 191
9.3. Viewing Progress 192
9.4. Progressing to the Next Level 193
9.5. Research Limits 193
9.6. Research Categories 193
9.7. Applying Manual Upgrades 194
9.8. Manual Upgrades 194
9.8.1. Infantry Equipment 194
9.8.2. Skirmishers 195
9.8.3. Scouts 195
9.8.4. Cavalry Equipment 195
9.8.5. Field Artillery 196
9.8.6. Heavy Mortars 196
9.8.7. Mobility 196
9.8.8. Buoyancy Tanks 197
9.8.9. Naval Weapons 197
9.8.10. Ironclads 197
9.8.11. Naval Engines 198
9.8.12. Armored Trains 198
9.8.13. Fort Modernization 198
9.8.14. Lighthouses 199
9.9. Automatic Upgrades 199
9.9.1. Corps Organization 200
9.9.2. Field Telegraph 200
9.9.3. Leadership 200
9.9.4. Infantry Tactics 200
9.9.5. Cavalry Tactics 201
9.9.6. Naval Tactics 201
9.9.7. Amphibious Warfare 201
9.9.8. Experimental Submarines 202
9.9.9. Experimental Balloons 202
9.9.10. Spying & Intelligence 202
9.9.11. Logistics 203
9.9.12. Production Technology 203
9.9.13. Industrial Technology 204
9.9.14. Automatic Industrial Mobilization 204
10. POLITICS AND DIPLOMACY 205

10.1. Alignment Status & Mobilization Values 205
10.1.1. Non-Cooperative Majors 205
10.1.2. Minor Combatants 205
10.2. The Diplomatic Mechanism 206
10.3. Contested Diplomacy 207
10.4. Impending War Entry 208
10.5. Belligerence 208
10.6. The Wider Impact of Declarations of War 209
PART 2: DESIGNING YOUR  OWN CAMPAIGNS 210
1. INTRODUCTION 210
1.1. First things First 210
1.2. Using The Editor 211
1.2.1. Editor Help File 211
1.2.2. The Information Panel 211
2. MENU BUTTONS 212

2.1. File 212
2.1.1. File γ Creating a New Campaign 212
2.1.2. File γ Open Default Campaign 212
2.1.3. File γ Open User Campaign 213
2.1.4. File γ Saving a Campaign 213
2.1.5. File γ Import Data 213
2.1.6. File γ Export Data 214
2.1.7. File γ Export Map Positions (F6) 215
2.1.8. File γ Export Dates (F7) 215
2.1.9. File γ Exit 215
2.2. Edit 216
2.2.1. Edit γ Undo 216
2.2.2. Edit γ Redo 216
2.2.3. Edit γ Lock and Unlock Scroll 216
2.2.4. Edit γ Change Video Mode (F3) 216
2.2.5. Edit γ Refresh Fonts (F4) 216
2.2.6. Edit γ Refresh Bitmaps (F5) 217
2.3. Map 217
2.3.1. General Map Drawing Tips 217
2.3.2. Map γ Edit Hex Layer 218
2.3.3. Map γ Edit Terrain Layer 219
2.3.4. Map γ Edit River Layer 219
2.3.5. Map γ Edit Road Layer 220
2.3.6. Map γ Edit Rail Layer 220
2.3.7. Map γ Edit Resource Layer 221
2.3.8. Map γ Edit Symbol Layer 221
2.3.9. Map γ Edit Text Layer 221
2.3.10. Map γ Edit Unit Layer 221
2.3.11. Map γ Edit Weather Layer 221
2.3.12. Map γ Edit Naval Layer 222
2.3.13. Map γ Edit Map Size 222
2.3.14. Map γ Shift Contents 222
2.3.15. Editing Layers 223
2.3.16. Map γ Draw 223
2.3.17. Map γ Select Item(s) 224
2.3.18. Map γ Remove Item(s) 226
2.3.19. Map γ Generate Full Map Screenshots (F8) 226
2.3.20. Map γ Draw Map Control Values (F9) 227
2.3.21. Map γ Draw Land Connection Values (F11) 227
2.3.22. Map γ Draw Naval Connection Values (F12) 227
2.4. Campaign 227
2.4.1. Campaign γ Edit Campaign Data 227
2.4.2. Campaign γ Edit Country Data 230
2.4.3. Setting Key Resources 235
2.4.4. Alphanumeric sort 235
2.4.5. Urban Resources 235
2.4.6. Add/Remove Capitals 236
2.4.7. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Unit Build Data 237
2.4.8. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Unit Cost Data 237
2.4.9. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Production Delay Data 238
2.4.10. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Combat Target Data 238
2.4.11. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Research 239
2.4.12. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Diplomacy 243
2.4.13. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Production Queue 245
2.4.14. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Strength/Reinforce/
Reformation Data 246
2.4.15. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Resource Data 246
2.4.16. Campaign γ Edit Major Country  IDs Data 247
2.4.17. Campaign γ Edit Weather Data 247
2.4.18. Campaign γ Edit Weather Data γ Advanced 248
2.4.19. Campaign γ Edit Turn/Economic Data 249
2.4.20. Campaign γ Edit Defense  Bonus Data 249
2.4.21. Campaign γ Edit Movement  Cost Data 250
2.4.22. 1. Editing Zone of Control Effects 251
2.4.23. Campaign γ Edit Combat Data 251
2.4.24. Campaign γ Edit Naval Damage Data 252
2.4.25. Campaign γ Edit Morale Data 252
2.4.26. Campaign γ Edit Penalties/ Bonuses Data 252
2.4.27. Campaign γ Edit AI Scripts 253
2.4.28. Campaign γ Edit Event Scripts 253
2.4.29. Campaign γ Replicating Layers 253
2.5. Go To γ Select Map Position 253
2.6. View 253
2.6.1. View γ Mini-Map 253
2.6.2. View γ Text 254
2.6.3. View γ Sprite Indexes 254
2.6.4. View γ Grid 254
2.6.5. View γ Borders 254
2.6.6. View γ All Layers 254
2.6.7. View γ National Colors 254
2.6.8. View γ Double Selection Columns 255
2.7. Preferences 255
2.8. Language 255
2.9. Mods 255
2.10. Help 255
2.11. Menu Buttons - Second Row 255
2.11.1. Zoom In/Out 256
3. SCRIPTS, THE AI & GENERAL ADVICE 257
3.1. Editing Event Scripts 257
3.1.1. Updating Scripts 257
3.1.2. Script Templates 258
3.1.3. Script Flags 258
3.1.4. Failsafe Dates 258
3.1.5. Condition Positions 259
3.1.6. Convoy 259
3.1.7. Resource 260
3.1.8. Supply 260
3.1.9. Strength 260
3.1.10. Unit 261
3.1.11. Free Unit 261
3.1.12. Partisan 262
3.1.13. Territory 262
3.1.14. Annexation 262
3.1.15. Surrender #1 263
3.1.16. Surrender #2 263
3.1.17. War Entry 263
3.1.18. Mobilization #1 263
3.1.22. Belligerence 264
3.1.23. Loop 264
3.1.24. Victory 265
3.1.25. Popup 265
3.1.26. Fighting Spirit 267
3.1.27. Decision 267
3.2. Editing Artificial Intelligence Scripts 268
3.2.1. Guard 269
3.2.2. Fortification 269
3.2.3. Offensive 269
3.2.4. Amphibious 269
3.2.5. Transport 269
3.2.6. Amphibious Minor 270
3.2.7. Transport Minor 270
3.2.8. Fleet 270
3.2.9. Purchases 270
3.2.10. Diplomacy 270
3.2.11. Research 270
3.3. Suggestions For Creating a New Campaign 270
3.3.1. Develop a Design 271
3.3.2. Customize Your Campaign 271
3.3.3. Add Your Own Media 273
3.3.4. Playtest Your Campaign 274
3.4. Further Advice & Information 275
3.4.1. Text on the Map Edge 275
3.4.2. Unused Terrain Sprites 275
3.4.3. Design Parameters 275
3.4.4. Testing the AI in Game 276
4. BEYOND THE CIVIL WAR 277

4.1. Unused Units 277
4.2. Convoy Raiders 279
4.3. Research Changes 279
5. CREDITS 280
Fury software 280
Matrix Games 281
PREFACE
Welcome to Strategic Command: American Civil War, where we are taking you
back to one of the greatest conflicts of the 19th century!
You will be fighting on our biggest map yet, and the base game comes with
six grand campaigns, covering the Civil War from the first shot to the last:
§ 1861 Blue and Gray

§ 1861 Manassas to Appomattox
§ 1862 Scott’s Great Snake
§ 1862 Trent War (Alternate History: What if the UK recognized the
Confederacy?)
§ 1863 Lee Rides North
§ 1864 Make Georgia Howl
This game introduces a new addition to the Fury Software team, in the shape
of Ryan O’Shea who has designed all the campaigns and written this Manual as
well as the all important Strategy Guides! Ryan is a passionate student of this
war and his knowledge of its history shines throughout this release.
In addition to thanking Ryan, we would also like to thank Bill Macon who
has now joined our team to help with programming.
This game also comes with the same Editor that the official campaigns were
designed in, so we look forward to seeing many Mods being developed too.
We hope you have fun playing the game, and of course we do welcome your
comments and feedback to help us improve it further!
Hubert Cater, President
2 18 @ 2 18 @
PART 1 
GAMEPLAY
“If it is worth a bloody struggle to establish this nation,
it is worth one to preserve it.”
Oliver P. Morton, Governor of Indiana during the Civil War.
1. INTRODUCTION
When the guns thundered around Fort Sumter on the morning of April 12th,
1861, many believed that the rebellion of the seven Southern states would be a
mere ninety day affair. Instead, the bloodless battle would be only the first act
in what would become the bloodiest conflict to be fought by the United States,
a war that forever changed the history of the nation.
In the weeks that followed Fort Sumter’s surrender, the Southern
Confederacy would grow from seven states to eleven, and tense standoffs would
be seen on the fields and in the halls of state legislatures in an attempt to sway
the dwindling numbers of border states onside. Native American tribes would
become entangled in the great conflict, some even splitting as members sought
to join the ranks of the blue and the gray. In a matter of months, the nation that
thirteen years before rode into Mexico City with just 20,000 men now had a
million under arms.
The Civil War would herald the beginning of a new era of technological
development. For the first time, railroads would be used to organize and
transport thousands of men to the battlefield. The telegraph would enable
commanders to communicate more quickly with their subordinates. Off the
coast of Virginia, the steam-powered ironclad would render the world’s sailing
ships obsolete, while experiments with balloons, submarines and machine
guns showed what was to come.
Nor was this a solely American affair. Union diplomats persuaded the great
powers of Europe to keep out of the war, while the Confederacy gambled on the
2 19 @
idea of King Cotton in an attempt to secure an ally. French Emperor Napoleon
III took advantage of the USA’s distraction to launch a military intervention
in Mexico, while Spain attempted to reclaim parts of their former empire by
occupying the Dominican Republic and fighting a war in the eastern Pacific.
In Strategic Command American Civil War, you will take the place of Presidents
Abraham Lincoln or Jefferson Davis during these turbulent times. On a map
stretching from Maryland to New Mexico, from Canada to the Caribbean,
you will lead your troops in one of history’s greatest battles. Victory will come
from wisely managing resources and men, fighting on many fronts on land,
on the rivers, and at sea. Investment in new technology, careful handling of
diplomacy with the powers of Europe, and the use of sound military strategies
will be key, but with them, your triumph is assured.
Our Editor can also be used to design your own campaigns, which can be
a very fulfilling thing to do. Our games have a thriving modding community
and this Editor means you can dive in too! Either to make slight modifications
to the official campaigns to suit your own tastes, or to make totally new ones.
Details on how to use it are included in Part 2, Designing Your Own Campaigns.
2. GETTING STARTED
2.1. Installation
2.1.1. Minimum System Requirements
CPU: 2 GHz Processor
RAM: 2 GB
OS: Windows Vista/7/8/10
Video Card: 128 MB DirectX compatible with 32-Bit Color supporting at least
1024 x 768 pixels in height and width. The program will terminate with an error
message if your current system does not support these requirements. Please check
the Control Panel γ Display Options to see if your video settings can be changed.
Sound Card: 16-Bit DirectSound compatible
HD: 1.5 GB free Hard Disk space
2 20 @
2.1.2. The Installation Process
Please ensure that your system meets the minimum requirements listed above.
If you purchased from the Slitherine or Matrix site you will have been
provided a download link for the games installer.
Have your Serial Number ready as you will need to enter it as part of the
installation process. The Serial Number is included in the order receipt for
downloads, or printed on the disk or box for hard copies.
To install the game, either double click on the installation file you
downloaded or insert the game’s disk into your drive. Follow all on-screen
prompts to complete installation.
Click Finish to close the installer and you are now ready to play!
2.1.3. File Locations

Files will be installed to two separate locations.
The master files and campaigns that come with the game will be installed in
the Program Files directory here, unless you change it during installation:
C:\Program Files\Matrix Games\Strategic Command American Civil War
However, all user files, including saves and custom campaigns will be
stored in your folder:
\User\Documents\My Games\Strategic Command American Civil War
Where User is the name of your log-in.
Warning: Do not move any files from one location to the other, and certainly
do not delete any from the main installation location.
Tip to Modders! When launching the Editor, it has 2 ‘Open Campaigns’
buttons, one for default campaigns and one for custom user made campaigns.
In game however, all campaigns will be listed in the same ‘Select Campaign’
screen no matter where they might be located.
2.1.4. Resolving Issues

If you have experienced any issues with installation or when trying to launch
or play Strategic Command it is recommended to run the installation utility
and/or the game as an Administrator. Either logging in with an Administrator
account or using the following steps can achieve this:
2 21 @
1. Right clicking the Shortcut
2. Select Properties
3. On the Shortcut tab select Advanced
4. Then Select the Run as Administrator checkbox.
Should you encounter any problems with the installation or game itself, please
visit our Help Desk at www.matrixgames.com/helpdesk or post in our Support
Forums at www.matrixgames.com. Please provide as much detail on your
issue as you can.
2.1.5. Uninstalling the Game

Please use the Add/Remove Programs option from the Windows Control
Panel or the Uninstall shortcut in the game’s Windows START menu folder to
uninstall the game. Uninstalling through any other method will not properly
uninstall the game.
2.1.6. Game Updates

In order to maintain our product excellence, Matrix Games releases updates
containing new features, enhancements, and corrections to any known issues.
All our updates are available free on our website and can also be downloaded
quickly and easily by clicking on the Check for Update link in your Game menu
or by using the Update Game shortcut in your windows START menu folder
for the game.
We also periodically make beta (preview) updates and other content available
to registered owners. Keeping up with these special updates is made easy and
is free by signing up for a Matrix Games Members Club account. When you are
signed up, you can then register your Matrix Games products in order to receive
access to these game related materials. Doing so is a simple two step process:
Sign Up for a Matrix Games Members Club account – this is a one time
procedure; once you have signed up for a Matrix account, you are in the system
and will not need to sign up again.
Go to www.matrixgames.com and click the Members’ hyperlink at the top.
In the new window, select Register Now and follow the on-screen instructions.
When you’re finished, click the Please Create my New Account button, and a
confirmation e-mail will be sent to your specified e-mail account.
2 22 @
Register a New Game Purchase – Once you have signed up for a Matrix Games
Member account, you can then register any Matrix Games title you own in your
new account. To do so, log in to your account on the Matrix Games website. Click
Register Game near the top to register your new Matrix Games purchase.
If you purchased your game while already logged in, it will be automatically
registered for you. We strongly recommend registering your game as it will give
you a backup location for your serial number should you lose it in the future.
Once you’ve registered your game, when you log in to the Members’ section
you can view your list of registered titles by clicking my Games. Each game title
is a hyperlink that will take you to an information page on the game (including
all the latest news on that title).
Also on this list is a Downloads hyperlink that takes you to a page that has
all the latest public and registered downloads, including patches, for that
particular title. You can also access patches and updates via our Games Section
at www.matrixgames.com/games, once there select the game you wish to
check updates for, then click the Downloads link at the top of the game page.
Certain value content and additional downloads will be restricted
to Members Club members. So it is always worthwhile to sign up there.
Remember, once you have signed up for a Matrix Games Members Club
account, you do not have to sign up again. At that point you are free to register
for any Matrix Games product you purchase. Thank you and enjoy your game!
2.1.7. Game Forums

For game related questions and discussions, please visit our Discussion Forum
at Matrix Games. We really appreciate feedback, and want to hear from you!
Our forum is also a good place to meet up with other players, to arrange
games, discuss changes and see what mods players are producing.
2.1.8. Help and Feedback

The best way to contact us if you are having a problem with one of our games
is through our help Desk.
Our Help Desk has FAQs as well as a dedicated support staff that answer
questions within 24 hours, Monday through Friday. Support questions sent in
2 23 @
on Saturday and Sunday may wait 48 hours for a reply. Visit our help Desk by
going to http://www.matrixgames.com/helpdesk
2.1.9. Error Handling

Should the game ever crash, an “ERROR” folder is created.
The contents of this folder can be found in the following folder with your
user name substituted for <USERNAME>:
C:\Users\<USERNAME>\Documents\My Games\Strategic Command
American Civil War
If applicable, an ERROR.sav file is created and placed in this folder (i.e., the last
known turn and game status before the crash). An errorlog.txt file is also placed
in this folder. These files may be helpful for identifying and fixing problems that
might arise, and may be sent to support@furysoftware.com for evaluation.
3. UNDERSTANDING THE GAME

INTERFACE
3.1. Main Menu
When the Main Menu comes up, select the option you wish from the choices
available to change settings, start or continue a game against the AI, or to play
Multiplayer.
3.1.1. Settings
Sound Volume – move the slider to adjust the volume of sound effects. Sliding
it to the far left will turn game sounds off.
Music Volume – move the slider to adjust music volume. Sliding it to the far
left will turn music off.
Video Mode – here you can amend the game resolution, and also switch on/off
the Full Screen option.
Mods – click this to view any downloaded graphical or sound mods. Tick the box
on the right to select one; clicking again will deselect it. Press OK when done.
2 24 @
Installing Mods – these must be installed in the USER folder for the game, e.g.
Users\<username>\Documents\My Games\Strategic Command American
Civil War\Mods
Mods must be installed in the following format:
o Users\<username>\Documents\My Games\Strategic Command
American Civil War\Mods\<modfoldername>
American Civil War\Mods\<modfoldername>\Bitmaps
American Civil War\Mods\<modfoldername>\Interface etc.
3.1.2. Preferences
Interface Tips – This turns tips on/off when hovering with your mouse over a button.
Alternate Date Format – Changes the format, e.g. from 12. April 1861 to April 12. 1861.
3.2. New Game

Select New Game from the Main
Menu to start playing against the AI.
When New Game is selected,
a Select Campaign dialog appears
which lists the Campaign Name and
Start Date for all available campaigns.
This dialog orders major campaigns
first, followed by any mini-campaigns and then any user made campaigns,
should there be any.
As each campaign is selected, additional campaign information is provided
for that campaign in the panel on the right that includes:
§ Turn Length (Seasonal or Daily)

§ Which side Starts
§ Turn sequence (Alternate or Simultaneous)
§ Whether Production is Normalized*
§ The name(s) of the campaign’s creator(s)
§ The campaign’s name and a short description
2 25 @
*Normalized Production ensures that production per time period is more
balanced in campaigns with variable seasonal turn lengths. Its effect will be to
increase production in winter turns and decrease it in summer turns.
Click on Play Campaign to start a selected campaign, Victory to review the
campaign’s Victory Conditions, or Cancel to exit to the Main Menu.
3.2.1. Choose Side

When playing against the AI, you will have the option to play as either the
Union or Confederate side, and you can select to have one or more of the
Majors on your side played by the AI.
Units belonging to any Majors that are set to be controlled by the AI will
appear darkened, as though they have already moved. This is just a visual
indicator to show that they are AI controlled.
Even if you have set a Major to be AI controlled, there is nothing stopping you
from moving any of its units, conducting research, diplomacy etc., the AI will take
over any unmoved units and management of affairs once you press end turn.
You can swap sides during a
game too! Simply when it’s your
turn, go to the Options screen,
click to play the opposite side
and the AI will immediately
take over. You can also turn on
or off the AI control of friendly
Majors at any time. All of these can be changed an unlimited number of times
during a game.
Note: A minimum of one Major on your chosen side must be under your
control. We strongly recommend that either the Union or Confederacy is
under human control, as the entry of other Majors is considered a rare event
in the game.
3.2.2. Difficulty
Choose a setting to align with the level of challenge you wish to face when
playing against the AI.
2 26 @
The Difficulty level defaults to Intermediate, with no bonuses or penalties
to the Computer. Use the up/down arrows to choose between Green; Novice;
Intermediate; Veteran and Expert.
Higher settings will reward the AI with greater plunder when they conquer
countries. Some scripted events will also only occur at the higher difficulty
levels, as a way of providing a greater challenge to skilled players.
In addition, the Difficulty levels provide bonuses to the AI’s Spotting,
Experience and Military Production Points (MPPs). They do not influence
combat formulas.
Note: Difficulty Settings can be changed during a game against the AI. So
if you find things too easy, or too difficult, modify the settings and continue!
3.2.3. Computer Bonus

The Difficulty settings can be fine tuned by clicking on the Computer Bonuses
buttons beneath to change the AI’s Spotting, Experience and MPP (i.e. income)
bonuses.
After you’ve finished making your selections click on OK to proceed. You
will now be taken to the Options screen.
3.3. Options
When you start a new
game, or load a saved turn,
you will be presented with
an Options dialog to select
basic and advanced game
options.
The text for activated
options will appear in
yellow, deactivated ones in
gray. Once a game has begun some options cannot be changed, and these will
appear in a darker gray.
Once you have finished reviewing and changing any options from their
default settings as desired, click OK to start the game.
2 27 @
3.3.1. Multiplayer Options
In Multiplayer this screen is slightly different as on the right hand side instead
of the Artificial Intelligence options, there is a button to turn on/off Quick
Animation in Multiplayer Replays. If this is turned on then the replays of your
opponents’ turns will be faster. Pressing Pause/Break on your keyboard will
pause the replay, and it will continue on pressing Pause/Break for a second
time.
Note: There is no compulsion to amend any settings, as you can just click
OK to play with the default settings.
3.3.2. View
3-D Units – Choose to display either three-dimensional unit sprites or NATO
counters.
National Colors – Display the map with National Colors on/off.
Last Turn Summary – Displays a summary of major events that occurred in
the last player’s turn. The summary is broken down into three main categories:
Combat, Military, and Research. Combat damage reports include convoy
raiding and strategic bombing results. Military activity reports include
diplomatic results.
Messages – Turn the display of scripted messages on/off.
3.3.3. Preferences
Fog of War – Play each turn with limited visibility of enemy units on the map.
Full visibility is given to enemy units that are adjacent to a friendly unit;
Partial visibility is given to any unit that is located within the spotting range of
a friendly unit or resource, while all remaining enemy units are hidden from
view unless your units spot them.
Every unit type has a Spotting Range (Land) for spotting enemy land
units, and another, Spotting Range (Naval) for enemy Naval units. This is the
distance at which they can automatically see enemy units, apart from Silent
Submarines, as these won’t be automatically spotted.
The location of enemy Defenses (or “Forts”) will always be known to the
other player, as they are immobile and many of them were built before the
2 28 @
beginning of the war. Details such as morale and strength will only be visible
when a friendly unit is adjacent to them, just like any other unit.
On land, most infantry units have a Spotting Range of 1 hex and cavalry can
spot 3 hexes, while at sea it is normally 1 hex.
Fog of war will also hide resource strengths, the research the enemy has
achieved, unit honors, unit production, convoy information, the current
balance of MPPs, and Industrial Modifiers.
Note: If a Multiplayer game finishes when either one side has attained its
Victory Conditions, or time has run out and a stalemate has been reached,
passwords are set to null so that items not previously visible under Fog of War
can be viewed by both sides.
Weather – Play the game with realistic weather effects that affect unit
movement and combat.
The map is divided into unique Weather Zones consisting of Temperate,
Arid, Frozen or Desert climates. The weather can change in each zone once
a turn in accordance with that zone’s settings, the season and the previous
turn’s weather.
The current weather in a hex is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
If the weather is fine then merely the Weather Zone type will be shown, e.g.
Temperate.
The weather in the various zones can be seen while scrolling the map. The
map hexes themselves will also change slightly to reflect the current weather,
such as brown hues for Mud, whitened frostings for Snow, and rough seas
for Storms at sea. These visuals will also help you to identify changes in the
weather.
Undo Moves – This option allows you to undo a move providing that move
hasn’t disclosed any previously unseen enemy units. It also cannot be used to
undo an attack.
Retreats – enable/disable the ability for low strength units to retreat when
attacked.
2 29 @
3.3.4. Artificial Intelligence
Show Moves/Combat – Turn the display of combat during the AI’s turn on/off.
Quick Animation – Selecting this speeds up the AI’s turns though you will
observe less detail while it is carrying out its actions.
Messages (AI Turn) – if unticked, you will not see the Messages that only
appear in the AI’s turn.
Border Style – Select White, Orange or Black national borders.
Land Counter Style – Select your choice of unit bases for land and air units.
Naval Counter Style – Select your choice of unit bases for naval units.
Click OK to proceed, Advanced to see further options, or Cancel to return
to the Main Menu.
Note: Once a unit has expended all its Action Points, it will display a
darkened base irrespective of the option chosen above.
3.4. Advanced Options

3.4.1. View
HQ Attachment Highlights – Clicking on an HQ highlights in green all the
units under that particular HQ’s command. Additionally, when an attached
unit is selected, the parent HQ is highlighted in green. If the HQ is in Auto-
Assist or Manual Mode then clicking on it highlights in blue any potential units
that can be attached to it.
HQ Names – Hide or show names on HQ units on the map.
Enemy Target Highlights – Clicking on a unit highlights in red all enemy units
and resources within its range that can potentially be attacked from its current
location.
Estimated Losses Highlights – Clicking on a unit displays the predicted
combat odds above units that it can attack from its current position.
Unit Experience Medals – Hide or show unit experience medals in the unit
information box in the lower left of the screen. If this is unticked then the unit
experience will show in numeric form.
Unit Strength Values – Hide or show unit strength values on the map.
Resource Strength Values – Hide or show resource strengths on the map.
These include all ports, mines, oil fields, cities and capitals.
2 30 @
Unit / Resource Research Levels – Hide or show research values for units and
resources on the map.
Borders – Display the map with national borders on/off.
Fighting Spirit Bars – Hide or display Fighting Spirit Bars in game. These
show the current Fighting Spirit status for all Majors.
3.4.2. Map Text

Show Text – If unticked then the Map Text will be hidden.
Show Fighting Spirit Objectives – With this ticked, locations whose capture
will provide Fighting Spirit boosts or penalties will be shown with the phrase
FS Objective.
Show Key Resources – With this ticked, Key Resources like Capitals, Industrial
Centers etc will be labeled as such on the map.
Hide Text During Map Scroll – Hiding the text while scrolling speeds up the
scrolling.
Fade In Text After Scroll – If ticked, this will slow the return of text to the screen.
Show Text With Faded Outline – ticking this will add an outline effect to Map
Text.
Scroll(s) Before Text Hides – Here you can set my many scrolls/nudges with
the mouse it will take before the Map Text hides. This can be set to a maximum
of 50 steps.
3.4.3. Preferences
Research – Untick this to play the game without Research. By default, if a
campaign designer has enabled Research in the Editor then it will be selectable
as a game option. If Research has not been enabled by the designer then it
cannot be enabled here.
Diplomacy – Untick this to play the game without Diplomacy. By default, if
a campaign designer has enabled Diplomacy in the Editor then it will be
selectable as a game option. If Diplomacy has not been enabled by the designer
then it cannot be enabled here.
Production Delay – Leave this ticked to play the game with realistic military
production time delays for all unit purchases rather than “instant” builds. The
2 31 @
production delay option means you have to plan ahead and anticipate your
future requirements.
Note: This option does not apply to Partisans or the three types of Transport,
as these appear instantly even if you are playing with a Production Delay. Also,
units in the Production Queue at the start of a campaign will arrive on or after
the scheduled date regardless of what you decide here.
Soft Build Limits – Tick this to play the game with flexible build limits for
Major countries to accommodate those “what ifs” of history. By default, a
campaign imposes “hard” limits that restrict unit builds to pre-established
force pool limits. Each specific unit type for each country will have a certain
number of allowable builds.
“Soft” build limits allow you to surpass those limits, but with a penalty
applied to each additional unit purchase that exceeds the pre-set limit.
The cost penalty is cumulative for each additional unit. So for example, the
penalty may be 10% for the first extra unit, 20% for the second extra unit, and
so on. Since reinforcement costs are directly related to current unit costs, the
cost penalty is also applied to regular and elite reinforcements.
Right-Click Unit Action Menu – If enabled then right-clicking on units will
bring up a choice of actions. These are also on the left hand side of the lower
information panel. If this is disabled then right-clicking will cancel/deselect
the current selection.
Disable Game End Date – Tick this to play past the campaign’s default end
date. Any Victory scripts set to run only at that date will not fire, however those
that are set to run at any time once in game conditions are satisfied will still
fire as expected.
3.4.4. Scripts
When Scripts is selected from the Advanced options dialog, a dialog appears
which lists event names by script type.
A flag (“X”) at the far right of each event name can be used to toggle the
event on or off by clicking in its box. If a script is turned off then it won’t show
an “X” and it won’t be highlighted.
Scripts that are turned off won’t occur during the game.
2 32 @
These selections can be changed during a game against the computer. For
a Hotseat game, changes can only be made when starting the game, never
during one.
Changes to activate or deactivate scripts cannot be made in PBEM games,
as both parties need to play using exactly the same campaigns in order to avoid
any changes that aren’t open and agreed by both sides.
The script flags are quite useful for customizing each game for variability,
or for providing a handicap if one is desired.
Those that have the letters “DE” in front of them are connected to Decision
Events, so it will be best to refer to the list of these in the relevant campaign’s
Strategy Guide before turning any off.
By toggling the flags on or off, you can easily customize some elements of a
campaign without having to modify it in the Editor.
Note that the flagship 1861 Blue and Gray campaign includes several special
Decision Events that control major gameplay elements, such as partisans and
European entry, that can be turned on or off with a single click:
2 33 @
§ DE 1000: Disable to Play Without European Entry turns on or off all events
associated with the mobilization of the UK, France and Spain.
§ DE 1001: Disable to Play Without Partisans turns on or off all events that
will spawn partisan units on the map or damage resources. For game
balance, if these are turned off, the Union will receive a small MPP
penalty when it occupies certain parts of the Confederacy, to represent
the costs of garrisons in those areas.
§ DE 1002 and DE 1003: Disable to Hide All Historical Popups turns on or off
all historical popup events, which have no impact on gameplay but are
included as a matter of historical interest, such as the Formation of the
predecessor of the Red Cross.
§ DE 1004: Disable to Remove all Strategic Advice Popups turns on or off all
‘strategic advice’ popups, messages intended to give you advice as you
play. These do not directly impact gameplay.
§ DE 1005: Disable to Hide Diplomatic Warning Popups turns on or off a set of
messages that inform players when the UK, France and Spain reach the
mobilization threshold of 30%, and every 10% thereafter. These do not
directly impact gameplay.
Click OK to return to the Advanced options when done.
3.4.4.1. Options in Multiplayer

Unlike a game against the AI where you have the option to change settings
during the game, all Multiplayer games have some of their set-up options, e.g.
Fog of War, Undo Moves and Weather, locked in place for the duration of the
game.
However, things that will not affect the balance of the game itself, such as
the icons displaying, can be modified at any time during the game.
3.4.4.2. Taskbar Icon

When playing, a Strategic Command Taskbar icon is added to the system tray
located at the bottom right hand corner on most systems.
2 34 @
If playing against the AI, the icon will flash when the AI has finished its
turn.
Note that you can generally use Alt-Tab to switch out of a game, so you can
do something else while you are waiting for the AI, but you cannot switch back
until the AI has finished. The game is not frozen; it is just completing its tasks
before it will pop back up. Waiting for the Taskbar icon to start flashing will
avoid any delay.
3.5. The In-Game Interface

3.5.1. Left Hand Buttons
The flags of the active Major countries on your side
show at the top left of the screen. Beneath each one’s
flag you will see the number of Military Production
Points (MPPs) it currently has available, followed by
its Mobilization %:
If a Major’s flag is selected then its flag, name and
MPP status will appear in the top row starting from
the top left corner, to signify that it is this country
that is currently selected.
Clicking on the smaller flags (not the large one in the top left corner) will
take you to that country’s capital on the map. Right clicking on the flag will
bring up the Production table which shows units currently scheduled to be
available for deployment during the game.
Hovering your mouse over the smaller flags will display more information
on that Major, including its Fighting Spirit value, Industrial Modifier and the
Majors it is currently at war with.
Major countries whose Mobilization % is less than 100% cannot yet play an
active role in the war, though you can move their units, conduct research, and
make some preparations for when they will enter the war.
2 35 @
3.5.2. Top Row Buttons
3.5.2.1. War Maps

In order to attack a neutral country it is necessary to declare war on it.
To do this select the War Maps button at the top of the screen or use the
Ctrl-M Hotkey. This will bring up a map which shows flags in the locations of
the capitals for all countries that haven’t yet surrendered. Countries currently
at war with you will display a pair of crossed sabers instead of a flag.
Click on the % button to view the Mobilization status of any neutrals.
This shows how close they are to joining one side or the other, with pro-
Union countries (a term that here extends to other entities that function as
countries in the game, such as border states) being highlighted in blue and
pro-Confederate countries in red.
Unless declared war upon, or entering the war via a scripted event, when
countries reach 100% they will join the relevant side at the end of their opposing
side’s turn.
3.5.2.2. How to Declare War

Select which of your Majors is declaring war by clicking on their flag in the
bottom left beneath the map display.
Now click on the target country’s flag on the map itself. Icons displaying
the targeted country’s resources at the bottom of the screen will now appear,
showing an indication of the potential worth of conquering this country.
Tip! If you click on the map it will zoom in. This can be very useful when the
flags are close together.
To make the declaration of war, now click on the Declare War button at the
bottom left. A warning message will come up, where you can either confirm
the declaration or cancel it. Click on Close to return to the main game screen.
As declarations of war can trigger political reactions, any applicable ones
from your declaration of war will now take place.
Only Majors that are at 100% Mobilization can declare war, and you cannot
declare war on any Majors that are on your side.
2 36 @
Note: Some nations represented on the map cannot be attacked or
otherwise interacted with for historical reasons (such as Guatemala or the
Dakota Territory). The declare war button will be grayed out if one of these
nations is selected.
3.5.2.3. The Strategy Map and Convoy Map

While in the War Maps area, you can also review the Strategy Map and Convoy
Map by clicking on their relevant buttons on the right.
The Strategy Map is a zoomed out map of the theater covered by the
campaign, showing the locations of all friendly units, and all known locations
of enemy units. If you click on the Strategy map you will return to the gaming
area, in the location of the map where you clicked.
Click on Close to return to the previous screen, and then Close again to exit
the War Maps area.
2 37 @
3.5.2.4. Purchase
Units may be purchased at any time during your turn by selecting Purchase
from the button at the top of the screen, or using the Ctrl-P Hotkey.
Select the Major’s flag that you wish to purchase units for at the top. Under
the Select Country heading, both that Major and any Minors subordinate to it
will show.
You can review the various unit types available for each country by clicking
on them in the Select Unit column.
If the unit type is available for production and you have sufficient MPPs it
will be shown in white text. If you do not have sufficient MPPs then the text
will be gray, while if it is not currently available it will be shown in red. This
could be due to the Build Limit not yet having been reached, or because the date
when this unit type becomes available for purchase hasn’t yet been reached.
If the latter is the case, when you click on any units in red the date when it
will become available for purchase will be displayed underneath the unit icon.
The number in brackets to the right of each unit type represents the number
that can be purchased, while the right hand number under the heading PD
represents the Production Delay.
The Production Delay is the number of months it will take from purchase
for the unit to be prepared and ready for battle.
So in the example overleaf, the Union can purchase 18 more Divisions, and
after purchasing 1 we will have to wait 3 months before it will be ready to be
deployed:
A graphical representation of the selected unit type appears in the top
middle of the screen, along with the MPP cost of the unit. Available MPPs are
shown in the top right, so you can consider whether this purchase is within
your budget.
Named units are shown to the right of this column. With HQ units, the
commander’s rating is shown in brackets after its name, with higher numbers
representing better commanders.
Tip! Excluding Partisans, Land units that are destroyed at supply 5 or
higher are cheaper to buy back and will be ready in half the indicated time. The
names of these units will have an asterisk after their name, and it is strongly
2 38 @
recommended to purchase these units first. In all default American Civil War
campaigns, this ability only extends to those units that have names (such as
Divisions), and not to unnamed units such as Artillery.
The Combat Values of all unit types are shown on the right hand side of the
screen, so you can review these when considering which to purchase.
In the bottom right of the screen any available upgrades for the selected
unit will be shown. Clicking on the up arrow(s) to apply these will increase
both the cost and Combat Values of the unit, and this will be reflected both
underneath the unit icon and also in the Combat Values area above.
When you have made your selection, click on the Purchase button in the
bottom center to purchase the unit.
When you have completed reviewing this screen and/or making purchases,
click Close at the bottom right to leave this area.
2 39 @
3.5.2.5. Production
To view units that are currently scheduled to arrive during the game, click
on the Production button in the bottom right. This will show all units due to
arrive for the selected Major and its Minors, their arrival dates and location (if
applicable). To select a different Major, click on its flag at the top.
Note: Units due to deploy by script, e.g. ones mentioned in Decision Events,
will not appear in the Production table.
When you’ve finished reviewing this area, click OK at the bottom to return
to the previous screen.
3.5.2.6. New Units

When new units are available for deployment this button will be highlighted,
whereas when none are available, or if there are no viable locations to deploy
any units, then it is grayed out.
When the button is highlighted, click on it to bring up the details of any
units that are now available for deployment. If there is more than one unit
available, select the one you wish to deploy and click OK.
Units can generally only deploy in their home country, so the screen will
automatically take you to the Capital of the country whose unit you have
selected to deploy. Unlike previous entries in the Strategic Command series,
in American Civil War units can only be deployed in Cities, Major Cities, and
Capitals.
The locations where
you can deploy this unit
will be highlighted as per
the example below:
Left click on one of
the highlighted hexes to
deploy the unit.
It isn’t necessary to
deploy any or all new units
this turn, and if you don’t
wish to deploy them just
2 40 @
click Cancel. However, there is rarely anything to be gained from delaying
deploying any units, so it is generally recommended to deploy units in the turn
they become available.
3.5.2.7. Diplomacy
Select Diplomacy or use Ctrl-D to bring up the Diplomacy dialog. This is where
you can attempt to influence neutral powers to swing your way.
Every Major that has entered the war has a number of chits, and these can
be invested for a cost in MPPs. Each invested chit then has a small % chance per
turn of swinging the targeted country towards your side. The more chits you
invest, the greater the % chance.
In the countries list on the left hand side, neutral Majors will be listed
first, followed by all neutral Minors, in alphabetical order. Note that the term
“countries”, here and elsewhere in this manual, extends to other powers such
as the border states and Indian tribes.
To the right of their name will be an icon denoting their leaning and which
Major with the same leaning they would be subordinate to if they were to
enter the war. For instance, Osage shows the Union flag as it would be a Union
Minor were it to join the Union’s side in the war.
The % column shows their current Mobilization value towards the side that
the icon denotes.
Select the flag of the Major that you wish to carry out some diplomacy.
Its flag will now have a green border around it. Your available MPPs and
Diplomacy chits (Influence Remaining) are shown in the top right.
Now click on a country that you may wish to attempt to influence. The cost
of investing against a given country will be displayed, and this will vary as
neutral Majors are more expensive to invest diplomacy in than Minors.
The % chance of a diplomatic success per chit per turn is shown in the
middle of the screen. If multiple chits have been invested, whether by one or
more of your Majors, then a cumulative % chance of success will be shown. This
is the % chance of success every turn.
To invest a diplomacy chit, click on the “up” button in the middle of the
screen, and click Yes on the confirmation message that comes up to proceed.
2 41 @
Note: if you are designing your own campaign, it is possible to limit the
number of chits that may be invested into a particular country, representing
a nation’s historic neutrality or reluctance to enter the war. This feature is not
used in American Civil War’s default campaigns.
You can also declare war from the Diplomacy screen. To do this, select
the Major that is to declare war, click on the country you wish to attack, and
then press the Declare War button at the bottom. Confirm your declaration
by clicking Yes.
Click on OK to return to the main game screen.
3.5.2.8. Influencing Major Powers

Neutral Major powers can be influenced diplomatically, but they will not
switch sides. Thus Union diplomacy against the UK could at best help to slow
the UK’s entrance into the war, perhaps to the point that they never enter the
war on either side, but the UK will never become pro-Union.
3.5.2.9. Research
Research may be conducted at any time during game play by clicking on the
Research tab or pressing Ctrl-R.
Only Major countries can conduct research, and there are two types of
research categories: Manual and Automatic. Manual categories occupy all of
the left hand column, Automatic the right hand column.
Manual categories mean that you apply the research successes individually
to your units and resources by upgrading them. This allows you to decide
where these upgrades are most needed and to target your income accordingly
where it matters.
Automatic categories mean that you benefit immediately from successes in
those categories without having to manually upgrade any units or resources.
Selecting one of the Major country flags at the top of the Research dialog
will set the screen to display that country’s research fields.
Available MPPs for investment are shown at the top right, along with the
current number of MPPs invested. At the bottom right you can see the maximum
number of MPPs that can be invested in research at any period of the game.
2 42 @
To the right of each category you can see in order:
§ The cost per chit

§ The number of chits currently invested
§ Up/Down buttons for investing or reclaiming chits.
§ Your current level of research*
§ The maximum level that can be attained*
* If these appear in red then the maximum level has already been attained.
To invest in a category, click on the yellow “up” button. If this isn’t showing
in yellow then no research is possible in this category. You can invest as many
chits into a category as are allowed, providing you have sufficient MPPs. If a
category isn’t available for research, then its name will appear as N/A.
3.5.2.10. Research Tooltips

Providing Interface Tips is turned on, hover your mouse over the name of each
research category and a description of that category will appear in the panel at
the bottom left.
Those categories that are already invested in will appear with a black outline
surrounding the category name box. If progress has been made towards
researching the next level, then a green bar will be present within that box,
giving a visual representation of progress.
By hovering your mouse over the names of the categories that you are
currently researching, you will see your current research progress as a %.
3.5.2.11. Reclaiming Chits

To reclaim an invested chit, click on a yellow “down” button. You will regain
50% of the chit’s cost in MPPs. It is best to only do this in extreme situations
where MPPs are desperately needed for other tasks.
3.5.2.12. The Research Table

Select Table at the bottom of the screen to bring up the Research Table dialog.
This table summarizes the current research levels attained by all friendly Majors.
If Fog of War is turned off then enemy research levels will also be displayed.
2 43 @
Tip! See The Research Mechanism in Chapter 8 for more details on how
research works.
Click on OK at any time to return to the Game Menu.
3.5.2.13. Reports
Click on the Reports button to see charts, tables and graphs displaying income,
losses and overall investment in categories such as Research and Diplomacy
since the start of the game.
3.5.3. Right Hand Buttons

End Turn – click this red button to end your turn.
Options – this brings up the Options screen.
Info – This brings up the following buttons:
Hotkeys – this brings up a list of the game’s Hotkeys.
User Manual – this brings up the Game Manual.
Strategy Guide – this brings up the campaign’s Strategy Guide.
Victory – this brings up the campaign’s Victory Conditions.
Save – save the turn. This allows you to continue at a later time.
Quit – to exit the game.
3.5.4. Unit Display

All friendly units and any enemy units adjacent to yours will display
information on and around their graphical representation.
From the left there is the Activation icon, then their strength, and to the
right of their strength value their research upgrade levels, if applicable, will
be displayed.
These research numbers are in order from left to right, so its first upgrade
category will show on the left, with a second or third if applicable showing to
its right.
As a unit gains experience, white dots representing each full
experience point will appear above its strength value:
2 44 @
3.5.5. Information Panel
This panel at the bottom of the screen will display unit, terrain and resource
information as you hover your mouse over features on the map.
Click on the mini-map in the middle of this panel to jump to different parts of
the map. This is a very quick and useful way of moving around the playing area.
Providing you don’t have anything selected on the map, the panels to
either side of the mini-map will display information on the hex your mouse is
currently hovering over.
If you select a unit by left-clicking on it, or if you merely hover your mouse
over it (providing you don’t already have one selected) then information on
that unit will be displayed in the left hand panel.
With one of your units selected, if you hover your mouse over an enemy
unit then providing it is within your attack range, information on the enemy
unit will display in the right hand panel.
If you hover your mouse over an enemy held resource whose strength is
hidden by Fog of War, the display will show the MPP value per strength point
of this resource. This gives you an idea as to the value of the resource, without
giving away its actual strength.
3.5.5.1. Combat Predictions
2 45 @
With a friendly unit selected and the mouse hovered over an enemy unit in
attack range, the mini-map will disappear and be replaced by a Combat
Predictions panel. This shows the likely casualties should you attack this unit
with your currently selected unit. In the example below the prediction is for
the attacker to suffer 4 points of damage and the defender 6.
Given the unpredictable nature of combat, actual results may vary by 1
damage point in either direction.
The Combat Predictions panel also displays factors impacting on the combat
result, such as launching a Prepared Attack and attacking across a river. These
are both included in the example above, where they are represented by a pair
of muskets for the Prepared Attack, and a wavy symbol for attacking across a
river.
The abbreviations shown in the panel represent the following (some of
which will definitely not be seen in any of our official American Civil War
campaigns):
SA Soft Attack
IA Infantry Attack
CA Cavalry Attack
ARTA Artillery Attack
FA Fort Attack
ATA Armored Train Attack
TA Tank Attack
FTRA Fighter Attack
BMRA Bomber Attack
BA Balloon Attack
ICA Ironclad Attack
WA Wooden Ship Attack
CVA Carrier Attack
SUA Sub Attack
TRNA Transport Attack
AAA Anti-Aircraft Attack
RESA Resource Attack
SD Soft Defense
2 46 @
ID Infantry Defense
CD Cavalry Defense
ARTD Artillery Defense
FD Fort Defense
ATD Armored Train Defense
TD Tank Defense
FTRD Fighter Defense
BMRD Bomber Defense
BD Balloon Defense
ICD Ironclad Defense
WD Wooden Ship Defense
CVD Carrier Defense
SUD Sub Defense
TRND Transport Defense
AAD Anti-Aircraft Defense
RESD Resource Defense
3.5.5.2. Information Panel Buttons

Above the panels are some handy buttons for making your gaming easier!
In the middle are Previous and Next unit buttons. Use these to scroll
through your forces. These buttons scroll by unit type, so for example, if you
have a Naval unit selected, the next/previous unit will be another Naval unit.
Note: These buttons will not work for AI controlled units on your turn.
The buttons alongside the Previous and Next unit buttons will also display
tool-tips if you hover your mouse over them. Many of these are alternatives to
either using the game’s Hotkeys, or to save you having to right-click on units
or resources to carry out actions.
The Upgrade and Reinforce buttons on the right hand side are among the
most useful. If you select one and then hover your mouse over your units, the
tool icon will change to orange and a cost (in MPPs) will display for upgrading
or reinforcing them, depending on the one selected. This is the quickest way of
upgrading or reinforcing large numbers of units.
2 47 @
3.6. Further Interface Information
3.6.1. National Colors
Each Major and their associated Minors has a unique color on the map that
represents the territory they control.
When units are selected, their names will also appear in their respective
National Color, and this has the advantage of showing at a glance which Major
a Minor is subordinate to, i.e. Choctaw unit names are in gray, matching their
status as a Minor to the Confederacy.
Confederacy
UK
France
Spain
Union
Mexico
3.6.2. Glossary of Abbreviations

IM – Industrial Modifier
FS – Fighting Spirit
FS Objective – Fighting Spirit Objective
MPPs – Military Production Points
3.6.3. Symbols On The Map

Each type of terrain or resource can have several different properties
depending upon its type. These can be movement penalties, defense bonuses
or penalties, and additionally for resources, supply and income values.
2 48 @
3.6.4. Terrain Symbols
River Bush
Major River Field
Lake Bocage
Major Lake Oasis
Marsh Desert
Forest Depression
Jungle Road
Hill Dirt Road
Mountain Rail
High Mountain Navigable River
Note: Empty islands do not contain a source of supply and cannot serve as
a base, so if any exist on a map then units should not land in these islands as
they will become stranded there.
2 49 @
3.6.5. Resource Symbols
Oil Capital
Mine Major Capital
Settlement Fortress
Town Major Fortress
Fortified Town Fortification
City River Port
Major City Port
3.6.6. Miscellaneous Symbols

Convoy Routes – active Union convoys are shown in blue,
Confederate ones in red, and all inactive convoys in white.
Here are some Confederate convoys heading from Blockade
Runner ports in the Bahamas to the Confederacy:
Raiding Locations – place naval units on these locations to
damage your opponent’s economy.
Loops – units placed on these locations will transfer

to a new location after a short delay, as per the
description on the map.
2 50 @
Information – these hexes are important for certain game
effects. Mousing over them will provide further details.
Stars – these hexes are important for certain game effects.

In the default campaigns, red stars indicate the locations of
Victory Objectives that will determine who wins the game.
Flags – these hexes are important for certain game effects,

usually related to the mobilization of that nation.
State Borders – marks the locations of state borders on

the game map. This has no direct impact on gameplay.
3.6.7. Combat Interface Definitions

Across River Combat Penalty – 20% Reduction in Readiness when units attack
across a River.
Across Major River Combat Penalty – 35% Reduction in Readiness when units
attack across a Major River. This applies to both the ‘Major River’ terrain
feature, and the large navigable rivers (made up of Land+Sea hexes, such as
the Mississippi).
Hidden Attacker Readiness Bonus – 15% boost in Readiness for hidden units
that the enemy stumbles upon without having seen them first.
Prepared Attack Readiness Bonus – 40% boost in Readiness for units attacking
before moving (50% if the attacking unit is attached to an HQ with a Rating
greater than or equal to 8). Note that this has been significantly increased
when compared with our previous games.
2 51 @
3.6.8. Hiding the Interface
Press F4 on your keyboard to hide the Interface. Press it again or deselect a unit
or resource and the Interface will reappear.
3.6.9. Target Types

Every unit has Attack and Defense values relating to the following Target Types:
§ Soft
§ Infantry
§ Cavalry
§ Artillery
§ Fort
§ Armored Train
§ - (this is an unused slot)
§ Balloon
§ Ironclad
§ Wooden (Ship)
§ Sub
§ Transport
§ Resource
Each unit also has the following values:
§ Spotting (Land)
§ Spotting (Naval)
§ Action Points
§ Operational Range
§ Intercept Range
§ Escort Range
§ Attack Range
§ Min Shells
2 52 @
§ Max Shells
§ De-Entrenchment
§ De-Moralization
§ Interceptions
§ Escorts
§ Attacks
§ % Attacking
§ % Defending
§ Raid Multiplier (MPPs)
§ Enemy FS Losses (Per Raid)
§ Attack
§ Defense
§ Defense Bonus
§ Max Entrench
3.6.10. Evasion
Some unit types can evade damage when they are engaged in combat. For
example, ships will not receive any damage when bombarding most land units,
while some units will have a small chance of evading damage when they are
attacked.
Here are the unit types affected, including their % chance to avoid suffering
casualties for every combat they are engaged in. Note that some research
categories may increase these percentages.
WHEN ATTACKING % EVASION CHANCE

Field Artillery, Siege Artillery, Railroad Batteries, Defenses,
100%
Blockhouses and Armored Trains
WHEN BOTH ATTACKING & DEFENDING
Rangers 25%
WHEN DEFENDING
Transports (not Amphibious) 10%
0% (25% with the Buoyancy
Submarines
Tanks upgrade)
2 53 @
3.6.11. Unit Symbols
Not all the units listed here are available in every campaign.
UNIT TYPE 3-D SYMBOL NATO ICON
HQ
Regiment
Brigade
Division
Corps
Mountain Division
Rangers
Marines
Engineers
Indians
Cavalry Brigade
Cavalry Division
2 54 @
Cavalry Corps
Partisans
Blockhouse
Field Artillery
Siege Artillery
Railroad Battery
Defenses
Armored Train
Balloons
Battleship
Cruiser
Ironclad
Monitor
Ship of the Line
2 55 @
Frigate
Gunboat
River Ironclad
River Timberclad
River Gunboat
Submarine
Torpedo Boat
Troop Transport
Amphibious Transport
Amphibious Transport (LR)
3.6.12. Zoom
Use your mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out. There are three zoom settings,
and the default setting is the first level.
Zoom out to the next level for a grander view of the scene, and again to the
third level to see the whole map. All unit Activation symbols are shown at all levels.
When fully zoomed out, you can either continue with the scroll wheel to
return to the first level of zoom, or you can just click on the screen to return to
the middle level.
2 56 @
Try these now, and while the default level is best for most things, they can
all be useful at different times. For instance, being fully zoomed out makes it
easier to spot units in other parts of the map that you may wish to move.
3.6.13. Right Clicking on a Unit

Do this to carry out one of the following tasks. Note that not all will be
applicable for all unit types:
§ Reinforce
§ Elite Reinforcements
§ Upgrade
§ Unload (from a Transport or Amphibious Transport)
§ Rail Move
§ Transport*
§ Amphibious Transport*
§ Long Range Amphibious Transport*
§ Disband
§ Sack/Replace with (for HQs, to change commanders)
§ Rename
§ Properties (to see Combat Values and Honors gained from service)
§ Set Mode
§ Auto; Auto-Assist; Manual (for HQs)
§ Hunt or Silent (for Submarines)
* When an applicable unit is adjacent to a place where it can embark in a

Transport then a number will appear in brackets. This shows the number of
available Transports of each type.
3.6.14. Reinforcing Units

§ Units cannot be reinforced in the same turn as they move or attack.
§ All Naval units can only be repaired in port, and (with the sole exception
of Torpedo Boats) they can only receive a maximum of 5 strength points
per turn.
2 57 @
3.6.15. HQ Attachments
§ HQ command ranges default to 3 but they can be increased via research.
§ HQs have three modes: Auto, Auto-Assist and Manual. The default
setting is Auto.
§ Select a HQ and any units attached to it will be highlighted in green. If
the HQ is set to either Auto-Assist or Manual then any units that can
potentially be attached are in blue.
3.6.16. Indicator Sprites

§ Any unit that has not yet used up any of its potential movement is
considered active and will display a flashing sprite on its lower section.
§ Units that have moved but that still have Attacks and are in range of
attacking an enemy unit will also display a flashing sprite on its lower
section.
§ Units that have moved with action points remaining but with no attacks
remaining, will have a faded unit activation symbol flash.
§ Units that have no Action Points or attacks remaining, are darkened to
indicate that no further movement is possible.
§ Units that have Attacks remaining but have exhausted all their Action
Points and have no valid targets within range will have their Attacks set
to zero, and they will be darkened to indicate that no further movement/
attacks are possible.
3.6.17. Major Powers’ Flags

§ Left clicking on a Major Power’s flag on the panel at the top left of the
screen will center the map on that nation’s capital.
§ Right clicking on the flag will access that country’s Production Table
dialog.
3.6.18. Forced March/Naval Cruise

Click on any applicable unit a second time and it will highlight the relevant
option according to its unit type, e.g. Divisions can Force March, ships can
Cruise.
2 58 @
3.6.19. HQ Highlights
With this switched on, when one of your
units is selected, the HQ it is attached to
will have a thicker ring around it. In the
example left, the two units immediately
to the north and northeast of the selected
HQ are commanded by that HQ, while the
unit west of it is not:
3.6.20. Zone of Control Highlights

The ‘hatched’ green highlights indicate
enemy Zone of Control (ZoC) reducing
your Action Points if you move into,
through or out of that hex. The ‘hatched’
orange highlight indicates how far
you could move if the enemy ZoC was
eliminated. This can be helpful in letting
you know how far you could advance if the ZoC were removed.
3.6.21. Elite HQ Highlights

HQs with a rating greater than or equal to 8 will
increase the Prepared Attack bonus of all units under
their command by 10%. These HQs will be marked by
an orange border around their counter.
3.6.22. Sleep Mode

You can set a unit in Sleep Mode if you do not intend to move it, and if you
don’t wish to see its indicator sprite flashing on the War Maps, nor for it to be
included when you cycle through units using the Page Up/Page Down keys on
your keyboard.
To do this, right-click on the unit and select the Sleep option. Please note
that this unit will remain in Sleep Mode in subsequent turns unless you again
right click and deselect Sleep.
2 59 @
As they cannot move, fortress Defenses have been set to begin in Sleep
mode by default in the official campaigns.
Units can also be put into sleep for one turn via the Sleep Tool mouse
hover and pressing the space bar instead of a left mouse button click. This is
indicated with a black dot instead of a white dot.
3.6.23. Undo Moves

To undo moves by Land units press Ctrl-Z.
Note that Naval units cannot undo their moves. This stops them from being
able to repeatedly search the map for the enemy until they find them.
3.6.24. Fog of War Shroud

The limits of your current visibility can be easily seen as hexes beyond the
spotting range of your units and resources are darkened:
This shroud effect will automatically adjust as
the situation changes, so moving units will remove
the shroud from all affected hexes. This means
that you can be certain, at least on land, whether
or not any enemy units are within any unshrouded
hexes. At sea, there is always the possibility that
enemy Submarines may be present if they are in
Silent Mode.
For all types of selected units, you will notice
that their potential unit movement path is
highlighted as you move the cursor around the
map, including the applicable movement penalty
costs as shown in the image below where for the
selected Union Brigade it would cost 2 Action
Points to move into Lewisburg.
2 60 @
3.6.25. Front Line
The Front Line effect places a border around your territory, updating
automatically as you advance or get pushed back. Together with the Fog of War
Shroud it provides you with an immediate understanding of the situation at a
glance.
3.6.26. Partisan Locations

To see where Partisan activity can be expected, pressing the ‘P’ key on your
keyboard will show all likely partisan trigger points, though only for countries
that are currently at war.
To prevent Partisans from appearing it will suffice to have a unit in either
that hex or an adjacent one.
Note, regular Partisan logos indicate
partisans that will be added to the map,
while those shown with a red circle and
a line through them represent locations
where Partisans will only reduce the
strength of resources.
4. 1861 BLUE AND GRAY TUTORIAL

Here we will give you some advice and explanations that will be useful for your
first few turns when playing the 1861 Blue and Gray campaign.
The focus of this chapter isn’t to explain all the game’s features, they are
explained in more depth elsewhere, it is simply to help you get started and
have some fun.
Our advice is to use this section first to get a feel for the game, move onto
the Game Essentials chapter for a greater understanding of the game’s concepts,
and then delve in deeper should you feel the need!
2 61 @
4.1. Turn 1
4.1.1. Select the Campaign
With the game opened up, from the Main Menu go to Single Player, select the
1861 Blue and Gray campaign and then click on Play Campaign.
From the Choose Side dialog, leave the Difficulty level at Intermediate (0%)
and the Computer Bonuses at +0. For greater challenge, try the higher settings
later once you’ve got a good understanding of how to play.
For the purposes of this Tutorial we are going to play as the Union. Because
the Confederacy has the first move in this campaign, click on the button labeled
Union to select that side to play. This will give control of the Confederate
opponent to the AI. Then
click on OK to proceed.
The Options screen will
now come up. Click on OK
to start the game as the
Union.
4.1.2. Pop Up Messages

Once the game has loaded, the first thing you will see is a Pop Up message
telling you that the Confederacy has bombarded Fort Sumter and that the
American Civil War has begun. We are now at war!
It is best to read this and all subsequent messages that appear from time to
time during the game as they will contain important information.
Left click on the screen to remove this message once you’ve finished reading
it. This and all subsequent messages that you’ll see of this type in the game are
not set to disappear by themselves, this is to ensure that you are in control and
never miss an important message!
4.1.3. Confederate Turn 1

Once you have dismissed the Fort Sumter Pop Up, the Confederate AI will play
its first turn. As neither side has much of an army, it is likely that they will be
concentrating on research and recruitment, and we will not see any combat
this turn.
2 62 @
At the end of the AI’s turn, several Pop Ups will appear telling us about some
important events in the game. First, there is a chance that the Confederacy will
choose to sell its cotton stockpile, which will provide them with some Military
Production Points (MPPs, which are used to purchase units, conduct research
and many other things).
Much more important to us will be the secession of Virginia, which will
now become Confederate territory, and Maryland’s decision to side with the
Union. Both of these states are predetermined to join their respective sides. As
we shall soon see, this is not the case with all the border states. A riot will also
occur in Baltimore, temporarily damaging the city.
Once you have seen and clicked through each of those events, the AI’s turn
will end, and your turn will begin.
4.1.4. Surveying the Scene

Your first turn will begin with two more Pop Up messages, one from us,
the developers, encouraging you to check out the game’s Strategy Guide, and
another from General Winfield Scott, Commanding General of the Army,
telling you that you will receive an additional 200 MPPs for the next ten turns
as weapons are imported from Europe.
Tip! The game’s Strategy Guide can be accessed from one of the buttons in
the top right corner of the screen. Among other useful information, it contains
a copy of every advice Pop Up in the game, so you do not need to memorize
these messages.
Once you have read and clicked through these messages, you will receive
your first decision event of the game. Decision events are a special type of
event that allows you to make either a YES or NO choice to a given situation.
Some of them can have a very significant impact on the progression of the
war, so it is always a good idea to read them carefully and review your position
before making your choice.
This decision event is asking whether or not you would like to order the
Union Army to occupy the state of Missouri and seize the St Louis Arsenal. This
is one of the more important choices you will make in the game, so it would be
a good idea to look at the map and see the current situation first. To do that,
click on the ‘View Map’ button, third from the left.
2 63 @
The game map will now center on the city of St Louis MO (the two letter
code following every city’s name indicates the state it is located in, in this case,
MO for Missouri). Scroll around a little using your mouse. To do this, simply
move your mouse in the direction you wish to scroll the map.
Try the G and H hotkeys to toggle the map grid on/off and Hide/Show units
respectively.
Take some time to review the map. At the bottom of the screen are
Information Panels showing information relevant to the hex your mouse is
hovering over, such as its owner, terrain type, any movement penalties and its
Max Entrenchment value if applicable.
The mobilization value of any country will also be shown in the left hand
panel when you hover over a land hex, as will its owner, political leaning and any
special rules particular to its terrain type. Any country at 100% Mobilization,
e.g. the Union, is considered to be fully active in the war.
Note: The term ‘country’ in American Civil War is used to refer to all
independent entities, including border states such as Missouri, and Indian
tribes such as the Osage.
2 64 @
If you hover over a unit, then information
specific to that unit will appear in the left hand
panel. Normally, you will also be able to select a
unit by clicking on it, at which point information about that unit will remain
in that panel until the unit is deselected. However, as there is a Decision Event
awaiting an answer, this is not currently possible.
Scroll around the map with the mouse cursor
and notice that as you hover over hexes belonging
to different countries you’ll see that they will have
varying Mobilization values.
Text colors in the Information Panel will show as white for units on your
side and yellow for enemy units. The text for units on either side that have low
Supply, Readiness or Morale will display those fields in gray.
4.1.5. Decisions
After scrolling across the map, you will have observed that General Fremont
is leading a small force near the town of Alton IL, and that you also have a few
scattered units in Kansas. We are now ready to return to the Decision Event we
saw earlier, so click on the button labeled ‘Click to return to Decision’.
Before we make our decision, we should also look at the Notes that come
with the Decision, which you can do by clicking the ‘Notes’ button. In this
case, the Notes are telling us that if we say YES to this Decision, Missouri will
never secede and join the Confederacy, but will also result in Kentucky shifting
towards the Confederacy. Saying NO will mean that Missouri will remain
neutral, but will likely join the Union towards the end of 1861. The historical
actions in this situation are also given, and as we can see, YES is the answer
that will result in a historical outcome.
You may recall that at the end of the first Confederate turn, Virginia seceded
and joined the Confederacy, while Maryland chose to remain with the Union.
Those results are predetermined and will occur in every game, and the same
is true for the states of Arkansas, Tennessee and North Carolina, which are
all still currently neutral but will join the Confederacy over the coming turns.
Unlike those five states, Missouri and Kentucky may join either the Union or
Confederacy depending on the actions both sides take early in the game: if
2 65 @
either state is more than 0% mobilized in favor of the Confederacy, it will
secede and immediately become Confederate territory.
Of the two, Missouri is by far the more important as it contains significantly
more towns (which generate MPPs) and commands the approaches to the
Western territories and Kansas, so we should do everything possible to prevent
it from seceding. Fortunately, the Decision’s Notes inform us that saying YES
to this Decision will guarantee that Missouri will never secede, so we will click
OK to close the Notes, and then click the ‘Yes’ button to make our decision.
Two events will then pop up, informing us that Kentucky is upset with our
decision, and Missouri’s Governor Jackson will raise the Missouri State Guard
to oppose us.
Before we can deal with him however, we will be offered another Decision,
asking whether we would like to evacuate the forts in the Indian Territory
(modern day Oklahoma). This choice is less important than the Missouri one
was, asking us merely whether we would like to deploy two Regiments in the
Indian Territory or in Kansas. As units deployed in Kansas can be used against
Governor Jackson in Missouri, we will say YES to this Decision as well. As it
turns out, YES was also the historical response, and considering the Union
won the war historically, we can’t go too wrong copying that!
4.1.6. New Units

Once both Decision Events have been answered, you will be presented with
the New Units menu. This allows you to
deploy new units on the map. Currently,
we have three Brigades available to be
deployed, representing some of Lincoln’s
75,000 volunteers (and don’t worry, they
won’t desert after 90 days!). Notice that
the first one is labeled ‘Washington DC,
Union’. This means that this unit can only
be deployed in Washington DC. The others
may be deployed in any Union city, major
city or capital.
2 66 @
When you click OK, the map will center
on Washington DC, and the five hexes in
and around the city will be marked green,
indicating hexes in which you are allowed
to deploy the unit (the hex to the southwest
is owned by the Confederacy, so you cannot
deploy units there).
Left click to place the unit in one of those
hexes, or right click to cancel and be taken back to the screen showing the units
that can be deployed. Units may be deployed in any order, and you are not
required to deploy all units in a given turn (though we strongly recommend
that you do deploy all of your units whenever possible).
As our capital city is currently undefended, we are going to deploy all three
Brigades in and around Washington DC.
4.1.7. The Top Left Sidebar

At the top left of the screen is a sidebar showing the flags of your Majors, the
Union and Mexico.
Under each flag are shown the available Military Production Points (MPPs)
followed by the Major’s current Mobilization Level. The Union will be 100%
Mobilized, while Mexico will be 0%. Mexico is extremely unlikely to enter the war
and will not generate any MPPs until they do, so we can ignore them for now.
Right click on the Union flag and you will see the units that the Union
currently has due to deploy during the campaign. Their exact arrival dates are
shown beneath each unit. If you click on the Mexican flag at the top of the table
it will show you the units that they are due to receive (although in this case,
they will not have any).
Note that this table does not include those units that are still currently
mobilizing or due to arrive via later events, including any triggered by Decision
Events.
Once you’ve finished looking, click OK.
We are now going to head back to the Union, so left click on the Union flag
on the sidebar at the top left of the screen to center the map on the Capital,
2 67 @
Washington DC. This is a quick and handy way of moving around the map, as
you can select any of your Majors’ flags to be taken to their capital. Then scroll
the map to the west until you see your armies at the border with Missouri.
The reason for going here is that we are going to begin the war by attacking
the Missouri State Guard!
4.1.8. Land Movement

Before we launch our first
attack, let’s look at land
movement and how you can
seize territory from the enemy.
Whenever an active unit has
been selected with a left mouse
click, its allowable movement
range is highlighted on the
map as shown below:
Then, depending upon
the current mouse position
the highlighted movement
path will display the total
movement cost. This includes
all associated terrain penalties as well as any additional penalties if attempting
to move near enemy units that are exerting a Zone of Control.
You can then move the unit by left clicking on a highlighted hex that you
wish it to move to. Then if you release the unit by right clicking with your
mouse or clicking on another unit, it will commit that move. At this point Fog
of War will update to potentially reveal any enemy units that couldn’t be seen
from your original position but can be seen now.
A unit can move multiple times until it has used up all its Action Points.
However note that your unit will only retain its full spotting distance the first
time it commits its move, so any subsequent movements that turn will be at
greater risk of bumping into previously unseen enemy units.
Once a unit has used up all its Action Points the counter underneath the
unit image will have darkened, and it no longer shows an Activation sprite at
2 68 @
the bottom left of the counter. These changes signify that this unit has used
up all its Action Points for this turn and can do nothing more until next turn.
We will begin our occupation of Missouri by moving our Cavalry Brigade
onto the river hex northwest of St Louis (hex 92,71) and then deselect it by right
clicking. This will allow it to spot the nearby area and make sure there are no
enemy units that may ambush us. Cavalry have a spotting range of 3 hexes,
while infantry only have a spotting range of 1, so using cavalry to scout the area
ahead is essential to avoiding ambush.
The extent to which you can see is shown by the Fog of War shroud. The
limits of your current visibility can be easily seen as hexes beyond the spotting
range of your units and resources are darkened by the shroud, and this shroud
automatically adjusts in line with the situation. After moving your cavalry, you
can see that the shroud has retreated, revealing that the town of Washington
MO, and nearby hexes, are empty of enemy units.
Having confirmed that the area is clear, we can then move our Cavalry
again, this time to occupy St Charles. We will also move our Infantry as far
west as it may go this turn, and send General Fremont to occupy St Louis.
We have another Cavalry Brigade, this one located in Lawrence KS, which
we can send to occupy Missouri from the west. When you are finished, the
situation in Missouri may look like this:
2 69 @
4.1.9. The War at Sea
Now we’re going to move to the east to review the Union’s fleet. You may wish
to zoom out one level using the scroll wheel on your mouse to better see where
all its vessels are located.
The Union has two Frigates at Boston MA, another Frigate in Key West
FL and a Gunboat in Fort Pickens FL (near Pensacola). Many more ships will
arrive in the coming turns, including a large fleet of Gunboats. To see these,
click on Purchase at the top of the screen and then click on Production in the
bottom right to see what units are already under production and when they are
set to be available for deployment.
Currently our Navy does not have much to do, as the Confederates do not begin
the game with any ships and are not yet receiving any convoys from overseas.
Both of these will soon change, but for now it would be a good idea to get our
ships in a position to begin blockading the Confederacy for when the time comes.
Scroll the map up to Boston, and locate the Frigate Niagara, which will be
located in hex 179,33. Boston is far away from the Confederate coast, and any
ships left up here won’t have much to do, so let’s move the Niagara down to a
more useful position.
Selecting the Niagara, we can see that it can move 14 hexes this turn, which
would allow it to sail as far south as Rhode Island. Now left click on it again.
You’ll notice that the hexes around it have turned orange. This is because it is
now in Cruise Mode, which allows it to move double its normal distance for a
cost of 1 supply point.
Now left click on a destination hex, heading south to somewhere near the
coast of New Jersey, and then do the same with the other Frigate in Boston,
the Mississippi. The other Frigate and Gunboat we identified earlier, can be left
where they are for the time being. Leaving them in port will ensure they are at
maximum supply and readiness when we do need them.
Note that it’s best not to use Cruise Mode every turn, as it does use
up supply, but once or twice on an outbound mission will get you to your
destination much faster.
Tip! You can select a movement path by holding down Ctrl on your
keyboard and then left clicking on a hex you wish to pass through. The unit
2 70 @
won’t actually move until you either release the Ctrl button and then left click
on your final destination, or you left click with Ctrl held down on the most
distant point you can reach.
Note: The names of naval units generally denote a number of vessels, using
the name of a historic vessel to give them historical flavor.
4.1.10. Research
We currently have 200 MPPs available to spend. Especially early in the game
it is a very good idea to consider doing some research. The Civil War was a
time of dramatic technological development, with armored trains, ironclad
warships, submarines and many other weapons making their battlefield debut
during the conflict, and it is very likely that the side better able to utilize these
new technologies will win the war.
Select Research from the bars along the top, or use Ctrl-R to bring up the
Research dialog.
The dialog that opens has a tab for each Major: the Union and Mexico (though
Mexico has no MPPs, and thus will be unable to conduct research unless they
enter the war). Categories in green are currently being researched, and by
hovering over a category you will see an explanation of it in the bottom left corner.
The Union starts with some advanced research levels, such as Amphibious
Warfare and Logistics in the right hand column.
In the top right you can see your available MPPs, as well as the total that
has already been invested in research. At the bottom right you can see the
maximum amount that can be invested at any one time.
While we have a wide range of research options to choose from, four
technologies deserve the greatest attention: Infantry Equipment, Corps
Organization, Production Technology and Industrial Technology. Infantry Equipment
will increase the attack and defense stats of our infantry units (which will
make up most of our army), and the latter two will reduce the costs of units
and increase our MPP production respectively, but unfortunately all three
cost 250 MPPs to invest in (fortunately, we already have the maximum two
chits invested in Industrial Technology, but we will have to wait until subsequent
turns for the other two).
2 71 @
One technology that we can afford to, and certainly should invest in, is
Corps Organization. Developing this technology will allow us to build Corps
units, which are significantly more powerful than the Regiments and Brigades
we currently have on the map, or the Divisions currently available to purchase
(we will discuss them more later).
Ensure that you have the Union’s flag selected at the top of the dialog box,
then click on the up arrow next to Corps Organization and then click Yes on the
confirmation box that appears, so as to agree to making the investment for a
cost in MPPs. The Research screen now shows 1 chit in Corps Organization.
Select Table at the bottom to bring up the Research Table dialog. This shows
the current level for all technologies for all your Majors.
Click on Close when done.
4.1.11. Ending the Turn

Once you’ve completed all actions this turn, select End Turn or Ctrl-E to finish
the turn.
There will now be some end of turn events, including the secession of one
or more of Arkansas, Tennessee and North Carolina, the arrival of new units
in Missouri and Baltimore, and Pop Ups informing you of other events that
are happening.
The Union will then collect MPPs, providing you with income that you will
be able to spend next turn. (If Mexico was in the war, it would also collect some
MPPs at this stage).
The Confederate AI opponent will now carry out its turn. If you like to watch
its move but get called away, then pressing Pause/Break on your keyboard will
pause the AI’s turn. Press it again for the turn to continue.
4.2. Union Turn 2

4.2.1. The European Danger
2 72 @
At the end of the second Confederate turn, you will receive some bad news:
the British have recognized the Confederacy as a belligerent power (though
President Lincoln’s threat of war prevented them from formally recognizing
the CSA as an independent nation), and have begun trading with the rebels
(unofficially, of course). Now would be a good time to view the War Maps
screen and see the international situation at large, so after you have deployed
the two available units (the Frigate must go in Boston, while the Brigade can
be placed at any city, though again Washington DC is a good choice), select the
War Maps button at the top of the screen, or use the Ctrl+M hotkey.
This will bring up a zoomed-out map, and you can zoom in by left-clicking
anywhere on it.
Press the % button in the bottom left to show Mobilization Levels for all
countries.
You’ll see that the Union is at 100% Mobilization. Because the Union is
already at war with the Confederacy, the Confederacy’s icon is represented by
a pair of sabers.
2 73 @
Most countries are neutral, including ten Indian tribes, Mexico and the
three European powers: the UK, France and Spain. The British recognition
of the Confederacy’s belligerency has increased their Mobilization to
approximately 10% (it varies from game to game).
By selecting a country that is currently neutral, and then clicking Declare
War, you are able to declare war on that country, immediately bringing it into
the war on the opposing side (if a border state is attacked, it will immediately
join the Union or Confederacy and cease to be an independent state). In
American Civil War, there are few instances where a declaration of war is
preferable to simply waiting for that country to join the fight of its own accord,
and we generally advise against doing so.
Note: Some nations in the game, including the Comanche, Western
Territories, Guatemala and Honduras, are considered to be permanently
neutral and cannot be declared war on normally.
You are encouraged to regularly check the Mobilization of the European
powers, as when one of them reaches 75% Mobilization, they will formally
recognize the independence of the Confederacy, and are virtually certain to
enter the war thereafter. European powers have extremely powerful armies
and navies, so as the Union you should do everything you can to reduce their
Mobilization whenever possible (and Confederate players are encouraged to
try to bring them in!).
4.2.2. The Convoy Map

From the War Map, you can access the Convoy Map by clicking on the ‘Convoy
Map’ button.
This map shows the convoy routes between countries with similar leanings,
as both the convoy sender and recipient have to have the same political leaning
of either Union or Confederate. Country flags are displayed for each source
nation with a convoy event.
Union-aligned countries have a blue border around their flag and
Confederate-aligned countries have a red border. Active convoys are shown
with either a red line if the convoy is Confederate, or a blue line if the convoy
is Union, while inactive convoys belonging to either side are represented by
white convoy lines.
2 74 @
The map also displays the location of friendly units that are capable of
raiding convoys. This can be useful in showing you where they need to move to
from their current positions in order to raid.
Left clicking on a source country’s flag provides information about its
convoy event. For countries with active convoys the convoy event name is
shown. If it is a friendly convoy, or if Fog of War is off, then the number of
MPPs being transferred and the Seasonal Reduction Value are also displayed.
The Seasonal Reduction Value represents the fact that some convoy routes
are affected by the weather and will then work at less than 100% efficiency.
They may even be shut down during the winter due to ice. When this is so they
will display a white line to represent that they are inactive.
Note: In 1861 Blue and Gray, all convoys operate at 100% efficiency in all seasons.
For countries with inactive convoys, the convoy event name, current
Mobilization Values and trigger requirements for the convoy are displayed.
If the Fog of War option is selected, for enemy convoys only the convoy
event name is displayed. Note that convoys may be activated or inactivated
as countries’ Mobilization Values change, and every country’s status can be
monitored via the War Maps button as mentioned previously.
Note: The Union can send MPPs via the Convoy Map to Mexico if Mexico
enters the war. The default setting is that none will be sent without your
permission, so via this screen you may wish to set the % of Union income, up to
the maximum permissible, that the Union can provide to Mexico.
Tip! For convoys between Major powers, you can adjust how much will
be transferred each turn. The transfer amount will remain the same until
you change it via the Convoy Map, where an Up/Down arrow for the selected
convoy can be used to adjust the transfer value.
4.2.3. Suspended Convoys

If a Convoy route passes through a friendly port while en route to its
destination, and the port is either captured or damaged to below strength 5,
then the Convoy will be temporarily suspended. This means that the Convoy
recipient will not receive any income from that Convoy until the port’s strength
has returned to at least 5, or the relevant port has been recaptured.
2 75 @
Land convoys, such as the one from the Utah Territory to the Union (which
activates in 1862), can be broken if enemy forces capture any of the hexes that
the convoy passes through. This means that as the Confederacy advances
into New Mexico, the hexes near Santa Fe NM are likely to be hotly contested
because without them the Union will lose considerable income from the Utah
goldfields.
The same applies to the Confederate Blockade Runner convoy that runs
from Bermuda to Elizabeth City NC via Fort Hatteras. If the Union can capture
Fort Hatteras then this will cut off that Blockade Runner route, reducing the
income the Confederacy receives.
4.2.4. The Advance Continues

As a result of the British Mobilization, a convoy has begun running from the
British islands in the Caribbean to the Confederacy. Close the Convoy Map and
War Maps screens, and locate your two Frigates that we moved last turn to the
coast of New Jersey.
Every warship in the game, with the exception of river warships and
Submarines, can raid enemy convoy routes. To do this, they must first be set
to Raider mode, which can be done by right-clicking on them and choosing Set
Convoy Mode -> Raider. Then, as we did last turn, set both Frigates to Naval
Cruise and move them south towards the British convoy. Unfortunately this
convoy is too far away to be reached this turn, so it would be a good idea to
instead move them to the Port of Fort
Monroe VA. This will allow them to
replenish the supply points they have
used in their recent Cruises. Moving one
of them to the hexes marked in red off
the coast will allow them to blockade the
Confederate city of Norfolk VA, which
will reduce that city’s supply (and thus,
Confederate income).
Tip! Units set to Raider mode will
use one supply point each turn that they
2 76 @
are actively raiding an enemy convoy route. When they are not located on or
adjacent to a convoy route, they will not use this supply point, so you can safely
set ships to Raider even when they are not yet actively raiding.
Once this is done, you should also continue moving your units in Missouri
towards the state capital Jefferson City.
4.2.5. The Eastern Theater

Last turn we deployed several units around Washington DC, and it is now
time to use these units to begin the advance towards Richmond. The Eastern
Theater is very likely to be a place where the war is won or lost, so it is important
to seize every advantage we can in this region.
One of the first things we can do here is capture Alexandria VA, which the
port of Washington has spotted and is currently
empty. Alexandria occupies a valuable strategic
position, commanding the approaches to
Washington DC and representing the junction
of three of Virginia’s most important rail lines.
Send all three Brigades, and the Armored
Train that arrived in Baltimore, to occupy the
ground near Alexandria and ensure this key
location is firmly under your control.
4.2.6. Research
This turn we also have a significant stockpile of MPPs (likely around 950).
While there are a wide range of things we can do with these, Research again
deserves our greatest attention. The Union is able to conduct up to 4000 MPPs
of Research at any one time, and we are nowhere close to that limit at this
stage. Investing in two chits of Infantry Equipment, and a second chit in Corps
Organization, will set us up well for the future, so these are strongly advised.
4.2.7. Diplomacy
Now would be a good time to look at the Diplomacy menu, which you can open
by either clicking the Diplomacy button at the top of the screen, or using the
Ctrl+D hotkey.
2 77 @
The Diplomacy menu
allows you to declare war
on other nations, or invest
in diplomatic chits with
the aim of swaying them to
your side. Each Diplomatic
chit costs 100 MPP if
invested in a minor nation,
or 200 MPP if invested in a
major. Only the Union and
Confederacy can make
diplomatic investments,
and each is limited to
five chits, each giving a
3% chance of a “hit”. A
successful diplomatic “hit”
will move that nation 7-10% towards your side (with a small chance of an even
greater swing for minor nations), and use up one chit.
Three main categories of nations are available for diplomatic investment:
European powers, border states, and Indians. European powers are by far
the most powerful, and the Confederacy is likely to invest in them later in the
game. If we invest in them, each chit we invest will counter the effect of one
chit invested by our opponent (so if both sides invest two chits, then neither
side will ever receive a diplomatic “hit”), and if we invest in more chits than
the Confederacy does, a diplomatic hit would reduce their mobilization (to a
minimum of 0% - the Europeans can never become pro-Union).
Border states - only Kentucky in this game, but Missouri as well if we said
NO to the Decision on Turn 1 - don’t have any military forces of their own,
but bringing them onto your side can bring significant benefits, including the
ability to deploy new units in their cities. If you intend to use diplomacy to
influence border states, it is essential that you do so as soon as possible, for
they will choose sides quickly (almost certainly before the end of 1861).
When a border state is more than 0% pro-Confederate, it will immediately
secede and join the Confederacy, so it is always a good idea to keep a close
2 78 @
watch on them. In this case, Kentucky is currently only 6% pro-Union, and
would secede if the Confederates scored even one diplomatic hit, so it may be
a good idea to make a diplomatic investment now and reduce the risk. For the
purposes of this Tutorial however, we will assume that no investment is made.
Tip! The Confederate AI will attempt to influence border states in some
games, and will do so without warning.
Indian tribes can also be influenced, with the Creek, Cherokee and Pueblo
being most easily influenced to the Union side. Each will bring one Indians
unit (similar in strength to a Cavalry Brigade) to the fight, and in the case of
the former two, we recommend you say NO to the Decision to evacuate the
Indian Territory forts if you intend to attempt to influence the Indians to join
your side.
4.2.8. Purchasing Units

Though you will continue to receive new units from your Production Queue
and from events for the next several turns, these will not be anywhere near
2 79 @
sufficient for the task of conquering the Confederacy and putting an end to
this rebellion. As a result, it is important to begin Purchasing Units as soon as
you possibly can. Beginning in the third or fourth turn, and continuing until at
least the end of 1861, we strongly recommend that more than half of each turn’s
income be devoted to new unit purchases each turn.
To open the Purchase screen, click the Purchase button at the top of your
screen, or use the Ctrl+P hotkey.
To the left of the center of the screen will be a list of possible units that
can be purchased. Some will be listed in red text, indicating that you cannot
build these at this time, and you can click on them to see the reason why (for
instance, you cannot build a Submarine until you have researched Experimental
Submarines technology). Units listed in gray can be built, but you do not have
enough MPPs available to purchase them currently. Units listed in white can
be purchased right now.
The Division is a more powerful infantry unit than the Brigade, and in time
Divisions should form the backbone of our army. Build one now by clicking
Division on the Select Unit list, and then clicking Purchase. The ‘PD’ stands for
‘Production Delay’ and is measured in months. For a Division the delay is three
months, which means we will be able to deploy our new Division in August
1861.
Note: You can choose the name of a unit when you purchase it. Divisions
are named after their commanding generals, so be sure to choose a good one!
Division commander names do not have any gameplay effects.
4.2.9. Your Turn End

Once you have purchased a Division, check that you have moved all of your
units for this turn, and then End your Turn.
At the end of your turn, you will be offered a Decision to send General
Butler to either Fort Monroe VA or Washington DC. We strongly encourage
you to say YES to this Decision, as the Confederates are sure to capture Fort
Monroe if you do not defend it.
You will also receive messages informing you that General McClellan has
taken command of the forces in eastern Ohio, and that the Confederate capital
has moved to Richmond.
2 80 @
4.3. Summer 1861
4.3.1. Crushing the Missouri State Guard
At the beginning of turn three, your forces should be converging on Jefferson
City, and it is time to defeat the Missouri State Guard once and for all. (It is
worth noting that in this game we have been very lucky with the weather in
Missouri - if you are unfortunate enough to have mud delay your advance, this
may not be possible until turn four).
Select one of the units near Jefferson City, and move it into a hex adjacent
to the Missourian unit in the city. Then hover with your mouse over the
Missourian Regiment in Jefferson City.
When you hover over an enemy unit with one of yours selected that can
attack it, the Information Panel at the bottom of the screen will display an
estimate of the losses if you do decide to attack:
You will also see the estimated losses appear over the Missourian unit, in
this instance 1:1, with the number on the left being the attacker’s expected
losses, that on the right the defender’s. Actual results may vary by 1 in either
direction, so it is possible that you will suffer 2 strength point losses instead of
1, and if you are very lucky you may suffer none at all.
Attacks by land units work as follows:
§ Units that attack before moving receive a Prepared Attack Bonus (this is
not possible this turn, but should be taken advantage of whenever possible).
2 81 @
§ This increases their Readiness by 40% for this attack, making their
attack more effective.
§ All land units apart from Artillery have to be in a hex adjacent to the
target to attack.
Now we are going to attack the Regiment, so with your unit remaining selected,
left-click on the enemy unit. This will launch your attack.
Now attack the same Missourian unit with as many other units as you can in
the same way, by moving them adjacent to the unit and then clicking on the target.
Casualties are to be expected as some of our forces are attacking across a
River, which reduces your attack’s effectiveness by 25%.
If a unit’s Readiness, and therefore its potential combat effectiveness, is
below 50% then this can be easily seen without having to click on any units
because the number representing its unit strength will look fainter. Keep an
eye out for enemy units with fainter strength numbers as all other things being
equal, they will be more vulnerable to attack.
In addition, if you hover
your mouse over the enemy
unit to view its details in
the Information Panel, its
Readiness value will show
in gray rather than in yellow:
Don’t worry if you didn’t destroy the Missouri State Guard Regiment this
turn. Its combat effectiveness, even if it is reinforced in the Confederacy’s turn,
will now be significantly lower after all your attacks and because our units are
now next to Jefferson City, when we attack next turn all our attacks will benefit
from the Prepared Attack bonus.
If however you did manage to destroy the Missouri
State Guard Regiment, be sure to occupy Jefferson
City. At the end of the turn, Missouri will surrender
and become a part of the Union.
Note: The Missouri State Guard is a special case
where a nation will be annexed into the Union upon
2 82 @
its surrender. When other nations, such as the Indian tribes, surrender, they
will simply become occupied territory and can be liberated if a friendly army
recaptures their capital.
4.3.2. West Virginia

As we saw at the end of last turn, General McClellan has now arrived in Ohio
along with several Brigades of volunteers, ready to march into West Virginia.
This is something we should do promptly, as right now the Confederacy is
underprepared, and if we move quickly enough it may be possible to secure the
entire state (or technically speaking, half of the state: at this point in history,
West Virginia was still a part of the state of Virginia).
Securing West
Virginia will provide us
with several advantages.
Capturing enemy
resources also reduces
enemy income, thus
reducing their ability
to resist. In addition,
West Virginia is a very
defensible position
once it has been
occupied, with the
Appalachian Mountains
severely limiting the
Confederacy’s ability to
send forces into the state from the east, so we will likely only require a few
Brigades to maintain our control over the state.
Later in the game it will also be possible for West Virginia to secede from
Virginia and formally rejoin the Union as the 35th state in the Union. Doing
so would improve our Fighting Spirit, and put us one step closer to winning
the war.
2 83 @
4.3.3. Focus on the Objective
The key to winning the war is to focus on what matters, and to avoid
putting any effort into attacks that won’t contribute to victory. Although our
industrial base is superior to the Confederacy’s, we will not be able to launch
overwhelming attacks in every direction at once. Concentrating on one or two
fronts that hold promise will ensure that you are not spreading your forces too
thin, and a local advantage gained in one theater can always be exploited and
turned into further gains elsewhere.
It is also important to remember that this rebellion will take time to crush,
and your initial priority should be preparing your economy and the nation for
the struggle ahead. Research and production should be your primary goals
for the remainder of 1861, as Divisions and eventually Corps are significantly
more powerful than the Brigades currently available. Monitors and soon
Ironclads will drastically shift the balance of power at sea, so construction of
new warships will be essential if your blockade has any hope of cutting the
Confederacy off from the outside world.
As your new armies begin deploying, do not neglect the Western Theater
when organizing your forces. Though Kentucky is currently neutral, it will
likely enter the war by the end of 1861, and as soon as it does you can expect
Confederate forces in Tennessee to attempt to gain control of the state.
By the beginning of 1862 you should have assembled a new and powerful
army ready to go on the offensive, and once you are able to you should not
hesitate to do so. There are many ways to achieve victory: do you march directly
on Richmond, or perhaps attempt to seize control of the Mississippi River?
Perhaps a bold amphibious landing at New Orleans will be the masterstroke
that cripples the Confederacy? Whatever route you choose, we wish you the
very best. Good luck, Mr President!
4.4. General Tips

4.4.1. Battle for Victory
If you can predict that enemy units will have lower supply and/or readiness in
the following turn, e.g. by cutting them off from friendly resources, then it is
2 84 @
often better to delay attacking them until your next turn when you will find
that the expected combat losses will be much more favorable.
Generally it is best to badly damage or destroy a small number of enemy
units, rather than to spread your attacks over a wide front. Battered units will
take time to recover, and will be more vulnerable in subsequent turns than
others because even if they recover their losses via reinforcements, for a few
turns their Morale and Readiness will be lower than other units, all other
things being equal.
4.4.2. Swapping Units

You may at times wish to swap the location of two units. To do this, left click on
a unit that you have not yet moved or attacked with. Then press and hold Shift
on your keyboard and hover your mouse over an adjacent friendly unit that has
also not yet moved.
You will notice that your mouse cursor changes to a double headed black
arrow. When this is showing, you are ready to swap the position of two units,
all you need to do now is to left click on one of them and they will swap places.
4.4.3. Forced March

One method of quickly moving land units is to use Forced March.
Left click on a land unit twice and providing it is a unit capable of Forced
March, has a supply value of 5 or more and it is not adjacent to an enemy unit,
it will be able to move 50% further than usual. However, the exhaustion caused
by this will reduce the unit’s morale by 50-65%. It will then take several turns
to rest and recover its morale, and until it has done so its combat effectiveness
will be reduced quite significantly.
Note: A unit using Forced March will not be able to attack or capture enemy
resources, and Artillery doing this will have their supply of shells reduced to 1.
4.4.4. HQ Settings
One thing you can do during the game is to change which units are commanded
by your HQs.
2 85 @
When you click on an HQ, notice
that units attached to its command are
highlighted in green. These are the units
that receive a leadership bonus based on the
HQ’s command rating.
By right clicking on an HQ and selecting
Set Mode from the drop down menu,
attachments for that HQ may be set to Auto,
Auto-Assist or Manual.
When in Auto-Assist or Manual Mode, you can change a unit’s attachment
or detachment status, e.g. to change which units are commanded by a HQ.
Click on the HQ so that the units attached to it are highlighted in green. To
detach a unit, right click on a unit highlighted in green and select Detach. To
attach one right click on one highlighted in blue and select Attach (the colors
denote whether or not they are already attached).
This isn’t something you should need to do very frequently, but at times it
will come in useful, especially when you don’t have enough HQs for all your
units and a decisive battle must be won!
4.4.5. Transports
Units can be rapidly moved by sea (or river) by using transports.
In the 1861 Blue and Gray campaign three types of transport are available
for use:
§ Regular
§ Amphibious
§ Amphibious (LR)
The first is for moving troops between friendly ports, whereas the Amphibious
Transport is for making landings on hostile shores.
Embarking units in any type of Transport costs Military Production Points
(MPPs), with the Amphibious Transports being more expensive than regular
ones. Additionally, each country has a limit on how many it can use at any one
time of any particular type of transport.
2 86 @
When it comes to launching invasions, Amphibious Transports have the
ability to attack prior to unloading the embarked unit, which means that in
many situations any targeted units can be attacked twice. Note however that
this is an era before specially-designed landing craft, so it may be safer to land
your forces first and then march to the target.
Units will lose 1 supply point per turn that it is in the Amphibious Transport,
reducing its combat effectiveness so it is best to only embark in an Amphibious
Transport as close as possible to when you will want to launch the invasion.
To embark, your unit will need to be in or adjacent to a friendly Port,
although Marines can embark in an Amphibious Transport from any coastal
hex. Right click on the unit and click on the type of Transport you wish to put
the unit in. Say Yes to the confirmation message advising you of the MPP cost.
A regular Transport can then move in this turn, though an Amphibious
Transport cannot move until the following turn unless level 1 in Amphibious
Warfare has been researched.
Once the Transport has reached its destination it can unload, either by
right clicking on the Transport and selecting unload, or by left-clicking on
a highlighted destination hex. The embarked unit will then disembark, and
it is now ready for action, albeit with limited Action Points in the turn it
disembarks.
4.4.6. Reinforcements
Reinforcing units that have received significant damage is generally best
before their next combat, as otherwise their fighting performance will be
reduced and they will risk being destroyed.
Damaged units can be reinforced by right-clicking on them and selecting
Reinforce, expending some MPPs to do so, but losing some unit experience in
the process.
Or you can use the Reinforce tool. This is located second from the right, on
the right side of the panel at the bottom of the screen:
2 87 @
With this selected, any unit you click on that can be reinforced, will be
reinforced to the maximum possible provided that you have MPPs available to
do so. It’s a very quick way of reinforcing large numbers of units, and the MPP
cost shows above the unit when you hover over it, so you can decide if you wish
to spend the cost or not.
Note that a unit cannot carry out any other actions that turn if reinforcing.
An exception is if the unit has swapped position with another, as it can
reinforce after swapping.
Reinforcing a unit uses all of its Action Points and completes its turn. When
you reinforce naval units, you will see that, with the exception of Torpedo
Boats, they can only receive a maximum of 5 strength points per turn.
4.4.7. Elite Reinforcements

As units engage in combat they will increase in experience, and successful
actions will lead to greater experience gains. If a unit has any full experience
bars then this will be represented by white dots above the unit’s strength.
Experience icons will also display in the Unit Info Panel, e.g. a full US flag for
Union units, as in the example below:
In this example the Union
unit has 1 experience point.
Elite Reinforcements can be
purchased at a rate of one
per turn, up to the maximum
number of experience bars that a unit has, and you can do this by right clicking
on the unit and selecting Elite Reinforcements.
If your unit already has strength points equal to the number of full
experience bars, then further reinforcement won’t be possible, i.e. if a unit has
one experience point and is already at strength 11, then it cannot receive any
Elite Reinforcements.
In addition to the normal restrictions on reinforcing units as explained
above, there are some additional requirements for receiving Elite
Reinforcements:
2 88 @
§ It must not be adjacent to an enemy unit
§ Its supply level must be 6 or greater
§ Its strength must be at least 10
4.4.8. Rail Movement

If you do want to transfer your Artillery, or other units, rapidly from one front
to another then moving them by Rail is the quickest way of doing so.
Rail Movement represents the rapid relocation of a unit over a long distance
via railroad, for a cost in MPPs, and it will be the only action the unit can carry
out this turn.
To Rail Move a land unit (including Balloons), right click on it and select
Rail Move. You will then be presented with a dialog box informing you of the
cost if you proceed.
Saying Yes does not yet commit you to Rail Movement, but by doing so
potential destination hexes will then be highlighted. Left click on the one you
wish to travel to, or right click anywhere on the map click to cancel.
To be able to move by Rail, land units must have a supply value of at least
5 and be on a railroad that is linked to at least one resource with a strength of
at least 5. This will provide the opportunity to move the unit to any connected
resource on the railroad that also has a strength of at least 5.
4.4.9. Upgrading Units

If you go to the Research tab along the top of the screen, you’ll see two columns
of research categories.
Those on the left hand side represent Manual Research fields, those on the
right Automatic ones. What this means in practice is that to benefit from the
Manual ones, when you attain research successes in these fields you will have
to manually upgrade relevant units to benefit from it.
No such action is required to benefit from the Automatic ones, as your
economy or armed forces will automatically improve as a result of research
successes in any of these areas.
Upgraded units are better able to either attack, defend or move than their
equivalents without upgrades. So when you attain a research success in a
2 89 @
Manual category, developing level 1 in say Infantry Equipment or Naval Engines,
right click on the unit you wish to upgrade with the relevant category.
A cost will be incurred in MPPs for upgrading, but the unit will now benefit
from better combat factors in whatever way is relevant to that unit type and
research category, e.g. Infantry Equipment will give your infantry better Attack
and Defense factors against land target types. If you are playing with 3-D
counters you will also notice that the infantry unit is now represented by a
slightly different graphic. Click on OK to proceed.
Note: Larger and more advanced units, such as Corps and Ironclads, will
tend to benefit from research advancements by a greater amount per level
than older or smaller units. If you cannot afford to upgrade all of the units in
your army at once, prioritize your better units first!
4.4.10. Beware of Partisans

As you advance, one thing to beware of is that Confederate partisans may
appear and liberate areas if you leave them empty of troops. To ensure that you
don’t accidentally trigger any partisans by moving a unit away from an area
where they might appear, press P on the keyboard and you will be able to see
the areas you need to keep garrisoned, as in the example below:
To prevent partisans from
appearing it will suffice to have a unit
in the same or an adjacent hex to the
areas where they can trigger.
If you see Partisan icons elsewhere
with a red diagonal line through
them, they represent places that if left
unguarded will trigger partisan activity
that will reduce the strength of your
resources, but without deploying a
Partisan unit on the map. While this is
naturally less serious than having a Partisan unit appear on the map, it will lead
to lower income and supply in that area.
Note: Other countries also generate Partisans if occupied, including the Union.
2 90 @
4.4.11. Next Steps
Now that we’ve given you a start, refer to the 1861 Blue and Gray Strategy Guide
for further information and advice on playing and winning this campaign.
This can be accessed either via the Launcher or from one of the buttons at the
top right of the screen while playing.
For more information on game features, the next chapter on Game
Essentials should be your next step.
If you have any further questions you can search this Manual for the
answer, but if you get stuck or would like to share your opinion on anything
please visit our forum at Matrix Games.
5. GAME ESSENTIALS
5.1. Key Areas of Gameplay
There are five key areas of gameplay to consider during your turn, and
considering each of them in the following sequence will ensure that nothing
important is missed out:
§ Read any Reports – To help you assess the situation

§ Orders – Move, Attack, Reinforce Units
§ Politics and Diplomacy – Declare War, Monitor Developments, Invest
in Diplomacy
§ Research – Invest Research Chits
§ Military Production – Purchase Units, Deploy New Arrivals
5.2. Hotkeys
G – Turn the map hex grid on or off.
H – Temporarily hide all units on the map.
L – Display the last turn’s summaries for reference.
P – Show the location of potential enemy Partisan activity.
2 91 @
R – Show reinforceable units, as these will show a green unit strength number.
S – Show the level of supply your forces currently receive, along with a
prediction of how much they will receive if venturing into enemy territory if
you press S again.
U – Show upgradeable units and resources, displayed by a green research level
number.
Page Up/Down – Select the previous or next active unit that has not yet moved.
To Set a Path – hold down Ctrl then select a route.
Space - this deselects a currently selected unit.
Shift – Select this to see how far a Carrier that hasn’t yet moved can attack.
← ↑ → ↓ – Scroll map left, right, up or down.
+/- Map zoom controls
Ctrl-D – Diplomacy
Ctrl-E – End Turn
Ctrl-I – Reports
Ctrl-M – Maps
Ctrl-N – New Units
Ctrl-O – Options
Ctrl-P – Purchase Units
Ctrl-Q – Quit
Ctrl-R – Research
Ctrl-S – Save
Ctrl-Z – To undo moves by Land units (Naval units cannot undo their moves).
5.3. Major and Minor Powers

§ Major Powers (the Confederacy, UK, France, Spain, Union and Mexico)
collect income in Military Production Points (MPPs), can carry out
diplomacy, research, produce units, and declare war.
§ All other countries are Minor Powers which when they enter the war are
subordinate to one of the Major Powers, for whom they provide income.
Minor countries can often be reinforced by purchasing new units,
though their owning Major will have to pay for them.
2 92 @
§ Each Major Power and their associated Minor allies has a unique color
on the map, a ‘National Color’ that represents the territory controlled by
that particular Major.
5.4. Indicator Sprites

attacking an enemy unit are set to indicate the normal unit activation
symbol flashing.
§ Units that have moved with Action Points remaining but with no attacks
remaining, will have a faded unit activation symbol flash.
§ Units that have no Action Points or attacks remaining, are darkened to
attacks are possible.
5.5. Orders
Actions use Action Points (APs) which determine their movement range.
Dynamic Movement – Units that haven’t used up all their Action Points can
continue to move until they have done so, even if deselected and reselected
again later.
Surprised Units – are those that bump into previously unseen enemy units
during their movement. They can defend themselves but naval units in Cruise
Mode land units will automatically lose any remaining APs, Submarines will
have any remaining APs halved, and other units will have their remaining APs
divided by 5.
Mouse Hovering – Hovering the mouse over a unit will display its unit info at
the bottom left hand corner of the screen, in the game information area.
Move/Attack – Left click on the unit to see its potential movement range.
Enemy units can be attacked by moving adjacent to them (if not already so)
2 93 @
and left clicking on them with your attacking unit selected. Units like artillery
have longer ranges so they don’t need to move adjacent to the target before
attacking. Each Attack uses up one AP, and naval units that engage in combat
will have their remaining APs halved.
Passing through – Naval units that pass through an opponent’s naval units
have a 50% chance of losing 1 strength point for every enemy unit they pass
through.
Specify a Movement Path – Press Ctrl on your keyboard and left click to select
individual way-points. This can be very useful when trying to avoid accidentally
passing through any Naval Minefields!
Moving Artillery into Empty Enemy Resources – Press Ctrl and rather than
bombard the enemy held resource, the Artillery unit will be able to move in and
capture the resource.
Forced March – Left click on a land unit twice and providing it is a unit capable
of Forced March, it has a supply value of 5 or more and it is not adjacent to an
enemy unit, it will be able to move twice as far as usual but for a cost in Morale
(which reduces its combat effectiveness). It will not be able to attack or capture
enemy resources when doing this, and Artillery doing this will be reduced to
1 shell.
Cruise – Left click on a naval unit twice and providing it has a supply value of 5
or more it will be able to move double their normal movement distance but for
the loss of 1 supply point. It will not be able to attack when doing this. Regular
Amphibious Transports and Submarines are the only naval units that cannot
Cruise.
Rail Move – Right click on a land unit with a supply factor of at least 5 that is in
or adjacent to a railroad that is linked to at least one resource with a strength
of at least 5. This will provide the opportunity to move the unit for a cost in
MPPs to any connected resource on the railroad that also has a strength of at
least 5. In previous games in the series, this function was known as ‘Operate’
or ‘Operational Movement’.
Swap – Select one unit, press Shift and select an adjacent unit you wish to
swap it with. There is a Morale penalty for doing so, and both units will have
a maximum of 1 Action Point after swapping. Unless the swapped units have
2 94 @
already done so, they will still be free to attack or reinforce. Providing they
aren’t adjacent to any enemy units they can be upgraded.
Sleep – Right click a unit you do not intend to use for a while and select this option.
This will prevent its icons from flashing and also remove it from the sequence
when cycling through unactioned units using the Page Up/Down Hotkeys.
Transports – Use these to move troops by sea between friendly ports.
Amphibious Transports – Use these to move troops by sea to land on hostile
shores. All units apart from Marines have to be loaded in friendly ports. Enemy
naval units and Fortress Defenses will fire on Amphibious Transports that halt
in an adjacent hex, even if only temporarily prior to landing. Note that neutral
Majors cannot embark units into Amphibious Transports.
Landing Casualties – Units unloading from Amphibious Transports may suffer
landing casualties, potentially losing a proportion of their strength, especially
when landing in bad weather. With Amphibious Transports, the lower their
supply value, the higher their landing casualties are likely to be.
Reinforcing Units – Increase unit strength up to their maximum (5 or 10
depending on unit type) though some experience will be lost in the process, and
supply can limit the ability to do this. Note that naval units (with the sole exception
of Torpedo Boats) can only receive a maximum of 5 strength points per turn.
Elite Reinforcements – Increase experienced units’ strength by 1 point per
turn, up to 3 strength points above their maximum, depending on the number
of full experience bars they have.
Upgrading Units – To increase their combat factors.
Renaming Units – Customize unit names, though names within each type
must be unique.
Disbanding Units – Do this to recoup some MPPs, though Naval units cannot
do this, nor can Land units adjacent to enemy units, nor any Forts. Note that
only units belonging to Major countries can disband.
5.6. Unit Modes

Right clicking on some units can bring up options to change their Mode, thus
providing some extra options for their use. The options for Submarines must
be chosen before they either move or attack.
2 95 @
HQ – Auto, Auto-Assist or Manual. The last two are options for manually
controlling which units are under a HQ’s command. Refer to the full Game
Manual for details.
Artillery, Forts, Railroad Batteries – Auto or Silent. Silent means that they will
not provide counter-battery fire, which can help to keep their location secret.
(Note that Forts are exempt from usual Fog of War rules and their location can
always be seen by both sides)
Submarines – Hunt to increase movement range; Silent to increase your
chances of not being seen. Changing from Hunt to Silent Mode or vice versa
can only be done before the Submarine moves or attacks. Silent Mode does not
mean that the Submarine is literally submerged the entire time, it is better to
think of it as being cautious and submerging at times of greater risk.
All other Surface Vessels – See the section on Raiding below.
5.7. Zones of Control

Most units exert a zone of control hindering enemy movement in adjacent
hexes. To determine the extent of the zone of control exerted, all units are
assigned a category:
§ Front Line Units are Divisions, Corps, Mountain Divisions, Marines,

Blockhouses, Defenses, and all naval units except for Submarines, Naval
Mines, and all types of Transport.
§ Support Units are all remaining land units apart from HQs and Balloons.
§ No Zone of Control Units are HQs, Balloons, Submarines, Naval Mines
and all types of Transport.
§ Damaged Units: units below strength 5 do not exert any Zone of Control.
§ Naval Units in Port do not exert a Zone of Control.
One Front line unit will exert a Zone of Control, and this means that all enemy
units moving into, or within, one hex of it will have to pay an extra Action Point
to do so, while it will require two Support units to have the same effect.
2 96 @
5.8. Combat
§ There are two main categories of units: Land and Naval, and these are
further divided into sub-categories, called Target Types, each of which
has different statistics.
§ Target types are Soft (i.e. weak), Infantry, Cavalry, Artillery, Fort,
Armored Train, Balloon, Ironclad, Wooden (Ship), Transport, and
Resource.
§ Each unit has unique Attack and Defense values when combating each
of these target types, so a quick comparison of capabilities can be seen
by looking at a unit’s properties and comparing its attack value against
a Soft target with that unit’s defense against the attacking unit’s target
type.
§ Combat results are affected by unit Readiness and their relevant combat
factors. Readiness is based on their units’ Strength, Morale, HQ support
(based on the HQ’s rating and experience). Supply is a major factor in
unit Morale.
§ Entrenchment provides some protection from losses, with greater
entrenchment providing more protection. Entrenchment is reduced
by enemy attacks and automatically lost when leaving a position, being
regained at the start of your next turn, at a rate of 1 Entrenchment level
per turn. Units in Fortifications and Fortresses gain Entrenchment
levels faster.
§ Location is also a factor, as terrain and resources generally provide
bonuses while attacks across rivers and/or after having moved are less
effective.
§ Weakened units may automatically retreat when attacked, but the
attacker’s losses will be halved when this happens.
§ Land units will be less likely to retreat from Resources, Fortifications
and Fortresses.
§ Units gain experience from combat and experienced units will be able
to avoid some losses in future combats, while in general inflicting
higher casualties on the enemy. It isn’t necessary to have full experience
points in order for this to help, as some experience is better than none.
2 97 @
Experienced units are to be prized and are frequently best used as
spearheads or to launch effective counter-attacks.
§ Most units can gain up to a maximum of 3 experience points, although
some, including fortress Defenses, small ships and armored trains are
limited to 1.
§ HQs gain experience from the units under their command, with
successful operations providing more experience and raising their
effectiveness as commanders.
§ HQs, Balloons and Transports cannot attack.
§ Naval Units lose 1 Supply point every time they are engaged in combat.
5.9. Raiding
§ Raiding enemy convoy lines is a good way of reducing their income and
Fighting Spirit. Naval units, except Submarines, can do this by moving
either on, or adjacent to, enemy convoy lines. Right click on the unit,
select Select Convoy Mode and then click on Raider. This raiding option
can be switched in the same way by right clicking on the unit and de-
selecting Raider.
§ Naval units cannot raid if an enemy surface vessel is adjacent to them
(note that Submarines and Transports cannot prevent raiding). Either
sink this unit or move away to a better raiding position.
§ At the end of your turn all raiding takes place, and its effects are worked
out by the game engine, no micro-management is required.
5.10. Conquering Countries

A country will surrender if all their Capitals have been captured and enough
of their current land forces have been destroyed. The nationality of the unit
occupying the surrendering country’s Capital determines who the country
surrenders to, and they will receive Plunder in MPPs providing the country
surrenders by direct conquest rather than by an in-game event.
Note: In our previous games, the surrender of a country would result in
the Unit Morale of the victors rising temporarily, and the allies of the defeated
nation suffering a similar penalty. This feature is not used in American Civil War.
2 98 @
5.11. Fighting Spirit
Note: In our previous games, this mechanic was referred to as “National Morale”.
§ Fighting Spirit represents a Major Powers’ willingness to fight, and will
be reduced when their resources are captured, casualties are suffered
and key locations are taken.
§ If Fighting Spirit falls to zero then the Major Power will surrender, so
maintaining Fighting Spirit is important.
§ Capturing resources belonging to enemy Majors, destroying enemy
land units while their supply is less than 5, and sinking enemy ships at
sea irrespective of their supply value, will also provide boosts to your
Fighting Spirit.
§ Taking key locations marked as Fighting Spirit objectives will either
boost the occupier’s Fighting Spirit or penalize their opponent’s,
sometimes both. Plan your strategies accordingly as taking these
locations will assist your efforts to win the war.
§ If a Major surrenders due to having low Fighting Spirit then no Plunder
is gained by the other side.
5.12. HQs
§ HQ units are probably the most important in the game as not only do
they provide supply, but they also provide combat bonuses to units
under their command. In particular, HQs with a rating greater than or
equal to 8 will increase the Prepared Attack bonus of units under their
command by 10%.
§ By default HQs command 5 units within 3 hexes, though this can be
increased by researching Field Telegraph.
§ Weakened HQs are less effective at both providing supply and boosting
units under their command with combat bonuses.
§ HQs have a minimum supply value of 3, even if they are at low strength.
§ They can only be reinforced in stages, so if damaged it is wise to start
reinforcing them as soon as possible. Or move them to safety if they are
in extreme danger.
2 99 @
5.13. Supply Rules
Units receive supply from friendly resources and HQs, and unit supply is a
major factor in determining combat effectiveness.
5.13.1. General Notes on Supply

§ Resources which provide the most supply are Major Capitals and Major
Ports, as they can provide supply values of up to 12.
§ These are followed by other Capitals, Industrial Centers, Primary Supply
Centers and Ports, which can potentially provide supply up to 10.
§ Secondary Supply Centers and Minor’s Capitals provide supply up to a
maximum of 5.
§ Connection to any other friendly resource (by way of a connected chain of
friendly-controlled hexes) from all of the above except for Ports will raise
the connected resources to their maximum strength and supply levels.
So advancing into enemy territory to cut off their troops and resources
from these Key Locations can reduce enemy income, and lead to the
destruction of these enemy forces at lower supply. This will help because
units at lower supply are less effective and much easier to destroy!
§ Captured enemy resources will generally provide less supply than
friendly ones.
§ The supply benefit of resources decreases with distance by 1 per hex in
clear terrain.
§ The rate of decrease will be greater in non-clear terrain, as such terrain
is an impediment to good supply. For example, placing units in large
forests, mountains or marshes, unless they are close to a nearby supply
source, will generally be a bad move.
§ Roads negate the effect of terrain on supply, so keeping units on or near
roads is recommended.
§ Oil and Mine resource types do not provide supply to any units.
§ Units in low supply cannot be reinforced as well as those in higher
supply, while those lacking any supply cannot be reinforced at all.
§ Naval units can only be reinforced in port and, with the exception of
Torpedo Boats, they can only receive a maximum of 5 strength points
per turn.
2 100 @
§ Naval units can only be fully supplied in port, though they will gain
some supply from being in the proximity of friendly ports, the benefit
decreasing with distance.
5.13.2. Viewing Supply

Press S on your keyboard to view current supply levels. Press it again to view a
prediction of supply in the next turn, including in currently enemy territory,
should you seize that territory this turn.
5.13.3. Damage to Resources

§ Resources can be damaged by bombing, shore bombardment, partisan
activity, scripted events and also by scorched earth when resources
change hands.
§ Resources damaged by any of the above will automatically repair by
1 strength point at the start of their owning side’s turn. No micro-
management of this is necessary.
§ Any resource except for a Major’s Capital or a Fortress that has 2 or more
enemy units adjacent to it will have their resource strength reduced by
1 point per turn until it reaches 0. If there aren’t 2 enemy units present
then the resource regains strength by 1 point per friendly turn, i.e.
deterioration happens in enemy turns, and regaining strength only
occurs in friendly turns. Gunboats and all types of river ships, being
small vessels, cannot reduce the strength of enemy ports in this manner.
§ The presence of an enemy unit adjacent to a port will prevent that port
from providing supply to any friendly land units. Destroying the enemy
unit or driving it away will enable that port to provide supply again.
5.14. Partisans
Partisan activity can be prevented by keeping units in or adjacent to their
spawning hexes. Partisans may simply damage resources, or launch full scale
uprisings which will place a Partisan unit on the map. These units deploy at
strength 8, always have a minimum supply level of 3, and in difficult terrain
front line combat units may be needed to deal with them.
2 101 @
5.15. Maintaining Units’ Combat Effectiveness
§ Keep them in good supply.
§ Have an HQ commanding them, with the best available in the most
important sectors.
§ Reinforce units after they have suffered casualties to the maximum as
soon as possible.
§ Strengthen with Elite Reinforcements if they are available and you can
afford the cost.
§ After reinforcing, especially from serious casualties, if possible rest the
unit away from the front line for a few turns before committing it to
combat again.
§ Research the Automatic Upgrade categories as some of these will
improve unit morale.
§ The liberation of friendly countries that had been conquered, and
the loss of friendly countries that surrender, will provide temporary
bonuses or penalties to unit morale and readiness. So try to liberate
anywhere that falls, and not to lose too many allies!
5.16. Decision Events

During the game you will be asked to make strategic decisions, called Decision
Events, where you will be given information and prompted to choose either
Yes or No. Further details on these events can be found in the Strategy Guide in
the Manuals folder, or you can access the guide from a button on the top right
of the screen while playing.
5.17. Politics and Diplomacy

§ Major Powers can declare war by going to the War Maps, selecting the
country you wish to declare war with, and then selecting the flag of the
country you wish to declare war on. All active Minors subordinate to
either Major will automatically become at war with that country too.
§ It is also possible to see via the War Maps the Mobilization level of every
neutral country, by clicking on the % button.
2 102 @
§ Neutral Majors only produce a proportion (relative to their Mobilization
level) of their production capability, while neutral Minors only provide
income via Convoys.
§ Note: in the default American Civil War campaigns, a special rule applies
preventing neutral Majors from collecting ANY income, to represent
their general lack of desire to involve themselves in the Civil War,
although if certain conditions are met, they can still send some MPPs
via convoys.
§ Every Major has a certain number of chits which can generally be
invested wherever desired, although some nations are not eligible
targets for diplomatic efforts (such as Guatemala).
§ Every diplomacy chit invested has a 3% chance of moving the target
country towards your side by 7-10% if it is a Major power, with a 10%
chance of that swing being 20-30% if the targeted country is a Minor.
§ If both sides are investing in a country, only the one with the most
chits invested can swing the target country, and only their chits in
excess of their opponent’s will count towards achieving a diplomatic
breakthrough.
§ Unlike with Research, players who reclaim an invested diplomacy chit
will not regain any of the MPPs invested in it.
§ Once a country has reached 90% Mobilization it will automatically enter
the war within a few turns.
5.18. Weather
Weather effects on an individual unit are generally based on the weather in
the unit’s starting location and not its destination location. Exceptions relate
to Amphibious landings.
5.18.1. Rain
Balloons cannot spot enemy units, though movement is possible. Rail
Movement is still allowed.
2 103 @
5.18.2. Mud
AP values are halved, with all units having a minimum of 1 AP.
5.18.3. Sandstorms
Balloons cannot spot enemy units, though movement is possible. Rail
Movement is still allowed.
5.18.4. Snow
§ Rail movement is allowed.
§ Attack values are halved for all unit types.
§ Balloons cannot spot enemy units.
§ There is no AP penalty for crossing snowed over enemy-held river hexes.
§ No amphibious loading is allowed from a snowed port hex.
§ No amphibious unloading is allowed onto a snowed coastal hex.
5.18.5. Frozen
§ Rail movement is allowed.
§ Attack values are halved for all unit types.
§ There is no AP penalty for crossing frozen enemy-held river hexes.
§ No amphibious loading or unloading is allowed from or onto a frozen
coastal or port hex.
§ No transport loading or unloading is allowed from or into a frozen port
hex.
5.18.6. Storms
§ Attack values are halved for all naval unit types.
§ Naval units not within one hex of a friendly port or on a coastal sea
hex (i.e. those fully at sea) may suffer some weather damage. This may
be just a reduction in unit morale, or it could involve the ship losing
strength.
§ Note that due to the weaker construction of nineteenth century ships,
storms are much more dangerous in American Civil War compared to
our previous games. Be careful!
2 104 @
5.18.7. Ice
Naval units trapped in ice can only move 1 hex until they are clear of the ice.
5.19. The Research Mechanism

§ For every chit invested, progress will be made at the end of each side’s
turn towards reaching their next levels of research.
§ Per turn increments to achieve the next level in a technology field
average 4% per turn, in reality between 2-6% per chit.
§ Research automatically succeeds in gaining the next level on reaching
100% progress, though there is a small chance of a breakthrough
speeding up your progress by an extra 15-25% every turn. Researching
Spying and Intelligence can speed up this process.
§ Chits can be recouped at 50% of their original cost.
§ Costs rise with unit upgrades, generally by 10% per level of upgrade,
though some like Skirmishers only cost 5% and others like infantry Scouts
cost 20%.
The notes which follow explain the benefits of each level of upgrade, firstly for
Manual Upgrades, then for Automatic Upgrades.
§ To benefit from Manual Upgrades, right click on a unit once the research
has been achieved and select Upgrade. You can upgrade some or all of
the potential upgrades available.
5.20. Manual Upgrades

Infantry Equipment – increases the Attack and Defense values for all non-
Engineer Infantry units against all other land units. This bonus is larger when
applied to larger formations of infantry: Regiments, Brigades and Rangers receive
+0.5 per level, Divisions, Marines and Mountain Divisions +1, and Corps +2.
Skirmishers – increases the Demoralization inflicted by all non-Engineer
infantry. Regiments and Brigades receive a +5% bonus per level, all other
infantry receive +10%.
Scouts – increases Spotting radius of all infantry except Regiments and
Engineers, by 1 hex.
2 105 @
Cavalry Equipment – increases the Attack and Defense values for all Cavalry
units against all other land units. Cavalry Brigades and Indians receive a bonus
of +0.5 per level, Cavalry Divisions and Cavalry Corps receive +1.
Field Artillery – increases the Attack values of Field Artillery against all land
units by +1 per level, their De-entrenchment value by +0.5 per level, and their
Demoralization value by +5% per level.
Heavy Mortars – increases the Fort Attack values of Siege Artillery and Railroad
Batteries by +1 per level, their De-entrenchment value by +0.5 per level, and
their Demoralization value by +5% per level.
Mobility – increases the Action Points of Field and Siege Artillery by +1 per
level.
Buoyancy Tanks – grants Submarines the ability to dive and avoid enemy
attacks, with a 25% chance.
Naval Weapons – increases the Attack values of all warships except Submarines,
against Forts, Ironclads, Wooden Ships and Transports, with these increases
per level being larger for larger ships. This technology also increases the Attack
values of Gunboats against all types of land units, by +0.5 per level, and the
Demoralization value of all warships except submarines by +5% per level.
Ironclads – increases the Defense values of ironclad warships against all naval
units. Battleships, Cruisers and Ironclads receive +2 per level, while Monitors,
Torpedo Boats and River Ironclads receive +1.
Naval Engines – increases the Action Points of all naval units except
Submarines, by +2 per level.
Armored Trains – increases the Defense values of Armored Trains against all
land units by +1 per level, and their Action Points by +2 per level.
Fort Modernization – increases the Defense values against all land and naval
units for Blockhouses by +1 per level and for Defenses by +1.5 per level. Defenses
also receive +1.5 Ironclad Attack per level.
Lighthouses – increases the naval spotting range of Ports by +2.
2 106 @
5.21. Automatic Upgrades
Corps Organization – increases the Build Limit of Corps by +4 per level, and
their Action Points by +0.5 per level. Level 1 is required in order to purchase
Corps.
Field Telegraph – increases the number of units your HQs can command and
their command range by +1 per level.
Leadership – increases the command rating of HQs by +1 per level, and their
Action Points by +0.5 per level.
Infantry Tactics – improves the Unit Morale of all infantry units except
Rangers and Engineers by +10% per level. Divisions, Mountain Divisions,
Corps and Marines also receive +0.5 Artillery Defense per level, and all infantry
units except Regiments also receive +0.5 Naval Defense per level.
Cavalry Tactics – improves the Unit Morale of all cavalry units (including
Indians) by +10% per level. Also increases the build limit of Cavalry Divisions
by +1 per level, and the Naval Defense of all cavalry units except Indians by +0.5
per level.
Naval Tactics – increases the Unit Morale of all naval units by +10% per level,
and increases the amount of MPP loss that raiding warships inflict on enemy
convoys.
Amphibious Warfare – increases the build limits of Amphibious Transport
(LR)s and Marines by +1 per level, and +2 for regular Amphibious Transports.
It also increases the Action Points of Amphibious Transports by +1 (+2 for LRs),
and the Infantry and Fort Attack values of Marines by +0.5 per level.
Experimental Submarines – this increases the Build Limit, and Wooden,
Ironclad and Transport Attack values of Submarines. Level 1 is required in
order to purchase Submarines.
Experimental Balloons – this increases the Build Limit, Spotting Range and
Action Points of Balloons. Level 1 is required in order to purchase Balloons.
Spying and Intelligence – this provides a +1% chance per turn, per level, of
spotting enemy units, while also speeding up research by providing intelligence
on the enemy’s own developments.
Logistics – this reduces rail movement and regular Transport costs by 10%,
while also increasing all types of Transports’ Build Limits for Majors and their
2 107 @
respective Minors. HQ’s minimum supply values also increase by +1 per level.
This also increases the Action Points of Armored Trains by +1 per level.
Production Technology – this decreases unit production costs by 5%.
Industrial Technology – this increases a Major’s home production by 10%.
5.22. Automatic Industrial Mobilization

Some Union resources only start producing MPPs when activated by events.
5.23. Military Production

§ Providing they have sufficient MPPs, each Major Power can purchase
units belonging to their own country, and also for their subordinate and
active Minors.
§ There is a Production Delay of 1-12 months before these units will be
ready for deployment. This depends on unit type and the longer build
times represent naval units.
§ Land units that were destroyed in combat while they had a supply value
of 5 or more can be repurchased at reduced cost and with a shorter
Production Delay. In the default American Civil War campaigns, this only
applies to named units.
§ Certain technologies allow you to build additional units of certain
categories, most notably Corps Organization allowing the production of
additional Corps units.
§ Units can only be deployed in their home countries at or adjacent to
friendly cities, major cities or capitals. that are connected by friendly
hexes to the Capital or an Industrial Center.
5.24. Further Gameplay Tips

Here are some general thoughts on things to consider every turn:
§ Reinforce or move to safety any battered units, replacing them if they

were defending key positions.
§ Look for any other key positions that aren’t currently defended, but
are threatened by the enemy, and see if you can place or move units to
defend them.
2 108 @
§ Now make your moves and attacks. Some useful things to know are that:
§ Units that attack before moving will generally have more effect.
§ Units attacking across rivers suffer a penalty, so try to cross elsewhere
if possible.
§ Use your Cavalry, infantry with the Scouts upgrade, or Balloons to
reconnoiter before advancing deep into enemy territory. Note that
in American Civil War, most land units only have a spotting range of 1,
making this more important than ever if your army is to avoid enemy
ambush!
§ Maintain Cavalry units near the front line when launching offensives so
that they can exploit any successes.
§ Damaged units need reinforcements and good supply to recover.
§ Keep your HQs, artillery, balloons and any other support units close to,
but not in, the front line.
§ You can sack HQs with low command ratings and replace them with
better ones by right clicking on the HQ.
§ Consider whether you need to buy any units to either replace losses, or
for use in the near future. Plan ahead, as there will be a delay between
buying a unit and its arrival.
§ Upgrade any units that can be upgraded, but keep an eye on your
available expenditure as some upgrades are more important than
others. For instance, upgrading your navy probably isn’t very relevant if
the enemy is attacking your capital.
§ Consider whether you have any remaining income to undertake any
research or diplomacy.
§ Consider providing Elite Reinforcements to any experienced units.
§ Partisans can spring up if their trigger points aren’t covered. Keep an
eye out for them!
§ Forests block line of sight, so bear this in mind when planning your
moves.
§ Check out the main Manual and Strategy Guide in the Manuals folder
or access them in game using the buttons at the top right of the screen.
2 109 @
§ Have fun! That’s what it’s all about, so don’t get too hung up on doing
everything right the first time. It will come, and sometimes a decisive
defeat is the best teacher.
§ If you do get stuck on anything, don’t be afraid to ask on our forums. We
monitor them regularly and are very happy to help.
5.25. Ending a Turn

Select End Turn from the Game Menu or use Ctrl-E. Military Production
Points (MPPs) will be collected, based on the number of resources currently
owned or occupied by your side, and income will also be received from convoys
and scripted events.
5.26. Saving a Game

§ A game can be saved at any time by selecting Save from the Game Menu
or using Ctrl-S. Select a file name.
§ Games played against the computer are saved in the Save folder, while
Hotseat games are saved in the Hotseat folder.
§ All games are also automatically saved at the start of each turn in a file
called autosave.sav in their relevant default folder.
5.27. Exiting the Game

In order to end the game select Quit from the Game Menu or use Ctrl-Q.
5.28. Winning the Game

The Victory Conditions for each campaign can be seen during the game by
clicking on Options and then the Victory button.
Once the game is over, multiplayer passwords are set to null so that items
not previously visible under Fog of War will now become visible to both sides.
5.29. Support
You can report issues on the forums or email support@furysoftware.com.
2 110 @
6. MOVEMENT AND COMBAT
6.1. Basics
6.1.1. Turn Activities
There are five key areas to think of during each turn, and considering each of
them in the following sequence will ensure that nothing important is missed out:
§ Read any Reports – to help you assess the situation

§ Orders – Move, Attack, Reinforce and Upgrade Units
§ Politics and Diplomacy – Declare War, Invest Diplomacy Chits
§ Research – Invest Research Chits and check on progress
§ Military Production – Purchase Units and Deploy New Arrivals
6.1.2. Turn Lengths

The default setting is to have turns with variable lengths according to the
season, with longer winter turns and shorter summer turns.
Turns are alternate rather than simultaneous, so the first Confederate turn
will cover 12th to 22nd April 1861, and the first Union turn will run from 23rd
April to 3rd May 1861.
Seasons run as follows:
SEASON DATES COVERED
Spring 21st March to 20th June
Summer 21st June to 20th September
Fall 21st September to 20th December
Winter 21st December to 20th March
In addition to the four normal seasons, four separate sub-seasons are

provided for Late Spring (May 1 to June 20), Early Fall (September 21 to October
14), Late Fall (December 1 to December 20), and Late Winter (March 1 to March
20). These don’t need to be filled in by campaign designers, but if they are then
their Trigger % will apply for the periods in question. If they aren’t filled in
then the Trigger % for the main seasons will apply during these periods.
2 111 @
Note: The length of turns, as well as whether or not they are simultaneous
or alternate, is fully customizable in our Editor.
6.1.3. Visibility
The following applies if you are playing with the Fog of War option on.
All units can spot enemy land or naval units according to their set spotting
ranges, though neutral Majors’ spotting ranges are limited to 1 hex. The location,
though not any other details, of enemy Defenses may be seen regardless of
spotting ranges, as their locations were known before war broke out.
Infantry can typically only spot units in the hex adjacent to them, while
cavalry can spot land units up to 3 hexes away. Note that when determining the
land spotting radius of units, only land hexes are considered: cavalry cannot
spot across river ports or large bodies of water.
6.2. Moving Units

6.2.1. Indicator Sprites
attacking an enemy unit will also display a flashing sprite on their lower
section.
§ Units that have moved with Action Points remaining but with no Attacks
remaining, will display a faded flashing sprite.
§ Units that have no Action Points or Attacks remaining, are darkened to
Attacks are possible.
6.2.1.1. Sleep Mode

If you do not intend to move a unit, and don’t wish to see its indicator sprite
flashing on the War Maps, nor for it to be included when you skip through
2 112 @
units using the Previous/Next unit buttons, you can select the Sleep option by
right-clicking on the unit.
However, please note that this unit will remain in Sleep Mode in subsequent
turns unless you again right click and deselect Sleep.
6.2.2. Dynamic Movement

Dynamic Movement allows most land and naval units to move or attack, be
deselected, then reselected again until they have used up all their Action Points
(APs) or Attacks.
The exceptions to using Dynamic Movement are some unit types including
all Artillery. After Artillery attack they can move a maximum of 1 hex.
6.2.3. Specifying Controlled Movement Paths

A specific movement path can be chosen by pressing Ctrl on your keyboard.
Individual Waypoints can then be selected by left clicking on the hexes you
wish to move through.
You can either select each individual hex to be moved through, or you
can select several Waypoints and let the game engine determine the paths in
between. Left click on the final destination to carry out the move.
Tip! If playing using Fog of War, you can use controlled movement paths
to avoid surprise contacts with hidden enemy units whose location is only
suspected.
6.2.4. Unit Spotting Ranges During Movement

If a unit has moved its full distance in one move, i.e. without being deselected at
any point, then its full spotting range will remain after its movement. However,
by moving its full movement all at once the risk of Surprise Encounters with
hidden enemy units is high.
The only way to avoid these Surprise Encounters is to deselect an advancing
unit, have it spot, and then move it again. But when a unit moves or attacks,
after its second committed move (i.e. when it has been deselected a second
time) its spotting range is reduced to 1 hex. Thus it retains its full spotting
range after its first move, but loses it once it moves a second time.
2 113 @
The unit’s movement range will update as it is moved, and you can click on
new attainable destination hexes without deselecting it.
Tip! Cavalry have a greater spotting range than Infantry, so moving a
Cavalry unit first may disclose some enemy units. As infantry can only spot
into adjacent hexes, having some cavalry in your armies is essential to prevent
ambush!
6.2.5. Surprise Contact

Fog of war provides a special combat feature that occurs when a unit moves
adjacent to a hidden enemy unit. A message denoting Enemy Contact! will
appear when this happens. These encounters will only result in combat if it
favors the hidden unit; otherwise, the moving unit may still attack normally.
Exception: Submarines that have dived when attacked will not attack a
surprised unit that runs into them in the same turn.
On land, if the contact results in combat, then the hidden unit (which counts
as the attacker) has its readiness increased by 15% for the combat calculation.
Additionally, the hidden unit’s combat losses will be 15% less and the moving
unit’s combat losses 15% more than they would otherwise have been.
Tip! Surprise Encounters can lead to your units suffering severe casualties
which a more cautious advance or prior reconnaissance might have avoided.
When a surprise contact occurs at sea, the enemy contact adjustment for
the attacker only applies when calculating attacker losses and does not apply
when calculating defender losses. For example, if an Ironclad is moving and
there is enemy contact with a Monitor, the Monitor becomes the attacker. The
Monitor will still take 15% less damage when calculating its losses but it will not
inflict 15% more damage on the Ironclad. An encounter at sea still favors the
hidden unit, but the impact is reduced.
Land units that are surprised by a hidden enemy unit do not lose any Action
Points, but surprised naval units will generally have their remaining Action
Points divided by 5, except for in the following exceptions:
§ Submarines in Silent Mode will have their remaining Action Points

divided by 2.
2 114 @
§ Naval units that have engaged in combat as a result of the surprise will
have their remaining Action Points divided by 2.
§ Naval units in cruise Mode will lose all remaining Action Points.
Note: any naval unit using Cruise will not be stopped by a Submarine in Silent
mode.
6.2.6. Zones of Control

In addition to the Terrain penalties listed above, most land units exert a zone
of control hindering enemy movement in adjacent hexes. To determine the
extent of the zone of control exerted, all units are assigned a category:
§ Front Line Units are Divisions, Corps, Mountain Divisions, Marines,

Blockhouses, Defenses, and all naval units except for Submarines, Naval
Mines, and all types of Transport.
§ Support Units are all remaining land units apart from HQs and Balloons.
§ No Zone of Control Units are HQs, Balloons, Submarines, Naval Mines
and all types of Transport.
§ Damaged Units: units below strength 5 do not exert any Zone of Control.
§ Naval Units in Port do not exert a Zone of Control.
One Front line unit will exert a zone of control, and this means that all enemy
units moving into, or within, one hex of it will have to pay an extra Action Point
to do so, while it will require two Support units to have the same effect.
Note: Naval units can pass through enemy naval units but they have a 50%
chance of suffering a 1 strength point loss for doing so.
Exceptions
§ Weak Units: Any unit with a strength of less than 5 does not exert any
Zone of Control.
§ Newly Landed Units: Units landing from Transports and Amphibious
Transports are not impeded by Zone of Control rules, though they are
limited to moving up to 2 hexes.
§ Dived Submarines: If a Submarine dives then it won’t exert any Zone
of Control for as long as it remains hidden. This can lead to naval units
2 115 @
having the appearance of gaining some Action Points when an enemy
Submarine dives near them.
6.3. Land Movement

§ Land unit movement is divided into four main areas:
§ Regular Movement
§ Rail Movement
§ Forced March
§ Swapping Units
6.3.1. Regular Movement

Whenever an active land unit has been selected with a left mouse click, the
hexes it can move to will have a green outline.
If you now move your cursor over the hexes you can move to, the movement
cost in Action Points will be shown. This cost includes any factors such as
terrain penalties or moving into or within the enemy’s Zone of Control.
Left click on your chosen destination hex and your unit will move there.
6.3.2. Rail Movement

A Rail Movement for a land unit represents its rapid transfer by rail between
valid urban resources or Fortresses that are all connected by a railway.
To perform a Rail Movement, the unit must begin its turn on a railroad,
and from there it must be possible to follow a railway line that travels through
an unbroken path of friendly land hexes connecting it to the final destination.
Other requirements are:
§ The controlling Major must have sufficient MPPs to pay for the Rail
Movement. This is 20% of the unit’s current production cost, though the cost
is reduced by 2 percentage points with every advance in Logistics research.
§ The destination rail-head hexes must be on or next to a settlement
(including towns, cities etc.)
§ The unit’s supply value must be at least 5.
§ The origin, destination and all through points must have a strength of
at least 5.
2 116 @
In order to Rail Move a land unit, right click on the unit and select Rail
Move from the drop down menu. Left clicking on any one of the highlighted
destination hexes will complete the movement. Note that Rail Movement
triggers a 15-25% loss of unit morale.
6.3.3. Forced March

This enables you to move your units at a much faster pace, but in doing so
they will suffer a 50-65% loss of morale. This will severely reduce their combat
effectiveness.
Left click on a Land unit twice and providing it is a unit capable of Forced
March, it has a supply value of 5 or more and it is not adjacent to an enemy
unit, it will be able to move twice as far as usual.
The outline of the hexes it can move to solely by using Forced March will
have an orange outline.
In carrying out a Forced March the unit will not be able to attack any enemy
units or capture any enemy resources, and Artillery will be reduced to 1 shell when
doing so. The dramatic loss of Unit Morale represents the tiredness, disruption,
and logistical problems caused by the unit moving at such a rapid rate.
6.3.4. Swapping Units

Select one unit, press Shift and select an adjacent unit you wish to swap it
with. There is a Morale penalty of 15-20% for swapping, and both units will
have a maximum of 1 Action Point after doing so. Unless the swapped units
have already attacked they will still be free to attack, and providing they aren’t
adjacent to any enemy units, to be reinforced or upgraded.
6.3.5. The Effect of Terrain on Land Movement

Launching attacks reduces Action Points by 1 per attack, and moving into a
clear hex or along a Paved Road (or Dirt Road in good weather) uses up 1 Action
Point per hex.
However, some hexes cost 2 or more Action Points to move into, as there
is an additional penalty point associated with moving into or through them
as follows:
2 117 @
1 Penalty Point
§ Major River
§ Land/Sea Hexes e.g. navigable rivers such as the Mississippi
§ Forest
§ Marsh
§ Hill
§ Bush
§ Bocage
§ Oasis
§ Desert
§ Enemy held Major River
§ Mud
§ Rain/Fog
§ Snow
§ Sandstorms
§ Storms at Sea
2 Penalty Points
§ Jungle
§ Mountain
§ Lake
3 Penalty Points
§ High Mountains
The above are cumulative so some hexes may require a unit to have a significant
number of Action Points available to be able to move into them.
Tip! Given that supply is a very important factor on the number of Action
Points a unit has, keep your units in good supply, and if possible consider
upgrading them with Mobility to increase their Action Points.
6.3.6. Hex Ownership

Advancing units will not change the ownership of empty hexes that are
contested by an enemy unit or resource. Instead, ownership of these contested
hexes will only change if the hex is no longer contested, i.e. if the enemy unit
2 118 @
contesting ownership from an adjacent hex is destroyed or retreats, or if the
resource is captured.
This means that you can see changes to hex ownership instantly, increasing
clarity and helping with your planning.
6.4. Naval Movement

Naval unit movement is divided into four main areas:
§ Regular Movement
§ Naval Cruise
§ Transport Movement
§ Submarine Movement
6.4.1. Regular Movement

All naval units can be moved by first selecting the unit and then left clicking on
any one of the highlighted destination hexes.
A specific movement path can be chosen by pressing and holding Ctrl on
your keyboard. Individual Waypoints can then be selected by left clicking on
the hexes you wish to move through. Left click on the final destination to carry
out the move.
6.4.1.1. Naval units and Neutral Majors

Naval units belonging to neutral Majors cannot be used to blockade the path of
belligerent nations’ naval units. The belligerent’s units can sail through them,
though they cannot literally occupy the same hexes as the neutral’s vessels.
6.4.2. Naval Cruise

The option to Cruise is available for almost all naval units that have a supply
value of 5 or more, and this enables them to move double their normal
movement distance, but for the loss of 1 supply point.
Left click on a naval unit twice, and the outline of the hexes it can move to
will change from blue to orange. Click on your destination and the unit will
move there, providing it doesn’t encounter any previously unseen enemy units
en route.
2 119 @
A cruising naval unit will not be able to attack, not even if it does encounter
previously hidden enemy units in a Surprise Encounter, nor will it be able to
slip past any previously unseen enemy units.
Regular Amphibious Transports and Submarines are the only naval units
that cannot Cruise.
Troop Transports and Long Range Amphibious Transports can Cruise
because they are generally using faster, lighter ships, whereas regular
Amphibious Transports are designed more for short range operations and are
less seaworthy.
6.4.3. Surface Raiders

To raid a Convoy route, Surface vessels must be in Raider mode, and this Mode
can be turned on or off at any time during your turn.
6.4.4. Transport Movement

Regular Transports are used solely to move land units across the sea, and
they have no attack capabilities. Transports can only load or unload units at
a friendly-controlled Port, and can then be moved just like other naval units.
The cost for embarking units in Transports is set at 5% of unit cost, but
Logistics research will decrease this cost by 10% per level.
Even if the controlling Major has sufficient MPPs, each country can only
put a limited number of units in Transports at any one time. This limit will
increase through researching Logistics, as Build Limits will increase by 1 per
level for Majors and their respective Minors.
To transport a land unit using regular troop Transports, the unit must be
active and located adjacent to a friendly Port (including River Ports) that has a
strength of at least 5.
By right clicking on the unit and selecting Transport from the drop down
menu, the land unit will be replaced by a Transport icon either directly on
top of the Port hex or, if there is already a unit in the Port, adjacent to it. The
Transport will have a supply value of 10. If more units are present to be placed
in Transports, they can be embarked as long as there are available sea hexes
adjacent to the Port for them to go to.
2 120 @
In terms of combat, Transports are quite weak since they cannot attack and
their defense is poor. They do have a 10% chance of evading damage if attacked,
but even so, providing them with naval escorts is strongly recommended.
A regular Transport can be moved immediately after loading. The embarked
unit can only be unloaded in a friendly Port, and possibly in the same turn if it
has sufficient Action Points to reach the new Port destination.
To unload in a friendly Port, move the unit into the desired Port hex and
then finish its movement. The unit will remain active and may be unloaded
either by left clicking on the Transport again, or by right clicking on it and
selecting Unload from the drop down menu. Left clicking on any one of the
highlighted hexes adjacent to the Port will complete the unloading.
Nevertheless, regular Transports can only enter and unload in a Port in the
same turn if the Port has a strength of at least 5. If the Port’s strength is below 5
then the Transport can enter in one turn and unload in the next. This represents
the disruption to unloading facilities that would exist in a damaged Port.
Note: Transport loading or unloading cannot take place at a frozen Port hex.
Once unloaded, the Transport icon will disappear and the original transported
unit will then land with a maximum supply value of 5 regardless of the current
Transport supply value. In most cases this will be a reduction in unit supply and
it represents the reorganization required following troop transport. Morale is
recalculated when the unit is unloaded, which may also result in a reduction in
unit readiness, but the unit may now move and fight normally.
6.4.4.1. Limits on Transports

Each country can only put a limited number of units in Transports at any one
time. This limit will increase through researching Logistics, as Build Limits will
increase by 2 per level for Majors and their respective Minors. Logistics also
decreases the cost of putting units in Transports by 10%.
6.4.5. Amphibious Transports

Amphibious Transports are used to conduct invasions against enemy shores,
so their use may be important for both sides at times. Note that neutral Majors
cannot embark units into Amphibious Transports.
2 121 @
The cost for Amphibious Transport is set at 10% of unit cost, and this higher
cost is due to the specialized organization and equipment required for an
amphibious landing.
Researching Amphibious Warfare will increase the Action Points and Build
Limits of Amphibious Transports.
Like regular Transports, land units have to be embarked on Amphibious
Transports at a Port that is at strength 5 or more. However, they can unload
not only in friendly Ports, but also directly onto friendly or enemy held Coastal
hexes (or the banks of navigable rivers).
Marines are a unique unit type in that they don’t need to be adjacent to a
Port in order to embark in an Amphibious Transport.
Right click on the unit and select Amphibious Transport from the drop
down menu, and the unit will be replaced by an Amphibious Transport icon
either directly on top of the Port hex or adjacent to it.
Unlike regular Transports, the Amphibious Transport cannot move on the
turn the unit embarks unless level 1 in Amphibious Warfare has been reached, in
which case it will be able to move 1 hex after loading. This can be useful as it
increases the ability to load multiple units at a single port.
On your next turn you will be able to move the Amphibious Transport in
accordance with its number of Action Points.
Like regular Transports, the embarked unit will be given full supply of 10
and there will be an immediate recalculation of morale to reflect this supply
value. If more units are present to be placed in Amphibious Transports, they
can be embarked as long as there are available sea hexes adjacent to the Port
for them to go to.
The Amphibious Transport’s supply value will drop by 1 each turn it is at
sea, and its Action Points and the embarked unit’s readiness will also fall the
longer it remains at sea.
Regular Amphibious Transports cannot Cruise or use Dynamic Movement,
so their moves need to be planned well, especially with a view to avoiding them
being at sea for very long.
The Weather will impact on some amphibious operations, as:
2 122 @
§ No Amphibious loading is allowed from a snowed Port hex.
§ No Amphibious unloading is allowed onto a snowed Coastal hex.
§ No Amphibious loading or unloading is allowed from or onto a frozen
Coastal or Port hex.
To help soften up the target before a landing is made, Amphibious Transports

can themselves attack an enemy unit occupying a Coastal hex, before the unit
they are carrying is landed. This feature enables amphibious units to attack
small defended islands. However, it can only unload into an empty hex, so the
defender will have to be eliminated before landing. Once the unit has been
unloaded from the Amphibious Transport it can attack again.
Note: This is the era before dedicated landing craft were designed to aid
amphibious landings. While it is still possible to launch attacks while your
units are still in their Amphibious Transports, such attacks are likely to result
in heavy casualties.
To unload onto either friendly or enemy territory, move the Amphibious
Transport adjacent to the desired Coastal hex and then finish its movement.
The unit will remain active and may be unloaded, either by left clicking on the
Amphibious Transport again or by right clicking on it and selecting Unload
from the drop down menu.
Left clicking on any one of the adjacent highlighted Coastal hexes will
complete the unloading. The Amphibious Transport icon will disappear and
the original transported unit will then land with its current supply onto the
selected Coastal hex. Once unloaded, the unit may move and fight normally.
When unloading an Amphibious Transport onto enemy territory, the unit
only has 2 Action Points so it cannot move too far inland. Also, when unloading
onto enemy territory there is a chance that landing casualties will be suffered.
This random chance is related to the amphibious unit’s current supply as
shown in the following formula:
Landing Casualty Chance = 100 - (Amphibious Unit Supply -1) * 10
As supply decreases over time, the longer a unit is at sea the greater its
chance of suffering landing casualties. If this trigger is met, the landing
casualty penalty will be a loss of up to 25% of unit strength in good weather,
and up to 40% in bad weather.
2 123 @
Also, if landing on non-clear terrain then there is a 50% chance of suffering
additional landing casualties on top of the previous landing casualty rule. Morale
and readiness will then be recalculated after any landing losses are factored in.
Enemy naval units and fortress Defenses will fire on Amphibious Transports
that halt in an adjacent hex, even if only temporarily prior to landing, so if your
own naval units and bombers can deal with these prior to the landing then that
will help to keep your casualties down.
6.4.6. Amphibious Transports (Long Range)

These act just like Amphibious Transports except that they don’t lose supply
every turn, have a much greater normal movement range, and they can Cruise.
Their ability to Cruise is really useful for launching invasions far from their
starting point. However, as they are 25% more expensive than regular Amphibious
Transports, their use should be carefully considered before embarking the troops.
Long Range Amphibious Transports also benefit from increased Action
Points and Build Limits when Amphibious Warfare is researched.
6.4.6.1. Launching Successful Invasions

The key to successful amphibious landings is to have the units embarked for
the shortest possible time, with naval escorts, and for them to seize a port as
soon as possible after landing.
To maintain supply after the landing, it is important to land a HQ as part
of the invasion force, keeping it safe from counterattack so that it can provide
command and logistical support in subsequent turns as reinforcements are
fed into the battle and the enemy driven back.
HQ units, after amphibiously unloading, start at 10 supply and maintain
supply for up to 5 turns with a drop of 2 supply points per turn. This is similar
to Marines, and allows the HQ to act as a supply source for an initial landing
until further supply sources are achieved.
6.4.7. Submarine Movement

Submarines have a Mode option that can be set by right clicking the unit and
selecting the appropriate Mode from the drop down menu:
2 124 @
§ Hunt – This is a Submarine’s default status, allowing them to move their full
range each turn, and it will display a small blue button when in this mode.
§ Silent – Set to run silent and pass through enemy naval units undetected,
though with only 2/3 their normal number of Action Points.
§ Submarines in Silent Mode will display a small red button when in this
mode.
§ Changing from Hunt to Silent Mode or vice versa can only be done
before the Submarine moves or attacks.
Submarines that are attacked while running in Silent mode, will have their
potential losses reduced by 50%. They will also have the effectiveness of their
defensive return fire reduced by 50%.
Note: Submarines in Port that are in Silent Mode will not benefit from
being in Silent Mode if attacked. Nor will they be hidden from enemy spotting
like they would if at sea. However, if a Submarine is attacked while in Port, the
damage it receives is automatically halved.
The Submarine’s Silent Mode represents movement beneath the surface
where Submarines can pass through any enemy units unless they end their
move next to one.
When attacked, Submarines have a % chance of diving (note that this is
zero unless the Submarine has been upgraded with Buoyancy Tanks). If they
dive, they have a 25% chance of losing 1 strength point.
If they do dive then they will generally move 1-2 hexes away, and if they
were in Hunt Mode then they will automatically switch to Silent mode. This
means that the attacker will probably have to relocate the Submarine before it
can be attacked again.
Note that the best use of Submarines in combat is to lurk and ambush
enemy vessels. If however a Submarine moves before attacking then the vessel
it attacks will have its losses reduced by 50%, and the attacking Submarine will
have its losses doubled.
6.4.8. Oceans, Coasts and Rivers

Unlike previous Strategic Command games, American Civil War divides sea
hexes into three categories: Coast, Ocean and River. For reasons of historical
2 125 @
seaworthiness, some naval units are restricted from entering one or more of
these types of sea tiles, so these divisions will have a significant impact on the
movement of your naval units.
As a general rule of thumb, hexes that are within four hexes of the coastline
will be considered Coast tiles. All naval units, except for River Ironclads, River
Timberclads, and River Gunboats (“River ships”), can enter Coast tiles.
Hexes that are more than four hexes from the coastline will instead be
considered Ocean tiles, representing deeper and more challenging waters.
River ships, Gunboats, Monitors and Submarines cannot enter Ocean tiles.
Inland waters, such as the Mississippi River and Hudson-Delaware Canal,
are considered River tiles. Most commonly, these will appear on the map as
Land+Sea hexes (that is, hexes that both land units and sea units can occupy),
although some larger bodies of water such as the Great Lakes also function as
Rivers for game purposes. These navigable Rivers can only be traversed by the
three River ships, Gunboats, and all types of Transports. Land units treat River
hexes as they would any other Land+Sea tile, and the River distinction only
applies to naval units.
The distinction between Coast, Ocean and River tiles only determines which
units can enter a particular hex, and otherwise has no impact on movement,
combat or any other factors such as storm damage. All sea hexes require 1 AP
to move through.
Unlike our previous games, American Civil War allows all naval units,
including Transports, to move through and occupy enemy-held Land+Sea
hexes, with the exception of hexes that contain an enemy-controlled port
(including River Ports). This means that it is possible to load units onto
Amphibious Transports and sail them deep into enemy territory before
unloading. Beware that if you do so, your land units (though not your ships)
will still be bound by the usual supply rules. Towns taken in such a manner can
trace their supply along Land+Sea hexes, but only if every hex along the route
is controlled by that side. Note that enemy-controlled towns along the river’s
banks (and passing enemy units) will exert their zones of control at the end of
the turn just like any other resource in the game, which may result in this line
of supply being broken.
2 126 @
Naval units moving through inland waters will still be bound by their own
supply rules, and while they can occupy and control Land+Sea hexes, they
cannot be “cut off” from supply.
Note: Naval units can move through River hexes that are occupied by an
enemy land unit, but will suffer the loss of one strength point in doing so.
Rules for moving through enemy naval units are the same in Rivers as they are
on the open seas.
6.5. Combat
There are two basic types of combat: land and naval. Unlike some games
where multiple units may combine their attacks into a single combat, units in
Strategic Command move and attack individually, and may do so in any order.
Therefore, you are advised to learn to sequence and orchestrate your combat
maneuvers depending on the situation. While most units can participate in
both attack and defense sequences, some restrictions may apply and will be
further explained in the sections below.
To launch an attack, left click to select one of your units that has an enemy
unit within its Attack Range, and move your mouse cursor over the enemy unit.
6.5.1. Combat Predictions

Before attacking, the estimated combat results from an attack can be seen
above the target cursor as well as in the center of the Information Panel at the
bottom of the screen.
6.5.2. Combat Results

Once combat is resolved, the casualties suffered will appear temporarily above
each unit/resource that suffers a loss.
6.5.3. Fighting Spirit Bonus

Whenever an enemy unit is destroyed when its supply status is less than 5, the
Major whose unit destroyed it will receive a Fighting Spirit bonus equal to the
MPP cost of the unit it has just destroyed.
If a unit belonging to a Minor power destroys an enemy unit, then its
controlling Major will receive the Fighting Spirit bonus.
2 127 @
6.5.4. Land Combat
Most land units can participate in two different modes of combat:
§ Prepared Attack
§ Regular Combat
Artillery units work differently in that they may fire Offensively and/or
Defensively, and they cannot fire after moving.
6.5.4.1. Launching Attacks

Left click to select one of your units that has an enemy unit within its Attack Range,
and move your mouse cursor over the enemy unit you would like to target.
For most land units their Attack Range is 1 hex, though for Artillery units it
will tend to be 2 hexes.
Once a valid target has been found, both the attacker and defender
information is shown at the bottom of the screen. Also, the expected combat
losses are shown at the top center of the information bar, as well as above the
unit’s involved, as shown below.
Note: HQ units cannot attack at all since they are administrative in nature.
2 128 @
6.5.4.2. Prepared Attack
A Prepared Attack occurs when a land unit (excepting any Artillery units)
attacks without moving first. The attacking unit receives a 40% readiness
bonus in the combat calculations (50% if commanded by an HQ with rating
greater than or equal to 8).
Although none of the official American Civil War campaigns allow units
to do so, if a unit can launch 2 or more Attacks, it will only benefit from the
Prepared Attack bonus with its first attack.
6.5.4.3. Regular Combat

This occurs when a land unit moves before attacking, and because the attack
isn’t prepared it doesn’t benefit from the Readiness boost that a Prepared
Attack gives.
6.5.4.4. Attacks and Action Points

Each attack costs one Action Point, so a unit that attacks before moving its full
potential distance will have its potential movement distance reduced.
6.5.4.5. River Crossings

When attacking across enemy held watercourses the attacker suffers a
Readiness Penalty in the combat calculation as follows:
ATTACKING ACROSS READINESS PENALTY
River 20
Major River or Land/Sea Hex (this includes Navigable Rivers) 35
Stream/Wadi 10
6.5.4.6. Offensive and Defensive Artillery

Artillery units of all types receive a supply of shells each turn, and these can be
fired one by one during your turn, or left so that should your opponent attack
anyone within range of your artillery, they will fire defensively to protect the
targeted unit.
Artillery can fire blindly, potentially damaging hidden units, though the
firer will not discover from this whether or not any enemy units are present.
2 129 @
Siege Artillery will only provide Defensive Fire against enemy artillery units.
Railroad Batteries can only fire offensively, they do not provide Defensive Fire.
Artillery and Railroad Batteries can either fire or move in their turn. If they
fire, then they can move 1 hex after firing.
Fortress Defenses cannot move, but they can fire either offensively or
defensively. Their Defensive Fire will target any enemy Amphibious Transports
that come within range, so they can be very useful against an enemy invasion.
6.5.4.7. Retreats
Weakened units may retreat when attacked. This may happen if their estimated
remaining strength after the combat is 5 or less, and the unit will be fully de-
entrenched. However, if they retreat then the attacker will only receive 50% of
their potential losses, and in retreating they may leave a resource unguarded,
and a follow up attack will have a very good chance of destroying the retreating
unit.
The chance of a unit retreating depends not only on its strength, but also on
its unit type and on the hex it is occupying when it is attacked. The potential
retreat range is also dependent on the unit type.
For example, here are some examples of the % chances of some unit types
to retreat, depending on the hex they are in when attacked, along with their
maximum retreat range:
HEX TYPE ALL UNITS
Non-Resource 75%
Town, Settlement, Mine, Oil 50%
City, Major City, Fortification, Fortified Town 30%
Fortress, Major Fortress 0%
Maximum Retreat Range 3 hexes
6.5.4.8. Shattered Units

If a unit is at strength 1 or 2 when it is attacked, and it is unable to retreat, then
it will be destroyed instead.
2 130 @
6.5.4.9. Reduced Operational Efficiency
Damaged Urban resources cannot carry out the following functions:
§ If at less than strength 5, they cannot be used by land units for Rail
Movement.
A Port that has been reduced below strength 5:
§ Cannot be used to load units into Transports.

§ Cannot be used to unload units from Transports in the same turn that
they enter the Port.
6.5.4.10. Reduced Economic Value
Naval and artillery bombardment will immediately reduce an opponent’s
MPPs, as each point of damage inflicted on the resource will deduct MPPs
proportionate to the economic worth of that resource.
End of turn MPP income will also be reduced, as a damaged resource will
not provide its full potential output until they have been fully repaired.
As resources only repair themselves by 1 strength point per turn, if severe
damage is inflicted then it can take a long time for normal production to
resume, and repeated attacks every 3-4 turns can prevent this recovery.
Reduced value as a Supply Source
Damaged Urban resources will provide less supply to units in their vicinity,
so this means that unless they have alternative supply sources, enemy units
in this area will have their combat efficiency reduced and be easier to destroy.
6.5.5. Naval Combat

Naval combat is divided into four main areas:
§ Regular Combat
§ Naval Mines
§ Shore Bombardment
§ Convoy Raiding
2 131 @
6.5.5.1. Naval Combat and Supply
Each combat that a naval unit is involved in will use up 1 supply point, whether
the unit is attacking or defending. The only time that a unit doesn’t lose a
supply point when attacked is when a Submarine avoids an attack by diving.
6.5.5.2. Sinking Enemy Vessels

Whenever a vessel is sunk, the Major whose unit sinks it will receive a Fighting
Spirit bonus equal to the MPP cost of the vessel sunk, and its owner will suffer
a similar penalty. If it were a Battleship, Cruiser, Ironclad, Monitor, Ship of the
Line or Frigate then the penalty is double the cost.
If a unit belonging to a Minor power destroys the enemy vessel, then its
controlling Major will receive the Fighting Spirit bonus.
6.5.5.3. Regular Combat

Regular naval combat occurs whenever a naval unit attacks another naval unit
within its Attack Range, either before, during or after moving. The Attack
Range for all naval units is 1 hex.
Generally the higher the class of surface vessel, the more dangerous to the
enemy their attacks will be, so Battleships will tend to defeat Cruisers and
Ironclads, which will in turn tend to defeat Frigates and Gunboats. Ironclad-
class ships are also much more powerful than Wooden ships, as their iron
armor is almost impervious to Wooden ships’ older cannons.
Note that the best use of Submarines in combat is to lurk and ambush
enemy vessels. This is because if a Submarine moves before attacking then
the vessel it attacks will have its losses reduced by 50%, and the attacking
Submarine will have its losses doubled.
Attacking Naval Units In Port
All attacks by land units on a Port will target any naval units in the Port.
Attacks by surface vessels, except Gunboats, river ships and Torpedo Boats,
will target the Port first, and they will then have a small % chance (as shown in
the Combat Predictions Table before attacking) of damaging any naval units
that may be in the Port.
2 132 @
All naval units in Port are very vulnerable to attack by land units. So if enemy
ground forces are near any of your Ports, and the situation looks precarious, it
might be best to move any naval units out of the Port.
6.5.6. Naval Mines

Naval Mines can provide a good way of damaging enemy naval units with little
risk to yourself.
Laying Minefields
Naval Mines can be laid 2 per turn by Gunboats, River Gunboats and Torpedo
Boats belonging to a Major that is fully mobilized and at war.
Each Major has a pre-defined Build Limit of Naval Mines. The number of
minefields on the map can never exceed that Major’s Build Limit, though as
minefields are removed from the map when they are struck by vessels, so their
owning Majors will be able to relay them.
Note: The Build Limit for Naval Mines for all Majors in 1861 Blue and Gray,
and other default campaigns, has been set to zero. This means they will not be
seen in those campaigns, although you may choose to add them to your own
custom campaigns.
The Gunboat or Torpedo Boat must have a supply value of 5 or more, have
not engaged in combat this turn, and it must not have already used up all its
Action Points. Nor can it be adjacent to an enemy unit.
The unit laying a minefield will have its remaining Action Points divided by
5. This means it could be vulnerable to enemy attack in their forthcoming turn.
Tip! With a Gunboat or Torpedo Boat selected, mines can be laid with a
right click on the unit, a click on the Operation Action Button showing the
Naval Mine icon, or by left clicking on the Gunboat/Torpedo Boat 3 times if it
hasn’t moved, or 2 times if it has moved but not yet been deselected.
Moving into Minefields

All surface vessels have a 50% chance of striking an enemy mine when
attempting to move through a minefield, or when moving adjacent to a
previously unseen minefield, including when using Naval Cruise.
2 133 @
Submarines in Silent Mode can move through a friendly minefield with
impunity, whereas Submarines in Hunt Mode and all other surface vessels
have a 25% chance of striking a mine when doing so.
Submarines in Silent Mode have a 10% chance of striking a mine when
attempting to move through an enemy minefield, or when moving adjacent to
a previously unseen minefield.
Submarines in Hunt Mode have a 25% chance of striking an enemy naval
mine when passing through an enemy minefield.
If a unit does strike an enemy minefield, it will lose 2-5 strength points and
it will suffer an 8-15% unit morale penalty. Additionally it will have its remaining
Action Points halved, while a unit in Cruise Mode will have its movement ended.
The minefield will be considered to have been cleared in the process, and it
will be removed from the map.
Note: Minefields placed in strategic locations can trigger events the same
way a warship placed in that same location would.
6.5.6.1. Shore Bombardment

This occurs whenever naval units attack resources and enemy units located
on a Coastal hex. These attacks can help soften up any defenses prior to an
amphibious landing.
When a unit is ordered to perform shore bombardment on a resource,
damage can be inflicted on that resource even if there is a unit located there.
Shore bombardments will first attack the resource and then there is a 10%
chance (+10% for each level of Naval Weapons research) that a defending
unit located on the resource will also suffer a strength point loss. Note that
Submarines cannot perform shore bombardment.
6.5.6.2. Convoy Raiders

In addition to their regular naval combat capabilities, surface vessels (but not
Submarines) can be selected to hunt enemy Convoys in order to disrupt enemy
shipping, thus reducing your opponent’s income.
Active Convoy routes are shown as red or blue lines in game, or as white
lines if they are inactive. These can both also be seen on the Convoy Map.
2 134 @
To raid a Convoy route:
§ The raiding unit must be within 1 hex of a Convoy route

§ The raiding unit cannot be adjacent to any enemy naval units
§ The raiding unit must be in Raider Mode
Convoy raiding will reduce the income received by the Convoy’s recipient, and
Union players are advised that a concerted campaign against the Confederacy
can have a very significant impact on their income.
Convoy raiding will also inflict a small Fighting Spirit penalty on the Convoy
recipient. Gunboats inflict a reduction of 8 Fighting Spirit points against the
Convoy recipient, while other vessels will have a smaller effect.
Naval units gain 0.05 experience per successful raid.
Tip! At zero supply units cannot raid convoy lines, and Submarines cannot
dive, so returning to port periodically to refuel is strongly advised. The time in
port can also be used to reinforce and upgrade.
6.5.6.3. Convoy Raiding Mechanism

Resulting enemy MPP losses, up to the maximum value of the Convoy, are
determined by the following formulas:
Convoy MPP Loss = Random Value / 10 * Raider Raid Multiplier * Seasonal
Decrease %
Where: Random Value [Raider Strength, Raider Strength + (Raider
Strength / 2)]
6.5.7. Purchasing Units

Units may be purchased at any time during your turn by selecting Purchase
from the button at the top of the screen, or using the Ctrl-P Hotkey.
Once the Purchase Unit dialog appears, available units by country and by
type will be selectable on the left, while a breakdown of their combat values will
be displayed in a single column on the right.
By clicking on the Major country flag at the top, the name of that country
and all its active Minors will appear in the Select Country box. All purchases
are made by the Major powers, and they are responsible for paying for any new
2 135 @
units belonging to their Minors. If buying a unit for a Minor, click first on the
Major’s flag and then on the relevant country’s name. The Minor must be both
allied to you and an active participant in the war, i.e. it hasn’t surrendered.
The names of the unit types available for purchase are shown in white, while
those that you could have bought had you sufficient MPPs are shown in gray.
The number of units of each type available for purchase are shown in
parentheses. If you are playing with the Production Delay option then these will
be followed by the number of months or turns before the purchased unit will be
ready to deploy. (In all default campaigns, the delay will be given in Months).
In the Set Name box, you can select the named unit you wish to purchase, or
you can change the name providing the new name you choose does not already
exist for that unit type.
The dialog screen will show an icon for the selected unit type, the base unit
cost including any costs for any upgrades you apply, and its adjusted unit cost
in parentheses. These adjusted costs will take into account any reductions
due to Production Technology research, and Soft Build Limit penalties if you are
playing with that option switched on.
Unit types whose Build Limit has already been reached will be shown in red,
as will those that will only be available for purchase at a later date. You can tell
the latter from the former by clicking on the unit type’s name, as if they can’t
yet be bought then they will show the date when they will become available.
6.5.7.1. Upgrading Units when Purchasing

In the Upgrade box at the bottom of the dialog you can add upgrades when
you purchase the units in accordance with your current research levels. The
corresponding unit cost and combat values are dynamically adjusted as you
add or remove selected upgrades. If the adjusted unit cost is more than a
country’s currently available MPPs, the cost will be highlighted in light gray,
and the Purchase button will be unselectable.
Tip! If MPPs are tight and you need to produce units quickly, then upgrade
them later when you have more MPPs available.
Tip! If you are researching Production Technology and are not in a rush for
new units, wait until you have achieved success in this category as that will
reduce their cost by 5% per level attained.
2 136 @
Once a unit is selected and you have added any upgrades, click on the
Purchase button to complete the purchase.
Purchased units will arrive as new units for placement as described below
under New Unit Arrivals. Once all purchases are complete, click on the Close
button to return to the Game Menu.
6.5.7.2. Reforming Destroyed Units

When a land unit is destroyed with a supply level of at least 5, it can be
repurchased at 60% base cost with half the usual Production Delay. In the
Purchase List, these unit’s names will be annotated with an ‘*’.
Tip! Prioritize these for repurchase rather than other units of the same type.
This represents the ability to repair equipment, call on cadres, partially
trained recruits and the wounded returning to the ranks. This isn’t available
to naval units as even though they represent more than one vessel, land units
are much better able to recover from losses and be reconstituted into fighting
formations, albeit ones that will have lost any experience they may have had
before they were destroyed.
In the default campaigns for American Civil War, unit reform rules only apply
to land units that have been given unit names (for instance Divisions, which bear
the name of their commander), but not to those that do not (such as Regiments,
which are considered too small to reform, or Armored Trains, which were
typically ad hoc constructions without a standardized design). Note that this is
only a convention, and will not necessarily be the case in custom campaigns.
6.5.7.3. The Production Table

Units scheduled to arrive for each Major and their respective Minors can be
accessed by either right clicking on the Major’s flag at the top left of the screen,
or by clicking on the Production button within the Purchase screen.
The Production Table shows all units that are due to arrive in future game
turns, i.e. that are in the Production Queue. These can be units included within
the campaign as well as units that you have purchased. Though if you are
playing with the Production Delay option switched off, then only the former
would show, as any units you buy can be deployed immediately after purchase.
2 137 @
Arrivals are arranged in two-month periods; e.g., Jan/Feb, Mar/Apr, etc.
with their specific arrival dates and locations, if applicable, listed beneath the
unit graphics. Click on OK at any time to exit back to the previous screen.
Note: Units destined to arrive by script or as a result of Decision Events are
not shown in the Production Queue.
6.5.8. New Unit Arrivals

New units becoming available for
deployment this turn, or that weren’t
deployed in previous turns, are displayed
when you start the turn in a New Units dialog
box as shown below:
Select a new unit and click OK to place it
on the map. Valid locations where the unit
can be deployed are highlighted on the map.
Left click on one to place the unit there.
Note: Unlike our previous games, in
American Civil War, land units may only be
deployed at Cities, Major Cities and both types of Capitals.
You can continue placing units until there are no more available this turn,
or you can click Cancel to delay any remaining unit placements until either
later this turn, or in a future turn.
If you do delay any or all unit placements, you can select New Units from
the Game Menu or use Ctrl-N at any point during the turn to bring up the
New Units dialog again. The only reminder that new units remain available
for placement is that the New Units button on the Game Menu remains
highlighted. If there are no new units available, the menu button is grayed out.
New units may not move or engage in combat during the turn that they are
placed on the map.
Tip! Regardless of how long the deployment of new units is delayed, they
will deploy with 50% morale. So there is very rarely anything to be gained
by delaying unit deployments beyond the current turn, unless you are very
uncertain of where you wish to place them.
2 138 @
6.5.8.1. New Units’ Supply
Most new units have a supply value of 10 when they deploy, except when they
belong to a neutral Minor when it enters the war, or when a Major enters the
war and some of its units deploy by script. These units will have supply of 3 for
that turn.
This means that an aggressor has the potential to wreak havoc in the turn
that they attack a neutral country, but they may face stiffer opposition in
subsequent turns as any surviving enemy units will have better supply.
6.5.9. Reinforcing Units

To reinforce a unit, right click on it and select either Reinforce or Elite
Reinforcements from the drop down menu. If the unit cannot receive any of
these then these options will be grayed out.
Note: Reinforcing a unit completes its action for the turn.
A unit can be reinforced providing:
§ It has not yet carried out any actions this turn, or has only swapped
position with a friendly unit.
§ Its current Supply Value allows for an increase in strength.
§ Its controlling Major has sufficient MPPs available.
A unit’s maximum reinforcement value is relative to its Supply Value, see the
Supply and Reinforcements Table for full details.
Regular reinforcement will allow a unit to be reinforced up to a maximum
strength value of 10, with a small reduction in experience for every strength
point reinforced. This represents the intake of new recruits lacking in combat
experience.
Note that naval units (with the sole exception of Torpedo Boats) can only
receive a maximum of 5 strength points per turn.
6.5.9.1. Surrounded Units

These can only be reinforced to a maximum strength of 5, irrespective of their
supply level and available MPPs.
2 139 @
6.5.9.2. Elite Reinforcements
Elite Reinforcements can only be applied if a unit is already at full strength.
The reason for this is that adding Elite Reinforcements increases a unit’s
strength beyond the normal maximum without any loss in experience. These
are more expensive than regular reinforcements and can only be added if there
are no adjacent enemy units.
Units can only receive 1 extra strength point of Elite Reinforcements per
turn, and they can only receive these up to the number of full experience bars
that they are carrying. For example, a unit with 2 experience bars can only be
reinforced to 2 strength points beyond its normal maximum.
Note: HQs cannot receive Elite Reinforcements.
6.5.9.3. The Cost of Reinforcing Units

The following formulas reflect the relative reinforcement costs of a unit due
to combat losses:
§ Regular Reinforcement Cost = # of Strength Points * (Cost of Unit / 10) / 2
§ Elite Reinforcement Cost = Regular Reinforcement Cost * 2
6.5.10. Upgrading Units

To upgrade a unit, right click on it and select Upgrade from the drop down
menu.
Once the Upgrade dialog appears, a list of available research levels will be
displayed on the left hand side and a breakdown of the unit’s adjusted combat
values as you apply upgrades will display in brackets [...] on the right.
You may customize units by setting the exact upgrades by type and level,
and the cost is dynamically adjusted as you do so, so you can consider different
options before deciding.
Note that units belonging to most Minors will cost more to upgrade.
It will at times be the case that a unit can only be upgraded in one of its
research categories, either because others haven’t yet been researched or
because sufficient MPPs aren’t available.
2 140 @
A unit can be upgraded providing:
§ It has not yet carried out any actions this turn, or has only swapped
position with a friendly unit.
§ Its current Supply Value is at least 5.
§ Its controlling Major has sufficient MPPs available.
§ There are no adjacent enemy units.
If the unit cannot be upgraded, the drop down menu option will be grayed out.
Note: Upgrading a unit completes its action for the turn.
Tip! It isn’t necessary to upgrade units to their maximum potential. It is
fully up to you how many upgrades you implement.
6.5.10.1. Upgrading Ports

Ports (including River Ports) may be upgraded with Lighthouses, providing that
category has been researched (in all default campaigns, all Majors will have
2 141 @
the maximum level of this technology). To upgrade a resource and increase its
naval spotting range, right click on it and select Upgrade.
If a unit is also located on the port, the drop down menu will expand to
allow either the unit or the port to be selected.
Once the Upgrade dialog appears, a list of available research levels will be
displayed on the left hand side and a breakdown of the resource’s adjusted
values will be displayed in brackets [...] on the right.
Note: No other resources, such as cities, may be upgraded with Lighthouses.
6.5.11. Renaming Units

In order to rename a unit, right click on it and select Rename from the drop
down menu.
Note: A check is made when renaming a unit to determine if the new name
already exists for the country and unit type. A warning message will prompt
you to select another name if it does.
6.5.12. Disbanding Units

Land units (including Balloons) belonging to Major powers can be disbanded,
and any unit that is disbanded results in an immediate recovery of MPPs as
shown in the formula below:
Recovered MPPs = Unit Cost / 10 * lowest value of unit’s supply or strength
* 20%
In order to disband a unit, right click on it and select Disband from the drop
down menu.
To avoid abuse of this feature, a unit can only be disbanded if:
§ It has not yet carried out any actions this turn.

§ It has a current supply value > 0.
§ No enemy units are adjacent.
Naval units, Forts and Minor’s units cannot be disbanded, again to avoid
abuse. Also excepted from being able to disband are units that have unloaded
from Transports this turn.
2 142 @
7. ADVANCED GAMEPLAY CONCEPTS
7.1. General Unit Characteristics
The following table outlines the basic characteristics for all units:
CHARACTERISTIC MAX VALUE
Experience Up to 5*
Supply 10
Action Points Unit’s AP Value
Strength Varying from 1-15
Attacks 0-2
Morale Determined by Formula
Readiness Determined by Formula
Entrenchment Dependent on Terrain Type
*This is a potential maximum, but in the official campaigns this is set to 3.
7.2. Combat Target Values

Each unit type also has Combat Target Values for:
ATTACK VALUES DEFENSE VALUES
Soft Soft
Infantry Infantry
Cavalry Cavalry
Artillery Artillery
Fort (this is an unused slot) Fort (this is an unused slot)
Armored Train Armored Train
- (this is an unused slot) - (this is an unused slot)
Balloon Balloon
Ironclad Ironclad
Wooden (Ship) Wooden (Ship)
Sub Sub
2 143 @
Transport Transport
Resource Resource
GENERAL
Spotting (Land) Min Shells
Spotting (Naval) Max Shells
Action Points De-Entrenchment
Operational Range De-Moralization
Intercept Range Interceptions
Escort Range Escorts
Attack Range Attacks
Not all of these characteristics will be applicable to every unit type, so

where they aren’t applicable a default value of zero will apply. For instance,
only Artillery units have Shells so all other unit types will have Min and Max
Shell values of zero.
Many of these values can be improved through researching and upgrading
your units, please refer to chapter 9 on Research for further details.
7.3. Headquarters Attachments

Headquarters attachments are vital in improving the Morale and Readiness
and therefore combat efficiency of your units.
Default unit attachment to an HQ is limited to the 5 closest units of the
commander’s nationality that are within 3 hexes of the HQ at the start of each
turn. These limits can be increased by researching the Field Telegraph technology.
If the HQ is a Major that can command units belonging to its Minors too,
then these will be included in the process. Thus Union and Confederate HQs
can command the troops of any Indian tribes that enter the war on their side,
and French HQs can command the forces of the Mexican Empire.
The game engine will automatically attempt to attach units firstly to the
highest rated HQ within its Attachment Range. It will also attempt to prioritize
attaching units that are adjacent to enemy units.
Basically, the HQ automatically reaches out until it collects the maximum
number of attachable units within its Attachment Range. If there is more than
2 144 @
one HQ in the area or units are manually attached to other HQs, then the engine
will attempt to allocate attachment as best satisfies the above requirement.
Clicking once on an HQ will highlight in green all of the units it commands.
A second click shows its attachment range. Also, when an attached unit is
selected, its parent HQ is highlighted in green.
7.3.1. HQ Modes
You can manually select and deselect HQ attachments if you wish to fine
tune them to get the best combat results. However, any changes in a unit’s
attachment or detachment status will only alter that unit’s Readiness value this
turn, its Morale value won’t change until the next turn.
To do this, right click on an HQ, select Set Mode, and then choose between
Auto, Auto-Assist and Manual.
Auto is the default and is automatically handled by the game engine, as
described above.
Auto-Assist allows attachments to be set manually, but the game engine will
provide assistance in subsequent turns by automatically selecting replacement
attachments if any of the units that had been manually attached no longer
fulfill the attachment requirements. So for instance, if the unit is now too far
away from the HQ, or has been destroyed, then the engine will attempt to find
another that can benefit from the HQ’s command.
Manual allows attachments to be set manually under the same rules as for
automatic attachments, except that you will have to make all changes yourself.
In subsequent turns you will need to keep an eye on the attached units, because
if one exceeds the attachment range or is destroyed then you will have to create
a new attachment yourself in a subsequent turn.
Once either Auto-Assist or Manual modes are selected, with the HQ selected
you will notice highlights in blue for units within its attachment range that
could be attached to it. To change a unit’s attachment or detachment status,
simply right click on a green unit and select Detach from the drop down menu
or right click on a blue unit and select Attach.
Note that only units that haven’t yet carried out any actions may be attached
or detached, so it is best to change unit attachments at the start of your turn.
2 145 @
As an example, the screenshot below
shows the basic process for the Hill AP
HQ detaching the highlighted Anderson
Division. First, right-click on AP Hill and set
the Mode to either Auto-Assist or Manual
by left-clicking on one of these options.
Now right-click on the Division and you will
be given the option to Detach it:
Attaching units works in exactly the same
way, except that if an HQ is already commanding its maximum complement of
units then you will have to detach a unit before you can attach another.
7.4. Building Fortifications

Engineers have the ability to build Fortifications that units can then occupy in
order to benefit from defense bonuses when attacked.
Engineer units must have a supply value of at least 5 to begin constructing
Fortifications, and they may move into position and begin fortifying in the
same turn. Engineers cannot begin constructing a Fortification when they are
adjacent to any enemy units, though they can continue with the work should
the enemy advance to an adjacent hex.
To begin constructing a Fortification, right click on the unit, select Set
Mode and Fortify from the drop down menu.
A dialog box will now appear which you can use to design your Fortification
as you can set the number of sides (# of Sides) and its orientation (Rotate).
The construction time is noted at the bottom of the dialog box. Note that the
construction time depends upon the number of sides selected, as additional
sides will extend the construction time.
Once you have set the Fortification’s design, the Engineer unit will receive a
small black circle on its base indicating that it is fortifying the hex.
The Engineer unit must remain in place during the entire construction
period, and when the work is complete a Fortification will appear in the hex.
The Engineer unit can then either occupy the Fortification and defend it, or
better still, it can move away to construct another while a front line unit moves
in to occupy the Fortification in its place.
2 146 @
If the Engineer unit is destroyed or moves away before construction is
complete, all work is lost and must be started all over again.
Note: Engineers cannot fortify hexes containing Resources.
7.5. Surrendering Nations

7.5.1. Surrendering Due to Losing the Capital
The primary way that a country will surrender is if its Capital has been
captured and it has few land units left within the country to defend it. Some
countries may continue fighting even if they have lost their Capital, and on rare
occasions it might even be possible to counterattack and liberate the Capital.
Every turn after a country loses its Capital (or last Capital if it had more
than one) there will be a check to see if it carries on fighting. The chance that it
will carry on fighting depends on the number of units it has left within its own
borders, as follows:
§ Major Country Surrender = 3% * number of remaining units within the

home country * FS
§ Minor Country Surrender = 6% * number of remaining units within the
home country
The chance for Minors is slightly higher because Minors generally have
significantly fewer units.
Tip! Liberating the Capital will end this process, so if you lose your Capital
do your best to take it back!
7.5.2. Alternative Capitals

Some countries do not immediately surrender when their Capital is
captured, either because they have one or more Alternative Capitals where
their government will move to, or because their government may transfer
to another country altogether. For example, if Washington DC falls then the
Union’s Capital will move to Philadelphia, then New York if Philadelphia falls
too, and finally Chicago if New York is also taken.
2 147 @
A country whose Capital transfers will lose its current Production Queue
items unless the new Capital is connected to either the location of the previous
Capital, or to any of the Industrial Center locations for that country.
7.5.3. Fighting on from Exile

Some countries’ units have a chance that they will not give up the fight when
their country surrenders.
In the default 1861 Blue and Gray campaign, the following nations’ units will
turn into “free” units following their surrender: Creek, Cherokee, Seminole,
Chickasaw, Choctaw, Osage.
Note: To fight on from exile, the unit must have evacuated before the
country surrenders. If it is within its own territory when the country it belongs
to surrenders then the unit will surrender too.
It is also not recommended to evacuate a country without fighting for it,
as you will lose the income from it sooner, therefore judging the right time to
evacuate does require good judgment.
7.5.4. Liberating Capitals

Capitals move back to their original location as they are liberated. So
if Philadelphia is the Union Capital and the Union is able to recapture
Washington then it would move back to Washington.
The liberation doesn’t have to be carried out in any order, so if the Union
recaptures Washington but not Philadelphia then the Capital would move back
to Washington even though it had changed from Washington to Philadelphia
earlier on.
7.5.5. Surrendering Due to Low Fighting Spirit

The alternative way in which a Major will surrender is if its Fighting Spirit
value falls to zero, irrespective of whether or not it still holds its Capital.
In the American Civil War campaigns, the Union and Confederate players
will lose the game when their Fighting Spirit falls below 10%, that is shortly
before they would surrender, to represent the fact that some Confederate
armies stayed in the field for several weeks after Lee’s surrender at Appomattox.
2 148 @
Although unlikely, it is possible for the European powers to withdraw from the
war when their Fighting Spirit falls to zero.
7.6. Capturing Enemy Supply Centers

An occupier gains the pre-existing Primary and Secondary Supply Centers
when an enemy country surrenders.
Supply and Industrial Centers that become part of another country as part
of an event (for instance, when Virginia becomes a part of the Confederacy)
will retain their status as Supply and/or Industrial Centers. Capitals that are
annexed into another nation will become Primary Supply Centers for that new
nation.
7.7. Plunder
When a country surrenders due to having all its Capitals captured, the
conqueror will plunder the country and receive a one-off MPP bonus. The
actual Plunder value is based on the following:
§ The total number and value of its Resources

§ The number of units the country had before surrendering
The plunder formulas do not include any units that will become free units, such
as if the Cherokees fight on from exile following the capture of Tahlequah. The
formulas used are:
Unit Plunder = Current Unit Cost / 10 * strength * 5% (for all units)
Resource Plunder = Full value of all originally owned Resources * 75%
These values are added together and then multiplied by a random factor
of between 150-200% for Major countries and between 250-300% for Minor
countries.
A final factor is the Difficulty Setting if playing against the AI.
Tip! Disbanding units when you realize a Major is about to surrender will
not reduce the amount of Plunder your opponent will receive. Fight on, do not
give up as only the enemy benefits from defeatism!
2 149 @
7.8. Victory Conditions
Victory Conditions are determined by specific scripts set for each campaign. A
message indicating the Game Over Victory Status will be displayed when the
game ends in either a victory for one side or in a stalemate.
With the game over, items not previously visible under Fog of War will now
become visible. These include all of your opponent’s units and strengths, research
successes, current diplomatic investments and items in their Production Queue.
Major Victory is normally achieved whenever you have successfully defeated
the leading Major country on the other side (the Union or Confederacy).
Minor Victory Conditions normally apply if the campaign’s end date has
been reached with one side having an advantage, but without being in a strong
enough position to claim a Major Victory.
Stalemate Victory Conditions occur if neither side achieves any of their
Victory Conditions by the campaign’s end date.
The scripts controlling the Victory Conditions are read in sequence, so even
if more than one set of conditions apply, the one that is higher in the listed
order will be the one that applies.
Tip! Be sure to read a campaign’s Victory Conditions as you play, as these
should inform your strategy.
7.9. The Game Engine’s Turn Sequence

These are the processes the engine goes through at the start and end of each turn.
Calculation Phase I (at the start of the turn)
Determine resource Operational Efficiency
Calculate Unit Supply
Calculate Unit Morale
Determine Unit Entrenchment
Calculate unit Action Points
Determine Fog of War
Calculation Phase II (after you have hit end turn)
Test for weather changes
Test for liberated countries
Test for country surrender
2 150 @
Test for scripted events
Test for naval damage at sea
Test for Partisan activity
Test for Diplomacy (current side only)
Test for Research (current side only)
Calculate Military Production Points (MPPs)
7.10. Collecting Military Production Points

Military Production Points (MPPs) are collected by Major countries at the end
of each turn and are based on the number, strength and type of Resources
currently owned or occupied by either side, coupled with the level of Industrial
Technology research that each Major has achieved.
For neutral, inactive Majors, their income is linked to their Mobilization
Values, as full production will not be reached until the country reaches 100%
Mobilization.
Note: In the default American Civil War campaigns, including 1861 Blue and
Gray, this game rule has been adjusted so that neutral Majors will not receive
any MPPs until they enter the war.
Although Minor countries do not receive MPPs, they do contribute MPPs to
their controlling Majors, who are in turn responsible for paying for everything
relating to their Minors, e.g. buying new units and reinforcing and upgrading
existing ones.
7.11. Supply
Units receive supply from friendly Resources and HQs, and unit supply is a
major factor in determining combat effectiveness.
General Notes on Supply

Major Capitals provide the most supply, with a maximum supply value of 12.
§ These are followed by Major’s Capitals, Industrial Centers, Primary

Supply Centers and Ports, which can potentially provide supply up to 10.
§ All of the above, except for Ports and Major Ports, are considered Key
Resources.
2 151 @
§ Connection (via a line of friendly land or land+sea hexes) from Key
Resources to other friendly resources will enable those resources to
reach their maximum strength and supply levels.
§ It is therefore wise to consider cutting the connections linking enemy
resources to their Key Resources, and this should be a factor in
determining your axis of advance into enemy territory. This way you
can not only reduce enemy income without capturing any Resources,
but it can also facilitate the destruction of enemy units at lower supply.
This will help because units at lower supply are less effective, are much
easier to destroy, and if destroyed with a supply value of less than 5 then
they cannot be cheaply reformed.
§ Secondary Supply Centers and Minor’s Capitals provide supply up to a
maximum of 5, potentially increasing up to their maximum value according
to their Resource type if they are connected by rail to any of the above.
§ Captured enemy Resources will generally provide less supply than
friendly ones.
§ The supply benefit of Resources decreases with distance by 1 per hex in
clear terrain.
§ The rate of decrease will be greater in non-clear terrain, as such terrain
is an impediment to good supply. For example, placing units in forests,
mountains or marshes, unless they are very close to a good supply
source, will generally be a bad move.
§ Both types of Roads negate the effect of terrain on supply, so keeping
units on or near roads is recommended. However, when the weather is
Mud only Paved Roads will do so.
§ Note: Paved Roads were uncommon outside of cities during the 19th
century, and will not be seen in any of the default campaigns.
§ Oil and Mine Resource types do not provide supply to any units.
§ Units in low supply cannot be reinforced as well as those in higher supply,
while those lacking any source of supply cannot be reinforced at all.
§ Naval units can only be fully supplied in Port, though they will gain
some supply from being in the proximity of friendly Ports, the benefit
decreasing with distance.
2 152 @
7.12. Resource Definitions
7.12.1. Major Powers’ Capitals
§ These act as a primary supply source providing supply up to their
maximum strength value according to their Resource type (usually 12).
§ New units can be deployed in a Capital and any friendly city or capital
belonging to the same country with a strength of at least 5 that is
connected via friendly controlled hexes to it.
§ If the Capital falls the country generally surrenders, unless it transfers
to an Alternative Capital.
7.12.2. Industrial Centers

§ These act as a primary supply source providing supply up to their
maximum strength value according to their Resource type (usually 10)
even if they are cut off from the Capital.
§ New units can be built at an Industrial Center and any city or capital
with a strength of at least 5 that is connected via friendly controlled land
hexes to the Industrial Center.
7.12.3. Primary Supply Centers

These act as a primary supply source providing supply up to 10 even if cutoff
from the Capital.
7.12.4. Secondary Supply Centers

§ These act as a secondary supply source that provides supply up to 5 if
cutoff from any of the above.
§ You cannot build new units from a Secondary Supply Center unless it is
connected to a Capital or Industrial Center via friendly controlled land
hexes, and it is either a city or capital.
7.12.5. Minor’s Capitals

§ These act as a secondary supply source that provides supply up to 5 if
cutoff from a friendly Major’s Capital, Industrial Center or Primary
Supply Center.
2 153 @
§ New units belonging to that Minor can be built at a Minor Capital and in
any city within that country with a strength of at least 5 that is connected
via friendly controlled land hexes to the Minor Capital.
§ If the Minor Capital falls the country generally surrenders.
7.12.6. Key Resources

§ The above are all defined as Key Resources.
§ Resources not connected to a Key Resource will have a maximum supply
value of 3, or 5 if they are a Port.
§ Port supply = Port strength minus the distance in hexes from the Port,
both out to sea and also on land, with terrain and roads also needing to
be factored in with the latter.
7.13. Maximum Resource Strengths

The following outlines the conditions that determine the maximum Operational
Strength Value of a resource.
7.13.1. Connected Resources

If the resource is in direct connection to a friendly Major’s Capital, Industrial
Center or Primary Supply Center, then unless they are damaged, these
resources will have strength and supply values of:
§ 12 for Major Cities, Major Capitals and Major Fortresses
§ 10 for Cities, Ports, Capitals and Fortresses
§ 10 for Occupied enemy Major Cities and Major Capitals
§ 8 for Towns, and any Occupied enemy Resources
§ 8 for Settlements
7.13.2. Unconnected Resources

If the resource is connected to a Secondary Supply Center but not to a friendly
Major’s Capital, Industrial Center or Primary Supply Center, then it will have
a maximum strength of 5.
2 154 @
7.13.3. Captured but Unconnected Enemy Resources
The Occupational Efficiency penalty (the fact that enemy resources don’t
generally work as efficiently under your control) doesn’t apply in the following
circumstances:
§ Occupied Capitals, Primary or Secondary Supply Centers that aren’t
connected to a friendly Major’s Capital, Industrial Center or Primary
Supply Center will have a maximum strength of 5.
§ Occupied Industrial Centers that aren’t connected to a friendly
Major’s Capital, Industrial Center or Primary Supply Center will have a
maximum strength of 3.
7.14. Supply Connection Rules

§ All resources connected to either a Primary or Secondary supply source
will have their maximum strength & supply values according to their
type, e.g. Towns will be at strength 8, Cities at 10.
§ All resources that are not connected to a Supply Center are considered
cutoff and will have a maximum strength value of 3. Ports are an
exception to this rule, as their maximum will default to 5.
7.15. Besieging Resources

Any resource except for a Major’s Capital or Fortress that has 2 or more enemy
units adjacent to it will have its strength reduced by 1 point per turn until it
reaches 0.
The absence of enemy units will see the resource regain strength by 1 point
per friendly turn, i.e. deterioration happens in both friendly and enemy turns,
but regaining strength only occurs in friendly turns.
This rule also applies to Ports with two or more enemy naval units (except
Gunboats, Submarine, river ships, naval mines and all types of Transports) present.
7.16. Port Supply to Land Forces

Any Port that has an enemy unit adjacent to it will not provide supply to friendly
land units within its supply range. Port strength itself will be unaffected, and
the only effect of the presence of the enemy unit will be to impede supply to
2 155 @
land units. Destroying the enemy unit or driving it away will enable that Port
to provide supply again.
7.17. Artillery with Zero Supply

Artillery and Railroad Batteries do not accumulate shells beyond their
minimum if their supply level is zero.
7.18. Raiding when at Zero Supply

Units cannot raid convoy lines when they are at zero supply, though they can
still disrupt shipping at locations marked on the map.
Submarines cannot dive when they are at zero supply, rendering them
more vulnerable, so it is strongly advised to return to port for refueling before
their supply level drops too low.
7.19. Damage to Resources

Naval blockade, bombardment, and partisan activity can all reduce the
strength of resources. This will in turn reduce both their supply value and also
the number of MPPs collected at the end of each turn.
On subsequent turns, the Operational Strength Value for damaged
resources is automatically increased by one point per friendly turn, up to their
maximum strength value. This simulates rebuilding and repair of damaged
infrastructure, without requiring any micromanagement.
7.20. Industrial Modifier

A factor in determining the actual income received
by each Major from its own Resources is its
Industrial Modifier. This represents the production
capability of its Resources relative to their strength.
Each friendly Major’s Industrial Modifier value
appears when you hover your mouse over the
Major’s flags in the top left of the screen:
A value of 100% represents a 1-to-1 relationship
between collected MPPs and production capability.
2 156 @
A value of 75% represents three-quarters production, 125% represents one and
one-quarter production, and so on.
This Industrial Modifier value will increase with each level of Industrial
Technology research that is achieved. Please refer to chapter 9 on Research for
additional details.
Since Minor countries cannot conduct their own research, and do not
benefit from their Major’s Industrial Technology research successes, they will
always have a default Industrial Modifier of 100%.
In general, all MPPs collected at the end of each turn are available for
use during the next turn. The production values for each type of controlled
resource are added together and then multiplied by their country’s Industrial
Modifier.
For neutral Major countries, as their Mobilization value is less than 100%,
their income is adjusted to account for this. (Note that 1861 Blue and Gray has
a special rule in place limiting the income of neutral Majors to zero). The
following formula shows how MPP collection is calculated:
MPP Collection = Total Resource Value * Industrial Modifier * Mobilization
Value
Note: If a campaign has longer winter turns and shorter summer turns,
then this has the effect of meaning that less income is received in winter.
If this isn’t desired then campaigns can be amended to use the Normalized
Production option which ensures that production per time period is more
balanced in campaigns with variable seasonal turn lengths. Its effect will be to
increase production in winter turns and decrease it in summer turns.
7.21. Unit Production

In general, a country’s production of units can only occur in or adjacent
to cities, major cities and capitals that are connected to their Capital or an
Industrial Center. In addition, most campaigns are set so that new units can
only be deployed in their Home Countries.
The following table outlines the standard production costs in MPPs for
each unit type with no research upgrades added:
2 157 @
HQ 300 + (HQ Rating * 5%)
Regiment 100
Brigade 200
Division 300
Corps 450
Mountain Division 300
Rangers 225
Marines 350
Engineers 350
Indians 275
Cavalry Brigade 250
Cavalry Division 375
Cavalry Corps 500
Partisans 150
Blockhouse 175
Field Artillery 350
Siege Artillery 400
Railroad Battery 425
Defenses 200
Armored Train 150
Balloons 150
Battleship 450
Cruiser 400
Ironclad 325
Monitor 275
Ship of the Line 300
Frigate 200
Gunboat 100
River Ironclad 150
River Timberclad 100
River Gunboat 75
Submarine 100
Torpedo Boat 250
Note: The Partisan cost is only relevant to reinforcement cost calculations,

as this unit type can never be purchased. Also, some unit costs may vary slightly
from the above.
2 158 @
7.22. Reinforcement Costs
Reinforcement costs for damaged units are based on the current cost of the
unit. The following formulas reflect the relative reinforcement costs of a unit
due to combat losses:
§ Regular Reinforcement Cost = # of strength points * (Cost of Unit / 10) / 2
§ Elite Reinforcement Cost = Regular Reinforcement Cost * 2
7.23. The Cost of Upgrading Units

Research is vital to improving the combat effectiveness of your units.
There are two categories of Research, Manual and Automatic. Automatic
research successes don’t increase unit production and reinforcement costs,
but Manual upgrades applied to units will do so.
The following formula reflects the cost of units according to their applied
research upgrades:
Cost of Unit = Standard Production Cost + (% increase * # of applicable
research levels)
By % increase we are referring to the increase in cost due to each upgrade
applied to the unit. So for example, if a Corps is upgraded with Infantry
Equipment level 1 then its price will increase by 10% as that is the cost per
upgrade for that research type.
Cost increases for units upgraded with multiple technologies will have
cumulative effects. For example, upgrading a unit with level 2 research in both
Infantry Equipment and Skirmishers would increase overall costs by 30%, as the
former increases costs by 10% per level, and the second by 5%. See chapter 9 on
Research for more details.
7.24. Decision Events

During the game you will at times be asked to make strategic decisions. This
feature is called a Decision Event and you will be prompted to choose either
Yes or No.
The text accompanying the Decision Event will describe and explain the
choice facing you, but choose wisely because once you have chosen you will not
be able to change your mind.
2 159 @
Examples of Decision Events include:
§ For the Union: choosing whether to issue the Emancipation Proclamation.

§ For the Confederacy: choosing whether to sell the pre-war cotton
stockpile.
§ For Mexico: choosing whether to sell Baja California to the Union.
§ For the UK: choosing whether to launch an invasion of the off-map
Washington Territory.
Clicking on the ‘Notes’ tab on the bottom right of the Decision screen will bring
up notes relating to the decision that may help you make your choice.
While a Decision is awaiting your choice, you can click on ‘View Map’ so
that you can consider the situation with reference to the actual game map,
checking various things like your Production Queue and Diplomacy.
When you’re ready, you can return to the Decision screen by clicking on the
button in the bottom left corner. Note that you won’t be able to continue playing
until you have responded to the Decision Event by choosing either Yes or No.
7.25. Factors Influencing Combat Effectiveness

Let’s now look at the different factors that determine a unit’s combat
effectiveness.
7.25.1. Experience
A unit’s experience is based upon its success in combat, with a small extra
bonus for attacking and destroying enemy units.
Unit experience has a maximum value of 3 in our official campaigns (except
for forts, small ships, Armored Trains and Artillery, which are limited to 1),
though the maximum can be edited up to 5.
When replacing losses, some experience will be lost, and the formula used
for this is as follows:
Experience Point Losses = (Reinforcement amount * Experience) / 10
For HQs, combat experience is dependent upon how well subordinate
units under their command perform in the field according to the following
two equations:
2 160 @
If Defender’s Losses > Attacker Losses
+0.05 (Attacker’s HQ, if Attacker is a Soft, Infantry or Cavalry unit); +/-0.0
(if Attacker is an Artillery, Fort or Armored Train unit)
+/- 0.0 (Defender’s HQ)
If Defender’s Losses >= Attacker Losses
+0.05 (Defender’s HQ)
-0.05 (Attacker’s HQ)
7.25.2. Factors Influencing Action Points

In general, normal supply is traced from friendly sources over friendly
controlled hexes, with the supply value decreasing as the distance from the
supply source increases.
Terrain movement costs apply to supply paths, reducing by 2 for entering
Mountain and Lake hexes, 3 for High Mountains, and by 1 for all other terrain.
Supply to land units cannot be traced over bodies of water, across depressions,
or through neutral territory. The supply value of a hex is the maximum supply
it is receiving from any source, and this may not be the closest, e.g. a Town 3
hexes away will, all other things being equal, provide less supply than a Major
City 4 hexes away.
7.25.3. Roads and Supply

Paved Roads negate the effect of terrain and weather on supply, and as troops
also move faster on roads it is usually best to keep most of your units on roads,
and only leave them when you will gain a tactical advantage by doing so.
Dirt Roads work like Paved Roads except that they do not prevent a
reduction in Action Points (APs) when the weather effect is that of Mud. Note
that due to the generally poor standard of roads in the 19th century, all roads in
the default campaigns are Dirt Roads.
One special rule is that if a unit has only 1 AP then any additional weather
penalties do not apply.
2 161 @
7.25.4. HQ Supply
HQs have a calculated supply value just like all other units, but in addition they
have a Supply Distribution Value that can be applied to supply other friendly
units around them.
This Supply Distribution Value is calculated based on the current supply
value of the HQ. The following table outlines HQ supply distribution
calculations, based on full strength HQs:
HQ SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
HQ SUPPLY (INCOMING)
(OUTGOING TO OTHER UNITS)
0 3
<3 5
<5 6
5 8
>5 10
7.25.5. The Supply Value of Low  Strength HQs

Low strength HQs aren’t very effective sources of supply to units around them
because they are working at reduced efficiency. Consequently their Supply
Distribution Value is reduced using a formula that multiplies the HQ Supply
Distribution Value by HQ strength, divided by 10.
The Final Supply Distribution Value cannot however fall below the HQ’s
Minimum Supply Value, and this can be increased by researching Logistics,
see below.
7.25.6. Reinforcing HQs

Low Strength HQs can only be reinforced in stages, so if damaged it is wise to
start reinforcing them as soon as possible. Or move them to safety if they are
in extreme danger.
7.25.7. Raising HQs’ Minimum Supply Value

Researching Logistics raises the Minimum Supply Value for HQs. At level 1, the
Minimum Supply Value is 1, and this will rise by 1 for every subsequent level
attained.
2 162 @
So if level 5 Logistics has been attained, then a HQ with a strength value of 1-4
will have a minimum supply value of 5 even if it has no access to a supply source.
It is true that this means that you will only really see any benefit if a high
level of Logistics is researched, but this may be of use in a critical situation.
7.25.8. Boosting HQ Supply

§ Friendly HQs with a supply value of at least 3, will automatically boost
the supply of another friendly HQ that is within supply distribution
range. The friendly HQ receiving the supply boost, will have its supply
value boosted to 5, and this will raise its supply distribution value to a
maximum of 8.
§ Any friendly HQ with a supply level less than 5 can receive this boost.
§ The friendly HQ providing the supply boost, will only boost the supply of
one other low supply HQ and never more than one.
§ The hex of the friendly HQ providing the supply boost will be outlined in
yellow when clicking on the boosted HQ.
§ The engine will seek to make lower rated HQs provide supply for higher
rated ones, rather than vice versa.
§ As HQ units are moved around the map, the engine will also automatically
recalculate HQ supply boosting connections after each turn.
§ By positioning HQ units appropriately in low supply areas, the HQ
supply boosting mechanism can be helpful in extending higher
distribution supply to your units than would otherwise be possible.
7.25.9. HQ Supply During Amphibious Invasions

§ HQ units, after amphibiously unloading, start at 5 supply + their current
Amphibious Warfare level, maintaining supply for up to 5 turns with a
drop of 2 supply points per turn.
§ This allows the HQ to act as a good supply source for an initial landing
until further supply sources are achieved.
Note: HQs that have amphibiously unloaded cannot boost another HQ, nor
receive a boost from another HQ, until they have secured a supply providing
resource greater than their current supply level.
2 163 @
7.26. Naval Supply
Naval supply is handled differently than normal supply for land units. In
general, naval units within range of a Port receive maximum supply, minus
their distance from Port, regardless of Port strength.
Once naval units are out of Port range they will not have their supply values
reduced unless they:
§ Cruise
§ Raid a Convoy route
§ Engage in combat, whether in attack or defense
The exception to this rule are regular Amphibious Transports, as they will
have their supply value reduced by one for each turn at sea, regardless of their
vicinity to a Port. This does not apply to Amphibious Transport (Long Range)
as they act like any other naval unit in this respect.
7.27. Supply and Action Points Table

This table shows the Action Point penalties that all unit types receive, whether
land or naval, if their supply values are low:
UNIT’S SUPPLY VALUE ACTION POINT VALUE
6 - 10 Unit’s Maximum
1-5 Unit’s Maximum minus 1
1 (Land units)
0
50% of Unit’s Maximum (Naval units)
7.28. Supply & Reinforcements Table

Unit strength can only be reduced by combat losses, scripted events such as the
effect of Apache attacks on Union and Confederate units, and naval units may
occasionally suffer from storms at sea.
Land unit’s strength can be replenished through reinforcement, providing
the unit has sufficient supply, and its controlling Major has MPPs available to
cover the cost.
Naval units must be in a friendly Port to be reinforced, and their attainable
strength is based on the Port’s strength value rather than the naval unit’s supply
2 164 @
value. However, it works in the same way as for land units, so for example, a
naval unit in a Port that is at strength 5 can only be reinforced up to strength 8.
Note: Naval units (with the sole exception of Torpedo Boats) can only
receive a maximum of 5 strength points per turn.
If a unit’s strength is already greater than its attainable strength then it
cannot be reinforced.
The following table shows reinforcement potential in accordance with the
above:
UNIT’S SUPPLY VALUE/
ATTAINABLE STRENGTH
PORT STRENGTH
0 Cannot be reinforced
1 4
2 5
3 6
4 7
5 8
6-10 10+
Please refer to the Reinforcing Units section in Chapter 6 for information

regarding the cost of reinforcing a unit, and how to reinforce units during a
game.
7.28.1. Reinforcing Damaged HQs

HQs can only be reinforced to their maximum strength of 10, as they cannot
receive Elite Reinforcements to take them beyond that. The rate at which they
can be reinforced is also dependent on their strength, as shown in the table below:
HQ STRENGTH CAN BE REINFORCED TO:

1 4
2 5
3 6
4 7
5 8
6-9 10
2 165 @
It can therefore take several turns to bring a low strength HQ back up to
full strength.
7.28.2. Low Supply & Attrition Losses

Zero supply units, HQs excluded, automatically lose 1 strength point per turn
if they are at least one hex beyond traceable supply. Land units at zero supply
also have a 50% chance, and at 1 supply a 20% chance, of 1 strength point loss
per adjacent enemy unit, providing they are adjacent to at least 2 enemy front
line units with strength and supply levels of at least 5. If their last strength
point is lost then the unit surrenders.
Additionally:
§ Units at zero supply suffer a unit Morale penalty of 50%, those at 1
supply 25%.
§ The effectiveness of an attack against a unit at zero supply is increased
by 50%.
7.29. Morale and Readiness

At the start of a new game, all units will start with morale equal to their
calculated supply value. For example, a unit that has a supply of 9 will start
with 90% morale.
At the start of each subsequent turn, unit morale is determined by two
things: its supply value, and its current strength compared to its potential
maximum strength.
Newly deployed units start with 50% morale, and this will update at the end
of their first turn in accordance with their situation.
Morale is formulated to drop over time when a unit is cut off or low on
supply, and this will ultimately affect the unit’s readiness. For example, if a
Confederate Corps marches into Maryland and is subsequently completely
cut off from any source of supply, then its morale and readiness will drop.
Conversely, as a unit’s supply situation improves, its morale will rise.
These changes are gradual over time as determined by the following formula:
New Morale = Old Morale x 75% + (Strength x 10 – Old Morale x 75%) x
(Supply/10 x Old Morale/100)
2 166 @
Note: The actual Morale formula includes minor corrections for Strengths
greater than 10 and if the Old Morale value was greater than 100, then it is
capped at 100.
Morale Boosts from Automatic Upgrades (eg. Infantry Tactics) are added in
addition to the formula, but in a way that won’t allow them to accumulate from
turn to turn. Their role is simply to provide a small boost to the actual Morale of
the unit based on its condition and situation.
The formulas will also take into account if the unit has a Maximum Strength
below 10, so that they aren’t penalized for this.
Units will start their turn with at least 10% Morale, regardless of prior turn
reductions below 10%, and all newly deployed units start with a Morale value
of 50%.
7.29.1. Morale Losses Due To Movement

The following actions will trigger Morale Losses within the range specified:
Forced March 50-65%

Rail Movement 15-25%
Unit Swap 15-20%
7.29.2. Unit Attacks Inflicting Morale Losses

Even if they don’t inflict any casualties, many unit types will reduce the
targeted unit’s morale when they attack.
These defender Morale losses are relative to the strength of the attacking
unit. For example, a Cavalry Division at strength 9 would inflict 90% of a 10%
morale loss = a 9% morale loss.
All units that inflict Morale Losses when attacking are listed below:
2 167 @
ATTACKING UNIT TYPE MORALE LOSS INFLICTED ON THE DEFENDER
Infantry with Skirmishers Tech Up to 20%
Rangers 10%
Indians 15%
Cavalry Brigade 5%
Cavalry Division 10%
Cavalry Corps 10%
Partisans 10%
Blockhouse 5%
Field Artillery 15%
Siege Artillery 20%
Railroad Battery 25%
Defenses 10%
Armored Train 5%
Battleship 30%
Cruiser 20%
Ironclad 20%
Monitor 20%
Ship of the Line 15%
Frigate 10%
Gunboat 5%
River Ironclad 10%
River Timberclad 5%
River Gunboat 5%
Submarine 10%
Torpedo Boat 10%
Amphibious Transport 10%
Amphibious Transport (Long
10%
Range)
7.29.3. Unit Readiness and Its Effect  on Combat

Unit strength, supply and morale values all combine to determine a unit’s overall
readiness for combat, and this Readiness value is key to its combat effectiveness.
Readiness for land units is calculated using one of the following two
formulas:
2 168 @
§ If the unit comes under a HQ
§ Readiness = (((Unit Strength + HQ Rating) / 2 + Unit Morale / 10 + HQ
Experience) / 2) * 10
§ If the unit isn’t commanded by a HQ
§ Readiness = ((Unit Strength / 2 + Unit Morale / 10) / 2) * 10
§ As naval units never come under the command of HQs they always use
a special formula of their own:
§ Readiness = (Unit Strength + (Unit Morale / 10)) / 2 * 10
The Importance of HQs

Because the HQ rating has such an important impact on readiness for
land units, purchasing the more expensive but highest rated HQs is highly
recommended, providing you have the funds available to do so.
Also, an HQ’s experience from combat leadership is passed down to all
units under its command as a combat morale bonus. This makes experienced
and highly rated HQs very useful in improving the effectiveness of units under
their command.
The Importance of Fighting Spirit

Majors with reduced Fighting Spirit will suffer a small penalty to their Unit
Morale, while those with Fighting Spirit of higher than 125% will benefit from
a small boost.
§ If Fighting Spirit < 25% then Unit Morale is multiplied by 0.85.
§ If Fighting Spirit > 125% then Unit Morale is multiplied by 1.10.
7.29.4. The Effect of Entrenchment  on Combat

Entrenchment provides attacked units with a chance to suppress combat
losses.
It is therefore best to avoid attacking units with high Entrenchment Values
if other targets are nearby whose destruction will equally assist your plan.
2 169 @
There may be times when bypassing entrenched units is best, cutting them
off from sources of supply and forcing them to either retire or be attacked
when in lower supply.
Each level of Entrenchment is multiplied by a factor of 10 to determine
the percentage chance that a unit will suppress strength losses from combat.
For example, a unit with an entrenchment level of 4 will have a 40% chance of
suppressing a strength loss.
If a strength loss is suppressed, then the targeted unit will suffer a morale
loss of 10% per suppressed loss instead. So a unit that should have lost 2
strength points, would lose 20% of its morale instead.
While Entrenchment is very useful in reducing losses, an accumulation
of morale losses may penalize the unit that receives them for some turns to
come. This is because morale is a stored value that is updated each turn with
its previous turn’s value (including the morale losses suffered) being a major
factor in the next turn’s value. So a unit may survive some early hits but a rapid
decrease in morale without relief may cause the unit to break down that much
quicker in later rounds of combat.
7.29.5. Gaining Entrenchment

Entrenchment Values automatically increase by 1 point every friendly turn
that a land unit stays in the same hex, up to the maximum value depending
on terrain type.
If a unit moves into, or starts a turn within a friendly Fortress or Fortification,
it will immediately entrench up to 1/2 of the maximum entrenchment value for
those prepared positions.
Land units of all Majors, and of fully mobilized Minors can benefit from
Entrenchment. Naval units cannot entrench under any circumstances.
Units belonging to neutral Minors cannot build up their Entrenchment
Values, though campaign designers can provide their units with entrenchment
so that they enter the war with those values.
All Entrenchment Values are lost when a unit moves out of its current hex,
so if playing defensively it is best to position your units a few turns prior to an
expected enemy attack so that they can build up their Entrenchment Values.
2 170 @
A defending unit can only have its Entrenchment Value decreased by direct
attack, and the following table outlines these reductions according to attack type:
DEFENDER’S ENTRENCHMENT LOSS

ATTACKING UNIT
PER ATTACK
Divisions, Corps, Mountain Divisions, Marines,
1
Engineers, Field Artillery, Railroad Batteries
Siege Artillery 1 (+1 if defending unit is in a Resource)
Amphibious Transports (including LR) 0
All Other Units 0
7.29.6. Combat Losses

The primary effect of combat is to reduce unit strength, and the following
formulas illustrate the processes involved in determining the casualties that
will be suffered.
First a Combat Multiplier based on a unit’s Readiness establishes the % of
a unit’s attack or defense capabilities. The Combat Multiplier is calculated as
shown below:
Combat Multiplier = Readiness / 100
The combat formulas that determine a unit’s strength losses are as follows:
Attacker Losses = Defender’s Combat Multiplier * (Defense Type Value +
Defender Experience / 3) - Attacker Multiplier * Attacker Experience / 3
Defender Losses = Attacker Multiplier * (Attack Type Value + Attacker
Experience / 3) - (Defender Multiplier * (Defender Experience / 3 + Defender
Entrenchment + Defense Bonuses))
Note: The Attack and Defense values used depend on the unit types involved
in combat. When units of different target types fight each other, then their
values respective to the enemy unit are used.
For example, if a Cavalry unit attacks an Infantry unit, then the attacker’s
Infantry Attack values apply in determining the defender losses, and the
defending Infantry unit’s Cavalry Defense values apply in the calculation of
the attacker’s losses.
Defense Bonuses are provided by the terrain and resources a defending unit
is occupying, with forests, mountains, cities and fortresses providing the most.
2 171 @
Combat includes an awareness of relative unit upgrades so that it is only
the difference between combat factors that count. For example, two Level-2
Infantry Corps attacking each other will inflict damage on each other similar
to two Level-0 Infantry Corps.
Actual combat losses are a complex calculation based on the following:
§ Unit Type
§ Experience
§ Supply
§ Strength
§ Unit Morale
§ HQ Command Rating
§ HQ Experience
§ Entrenchment Value
§ Terrain Defense Bonus
When calculating some combat losses there are additional considerations and
the above formulas have been adjusted internally to take the following factors
into account:
§ HQs, Balloons and Transports cannot attack.

§ Land units have their attack values halved when they are attacking from
terrain with a negative defense bonus value.
§ Only Cities, Ports and Fortresses can defend against naval
bombardments, other resources will not inflict damage on their naval
attackers.
§ Entrenched units may suppress combat losses and have their morale
reduced instead.
§ Attack values against Transports are increased by 50%.
§ Weather effects may reduce attack values, except that they will not
reduce the 50% bonus for attacking Transports.
§ Elite unit strength is not included when calculating readiness for
Transports.
2 172 @
7.29.7. Variability in the Combat Results
In addition to each of the factors described above, there is a possible +/-1
point variation in each combat that provides some randomness to the combat
calculations.
This variation is small enough to produce reasonable and expected variety
from game to game, but not significant enough to produce extreme results.
Exceptions: There are two occasions when this variable won’t apply:
§ If any units engaged in combat are at zero supply.

§ If the calculated defender losses would have been greater than their
remaining strength.
You aren’t expected to memorize all of the formulas surrounding combat, but
it helps to have a broad understanding of how all of the various factors are used
in the calculations. This intuitive “feel for the game” will enable you to make
sound decisions as you play.
The casualty predictions that are displayed above the units as well as in the
Information Panel prior to resolving combats are a fairly accurate estimate
when the Fog of War game option is turned off, apart from the +/-1 point
variation.
However, if Fog of War is being used then some hidden enemy factors
such as HQ command rating and combat morale bonus are ignored in the
calculated estimates, and so the experienced player should expect slightly
different results.
7.30. Supply Values

7.30.1. Land Units
CONNECTED TO A FRIENDLY MAJOR’S CAPITAL OR INDUSTRIAL/PRIMARY SUPPLY CENTER
Unit Location Unit’s Supply Value
≤ 10 Action Points to HQ HQ Supply minus Shortest Distance
≤ 10 Action Points to Friendly/Occupied
Resource Strength minus Shortest Distance
Resource (12 if Major City or Port)
> 10 Action Points to HQ 0
> 10 Action Points to Friendly/Occupied
0
Resource (12 if Major City or Port)
2 173 @
CUT OFF FROM A FRIENDLY MAJOR
Cut off from HQ but connected to a Friendly/
Resource Strength minus Shortest Distance
Occupied Resource
Cut off from any valid City/Port but not from a
HQ Supply minus Shortest Distance
friendly HQ
Cut off from any HQ and any valid Resource 0 (3 if Partisans or Rangers)
Note: If either an HQ or a friendly/occupied resource can supply a unit then

the greatest of the above values will be taken for a unit’s supply.
7.30.2. Naval Units

IN RANGE OF A FRIENDLY/OCCUPIED PORT
10 minus Shortest Distance (12 if Major
≤ [Port Strength] Action Points to valid Port
Port)
> [Port Strength] Action Points to valid Port 0
8. UNIT TYPES
8.1. Land Units
Making the most effective use of your land forces can make all the difference
between victory and defeat, as they are vital for holding and capturing territory
and resources.
Knowing their attributes is important, so this chapter is a guide to the
various land units in the game.
8.1.1. Target Types

All Land Units are divided into six Target Types:
§ Soft – HQ, Rangers, Engineers, Partisans

§ Infantry – Regiments, Brigades, Divisions, Corps, Mountain Divisions,
Marines
§ Cavalry – Indians, Cavalry Brigades, Cavalry Divisions, Cavalry Corps
2 174 @
§ Artillery – Field and Siege Artillery, Railroad Batteries
§ Fort – Blockhouses, Defenses
§ Armored Train – Armored Trains
8.1.2. Default Maximum Strength

In the section that follows, Default Maximum Strength refers to maximum
potential strength unless the unit has sufficient experience to receive Elite
Reinforcements. All units described below have a default maximum of 10
unless stated otherwise.
8.1.3. Headquarters
An HQ is a strategic unit that provides leadership and logistical support
to subordinate units. In real life it could employ thousands in largely
administrative roles providing essential support to the soldiers in the front line.
Although HQs are administrative in nature and cannot attack, they
provide supply to units in their vicinity, even to those not directly under their
command.
Normally, up to 5 land units within a range of 3 hexes may be attached to an
HQ, although this may be increased with Field Telegraph research.
Historical commanders are available to most nations, and they all have
a preset base Command Rating. The higher this Command Rating, all other
things being equal, the better the units under their command will fight. In
game terms, this is because higher ratings equate to higher readiness values
for the units under their command.
Example Base HQ Command Ratings:
§ Sherman 7
§ Lee 7
§ Grant 6
§ Johnston J 5
§ McClellan 3
2 175 @
HQs not only increase the readiness of units under their command, they also
provide a combat morale bonus.
This bonus can increase over time if their subordinate units perform well in
action, as any unit that performs well when attached to an HQ will increase that
HQ’s command experience. This will in turn increase the combat morale bonus
that the HQ provides to all units under its command. So success breeds success!
However, it works in reverse too, so if units attached to an HQ are defeated
then that HQ’s command experience is reduced, and this will in turn reduce
the combat morale bonuses for all units under its command.
8.1.4. Regiment
The Regiment is the smallest unit represented in the game, typically made up
of less than 1000 men. These units can prevent an enemy unit from simply
occupying a position without contest, but they are unlikely to withstand a
strong attack. Regiments have a default maximum strength of 5. In the default
1861 Blue and Gray campaign, these units are only seen representing some
small garrisons on the Great Plains at the beginning of the war, and cannot
be purchased.
8.1.5. Brigade
Comprising around 2,500-3,000 soldiers, the Brigade is the smallest unit
suitable for frontline service. At the beginning of the game, both sides will
receive a large number of brigades that will form the bulk of your army for
the first year of the war, until more powerful Divisions and eventually Corps
take the field. The Brigade’s modest strength and low cost make it ideal for
garrisoning important locations away from the frontline.
8.1.6. Division/Mountain Division

Made up of 6,000-10,000 men, the Division is a moderately powerful unit
suitable for all roles on the battlefield. Divisions are available to purchase
from the start of the game, and receive twice the benefit from technological
advancement as Brigades, making them the most important part of your army
in the first two years of the war.
2 176 @
Tip! Mountain Divisions benefit from +1 Attack and Defense bonuses when
fighting from or attacking into Mountain and Hill hexes.
8.1.7. Corps
Consisting of anywhere between two and seven divisions, and typically
more than 15,000 men, the Corps is the most powerful unit on the Civil War
battlefield. Corps are not available for purchase until the first level of Corps
Organization technology is researched, with each level allowing the purchase
of four Corps. The benefits of technological advancement are increased for
Corps relative to Divisions, and by the third year of the war the Corps will be
the most important unit in your army.
8.1.8. Rangers
Rangers were small semi-regular cavalry formations often used as scouts
and to attack enemy targets behind the front lines, such as supply trains. The
most famous example of these is Mosby’s Rangers, a Confederate unit active in
northern Virginia, although similar units were also seen on the Union side as well.
Rangers, like Partisans, have a minimum supply value of 3, and have a 25%
chance to evade damage from combat, making them ideal for raiding behind
enemy lines. Unlike other infantry units, Rangers also can spot land units two
hexes away.
8.1.9. Marines
Marines played a vital part in the enforcement of the Union blockade,
being used to capture a number of offshore islands along the coasts of the
Carolinas and Georgia, as well as the occupation of New Orleans and southern
Mississippi River in the summer of 1862. In the game, Marines are considered
to be a division-strength unit with combat bonuses when fighting Forts and
Warships.
Marines have the unique ability of being able to embark on Amphibious
Transports from any Coastal hex. This makes them very useful for raiding
purposes, as they may be able to evacuate via sea if the landing fails to capture
a Port.
2 177 @
The supply value of Marine units that have amphibiously unloaded will
only drop by 2 points per turn in the absence of a separate source of supply,
meaning that they will have some supply for a maximum of 5 turns.
8.1.10. Engineers
These are effectively Construction Engineers as Combat Engineers are
presumed to be an integral part of the other combat units in the game.
Engineers can be used to build Fortifications (such as the great defensive
works of Petersburg) to help strengthen defenses against enemy land
attacks and amphibious operations, and they can be very useful in providing
strongpoints which the enemy may struggle to capture if properly defended.
Building Fortifications is covered in more detail in the Advanced Gameplay
chapter.
8.1.11. Indians
Native Americans (or ‘Indians’, in the terminology of the era) served in large
numbers on both sides of the Civil War, most commonly as mounted forces
west of the Mississippi, although some also served in the Eastern Theater. The
Indian unit, which can be purchased by Indian tribes (though not by the Union
or Confederacy), is similar in strength and abilities to the Cavalry Brigade, but
has a higher Demoralization value, making it ideal for the mobile warfare seen
on the open plains of the West.
Note: In recent decades, there has been considerable controversy
surrounding the terminology used to describe the native peoples of the
United States. While we have endeavored to use the names of individual
tribes wherever possible, it is occasionally necessary to refer to multiple tribes
collectively. As no single term has received near-universal approval from native
peoples, we have chosen to use the word ‘Indian’ in such settings, as the most
historically appropriate alternative. While we recognize that this term arose
from a historical error, and at times may have acquired negative connotations
during the centuries of conflict between the native peoples and settlers, it was
the term most commonly used in the 19th century, and, as ‘American Indian’,
remains the term of choice in the United States Census to this day. We have
2 178 @
no desire to offend anyone, and our decisions on this matter have been guided
solely by what will make American Civil War an enjoyable and historically
accurate game for everyone.
8.1.12. Cavalry Units

During the Civil War, Cavalry played a vital role in both the Union and
Confederate armies, serving as long-range scouts, raiding enemy territory and
occasionally conducting Napoleonic-style charges on the battlefield. Three
types of Cavalry units are represented in the game: Cavalry Brigades, Cavalry
Divisions and Cavalry Corps, each one more powerful than the last. Note that
Cavalry Corps are not used in the default campaigns, but may be used if you
wish to design your own campaign.
Tip! Cavalry units can spot up to 3 hexes whereas other units can generally
only spot 1, making them an essential component of armies wishing to conduct
offensive action without being ambushed by the enemy.
8.1.13. Partisans
Partisans can help pin down enemy units, reduce the supply-level of resources,
and disrupt military production in their areas of operation. In certain
contested areas, this activity might develop into full-scale uprisings, as was
considered by the Confederate leadership towards the end of the war.
Most partisan activity can be prevented by keeping units in or adjacent to
their spawning hexes, and these can be seen by pressing ‘P’ on your keyboard.
Smaller partisan actions will simply damage resources, with no actual units
being deployed on the map.
Partisan uprisings of significant strength will deploy units on the map,
and these can capture resources and interdict supply lines causing immense
trouble to their occupiers.
When pressing ‘P’, Partisan locations that can spawn a unit show a
Partisan, whereas those that will only damage resources show a Partisan with
a line drawn through it.
Partisans have a default maximum strength of 8, a minimum supply value
of 3, and they are restricted to rail movement within their home country.
2 179 @
8.1.14. Field Artillery
Field Artillery units represent concentrations of small cannons, such as the
12-pounder bronze ‘Napoleon’, deployed at key points to either bolster the
defense or support an attack. Field Artillery units can be useful in lowering
enemy entrenchment values and demoralizing the target.
Artillery units also have an automatic ability whereby, providing they have
shells remaining, they will provide Defensive Fire to shell any enemy units
attacking friendly units within range.
Artillery can also fire blindly, targeting enemy held hexes and potentially
damaging hidden units in them. These attacks will not disclose the presence
of hidden units.
Note that Field Artillery units are not used in the default 1861 Blue and Gray
campaign.
8.1.15. Siege Artillery

Siege Artillery units represent concentrations of larger and more powerful
mortars, such as the Parrott rifles used at Charleston and Petersburg.
Compared to Field Artillery, Siege Artillery is less effective at reducing enemy
unit strength directly but has greater ability to reduce their entrenchment
and demoralize their target. Siege Artillery is also particularly effective at
targeting units in cities and fortifications, as it inflicts an additional +1 de-
entrenchment when targeting units in Resources.
Like Field Artillery, Siege Artillery also has the Defensive Fire ability,
although this will only target enemy artillery units. Siege Artillery can also
“fire blindly”.
8.1.16. Railroad Battery

The forerunner of the great Rail Guns of the 20th century, the Railroad Battery
consists of a very large mortar mounted on a railcar. The most famous of these
is the 13-inch Coehorn mortar used in the Siege of Petersburg, where it earned
the nickname Dictator for its accurate long-range fire.
Railroad Batteries, like Siege Artillery, are primarily useful in de-
entrenching and demoralizing heavily fortified units. They can only fire
2 180 @
before moving and naturally their movement is restricted to friendly railway
lines. They will have 1 shell per turn that can be fired, and note that they do not
provide Defensive Fire to friendly units under attack, so it is best to fire that
shell during your turn.
8.1.17. Forts
Forts are static defensive units that can shell enemy forces, accumulating shells
in the same way that Artillery does. Forts will fire on Amphibious Transports
that halt in an adjacent hex, even if only temporarily prior to landing, and this
feature means that they will have to be a prime target for destruction before an
amphibious invasion can expect to succeed.
Forts cannot Rail Move or Swap as they have a default setting of zero Action
Points.
Two types of Fort units are included in the game: Blockhouses and the more
powerful Defenses. Note that only Defenses are used in the default campaigns.
As the location of all pre-war forts were known by both sides in the Civil
War, these units are exempt from normal Fog of War rules and their location
can be seen by both sides at all times, although their exact combat strength
(as well as stats such as Readiness) will remain hidden unless you have a unit
adjacent to their position.
Forts are limited to a maximum strength of 5.
8.1.18. Armored Train

A relatively new weapon in the Civil War, Armored Trains equipped with riflemen
and artillery are fast-moving units ideal for anti-partisan duties or performing
limited reconnaissance. As the name implies, their movement is restricted to
friendly railway lines. Armored Trains are limited to a maximum strength of 5.
8.1.19. Balloons
Lighter-than-air flight technology was in its infancy during the 1860s, with the
Union Army experimenting with hydrogen-filled Balloons early in the war.
When moving, Balloon units behave like all other ground units, moving
more quickly on roads and being slowed by difficult terrain or enemy zones of
2 181 @
control. Balloons have a large spotting radius, but unlike other units, they can
only benefit from this during clear weather. They cannot attack enemy units
and will likely be destroyed if attacked themselves. Balloons are limited to a
maximum strength of 5.
Balloons become available for purchase once the first level of Experimental
Balloons technology has been researched, and subsequent levels will increase
their spotting radius and movement range.
8.2. Naval Units

Naval units represent several combat and support vessels clustered around a
named capital ship. They can be used to help control or threaten vital sea-lanes
and Convoy routes, and they can also carry out shore bombardments.
8.2.1. Resisting Amphibious Invasions

All naval units except Submarines can also be used to direct automatic
Defensive Fire against Amphibious Transports that end their move adjacent
to one of these ships. By placing these naval units in key areas they can help to
frustrate your opponent’s amphibious landings.
8.2.2. Raiding Ports

Naval units can reduce the effectiveness of enemy Ports and other coastal
resources by raiding in selected locations on the map. They will not gain
experience from doing so, but nor will they lose supply in doing so. These areas
are shown like this on the map:
Another use of naval units is to raid enemy Convoy
routes, a task Gunboats in particular excel at. To raid
a convoy route, right click on the unit and select Select
Convoy Mode  Raider, so that they display a Blue button
next to the strength counter, and then move them to be
either on or directly adjacent to an enemy convoy route.
2 182 @
8.2.3. Battleships
The pre-Dreadnought Battleships of the 1890s are the most powerful warships
represented in the game. Their large size prevents them from entering Rivers,
but they will outgun any opponent they meet on the high seas. Battleships
cannot be purchased in the default Civil War-era campaigns, such as 1861 Blue
and Gray.
8.2.4. Cruisers
Steel-hulled Protected and Armored Cruisers were fast and powerful warships
whose design emerged in the early 1880s. Like Battleships, they cannot enter
Rivers. These units will not appear in the default Civil War campaigns, but are
available for use if you wish to design your own campaigns.
8.2.5. Ironclads
Steam-powered armored Ironclads first appeared with the launching of the
French Gloire in 1859, and soon emerged as the most powerful warships of the
Civil War era, with their heavier guns making them ideal for destroying coastal
Monitors. Ironclads cannot enter Rivers but can freely sail both coastal waters
and open Ocean. In the default campaigns, they become available for purchase
at the end of 1861.
Note: A distinction should be noted between the Ironclad unit type and the
Ironclad class of units, which also includes Battleships, Cruisers, Monitors and
River Ironclads. Where the meaning is not obvious, the game’s documentation
will use the capitalized Ironclad to refer to the unit, and the lower-case ironclad
to refer to the class of units.
8.2.6. Monitors
Made famous by the 1862 battle between Monitor and Virginia (or Merrimack),
the Monitor (alternatively known as a casemate ironclad) is the first ironclad
warship available for purchase. Their large guns and iron armor make them
virtually immune to attack by older wooden warships, although they are limited
to Coastal waters only and are relatively slow. Even with these limitations,
they represent a cost-effective way to defend and control the coastline.
2 183 @
Note: Due to the severe shortage of iron production in the Confederacy,
Confederate Monitors cannot be purchased until October 1861.
8.2.7. Ships of the Line

Wooden-hulled Ships of the Line, carrying anywhere from 50 to over 100 guns,
were the most powerful warships afloat until the invention of the ironclad.
Though most famous for being powered by sail, a number of ships of the
line were converted to steam power in the 1840s and 50s. These obsolescent
ships remain available for purchase by the Union and Confederate navies,
and are the strongest warships permitted to sail on the open Ocean until the
appearance of the Ironclad.
8.2.8. Frigates
Like the larger ships of the line, wooden sail- and steam-powered Frigates
became obsolescent as the Civil War progressed. These fast-moving vessels
can travel in both coastal and deep Ocean waters, although not Rivers, and the
large numbers of them available to the Union early in the game make them
suitable for enforcing the Blockade of the South until more powerful warships
can be constructed.
8.2.9. Gunboats
Small screw-driven gunboats and paddle steamers were built in large numbers
by both the Union and Confederate navies. They are restricted to coastal
waters, but may also enter rivers. Gunboats are particularly effective in
providing shore bombardment, and are second-to-none for convoy raiding,
although their small size means they will be outmatched by any larger
warships. Gunboats are limited to a maximum strength of 5.
Note: Gunboats, unlike other warships, do not attack resources such as
Towns or Ports, and will instead only target the unit in a hex when attacking.
8.2.10. River Ships

During the Civil War, both sides built a variety of small craft designed for
service on rivers, particularly the Mississippi, Tennessee and Cumberland.
2 184 @
These ships are included in the game as River Ironclads, River Timberclads
and River Gunboats.
River ships, as the name implies, are limited to traveling along Rivers, and
cannot move into either coastal or ocean waters. All River Ships are limited to
a maximum strength of 5.
Note: All river ships will ignore resources such as Towns or Ports, and will
instead only target the unit in a hex when attacking.
8.2.11. Submarines
Submarines in the 1860s were still experimental weapons, built in small
numbers and causing very limited damage in the Civil War. Most submarines
of this era were powered by hand, rendering them slow and unable to move
outside of coastal waters. Note that the best use of Submarines in combat
is to lurk and ambush enemy vessels. If however a Submarine moves before
attacking then the vessel it attacks will have its losses reduced by 50%, and the
attacking Submarine will have its losses doubled.
Owing to their experimental nature, Submarines will require substantial
research investments if they are to be used as effective weapons of war. Level 1 of
Experimental Submarines is required before a Submarine can be purchased, while
subsequent levels will improve their combat stats. The Buoyancy Tanks upgrade
also grants the ability of a Submarine to dive and avoid combat when attacked.
Unlike other ships, Submarines are unable to use the Naval Cruise function.
Submarines are limited to a maximum strength of 5.
In the default campaigns, Submarines cannot raid enemy convoy routes,
although this may be changed in custom campaigns.
8.2.12. Torpedo Boats

Torpedo Boats are small, fast warships that became prominent in the 1890s.
Though outmatched by the firepower offered by a Battleship or Cruiser, they can
be useful for escorting Transports, or for attacking weak naval targets such as
enemy Transports, as well as enemy warships in port. Torpedo Boats can enter
coastal and ocean hexes, but not rivers. Torpedo Boats are not present in the
default 1861 Blue and Gray campaign but are available for use in custom campaigns.
2 185 @
8.2.13. Transports
Transports are used to move land units across the sea. Transports can only
load or unload units at a friendly-controlled Port, and can then be moved just
like other naval units. Transports can move land units over all types of sea
hexes, including Rivers.
In terms of combat, Transports are quite weak since they cannot attack
and their defense is poor. They do have a 10% chance of evading damage if
attacked, but even so, providing them with a naval escort is recommended.
Note: Each country can only put a limited number of units in Transports
at any one time. This limit will increase through researching Logistics, as Build
Limits will increase by 2 per level for Majors (Minors in the default campaigns
cannot use transports). Logistics also decreases the cost of putting units in
Transports by 10%.
8.2.14. Amphibious Transports

Amphibious Transports are used to conduct invasions against enemy
controlled shores.
Unlike regular Transports, Amphibious Transports can be used to unload
units directly onto Coastal hexes, either friendly or enemy controlled.
Amphibious Transports may also unload units at a friendly controlled Port.
To help soften up the target before a landing is made, Amphibious
Transports can themselves attack an enemy unit, before the unit they are
carrying lands. Be aware that the Amphibious Transport and consequently the
unit it is carrying can suffer casualties when doing so. Even so, this can be
useful if attacking defended islands or coastlines, and the unit itself can also
attack once it has been unloaded from the Amphibious Transport.
8.2.15. Amphibious Transports  (Long Range)

These act exactly the same as Amphibious Transports, except that they don’t
lose supply every turn. Their benefits from Amphibious Warfare research are the
same as for Amphibious Transports, except that they do not gain any increases
in their Action Points.
2 186 @
They can Cruise and are really useful for launching invasions far from their
starting point, but as they are 25% more expensive than regular Amphibious
Transports their use should be carefully considered before embarking the
troops.
8.2.16. Using Transports and Amphibious Transports

Right clicking on a unit which is immediately adjacent to a friendly Port
will provide the option to place it in a Transport or Amphibious Transport,
providing it hasn’t yet moved or attacked, and you have sufficient MPPs
available.
Marines are a unique unit type in that they don’t need to be adjacent to a
Port in order to embark in an Amphibious Transport.
Note: Researching Amphibious Warfare will increase both the Action
Points and the number of units allowed to be amphibiously transported
simultaneously, for both types of Amphibious Transport.
9. RESEARCH
9.1. Introduction
Getting the best out of your armed forces and economy requires investing a
significant proportion of your income into Research.
All Majors can conduct research to improve their income and the fighting
qualities of their armed forces. Minors can benefit from the research
undertaken by their controlling Majors, but they cannot themselves invest in
research.
Each technology area has a maximum potential achievement level of 5,
though the actual limits per category do vary.
In other campaigns the limits may be different, in accordance with the
settings chosen by their designer.
The limits can be seen in the Research screen, as the maximum level that
can be researched is shown in brackets at the end of each category’s entry:
2 187 @
Although this functionality is not used in American Civil War, modders can
set the actual maximum level for upgrades to also vary according to unit type.
For instance, one may wish to limit Brigades to level 1 Infantry Equipment, while
other units can reach level 2.
The number of research chits that can be allocated at any one time into a
specific research category will vary, as the investment limits can vary from 1-5
chits per category. In all default campaigns, this limit has been set at 2 chits
for all techs.
Each Major has its own investment limit, in MPPs. This prevents anyone
from investing far more in research than was historically possible, and it also
means that those countries capable of rapid progress are more likely to do so.
2 188 @
For example, the Union can invest more in research than the Confederacy, and
the Confederacy can in turn invest more than Mexico. In the flagship 1861 Blue
and Gray campaign, the European powers cannot invest in research, their long-
standing professional armies and military tradition meaning that they begin
the game with all technologies already researched.
9.1.1. In Brief: The Research Mechanism

§ For every chit invested, progress will be made at the end of that side’s
turn towards reaching the next level of research.
§ Per turn increments to achieve the next level in a technology field
average 4% per turn, in reality between 2-6% per chit.
§ Research automatically succeeds in gaining the next level on reaching
100% progress, though there is a small chance of a breakthrough
speeding up your progress by an extra 15-25%.
§ The chance of a breakthrough is 5% per turn per chit invested.
§ The Research Sharing feature and researching Spying & Intelligence can
both speed up your research progress.
§ Research chits can be recouped at 50% of their original cost.
§ Costs rise with unit upgrades, generally by 10% per level of upgrade,
though some like Skirmishers only cost 5% and others like Infantry Scouts
cost 20%.
9.2. In Depth: The Research Mechanism

Now let’s look at this mechanism in more detail.
9.2.1. Progression every Turn

At the end of each turn, each invested chit will advance your progress by a %
towards the next level of research.
To achieve level 1 in a research category, the base % progress per chit per
turn is 4% per turn.
The actual per turn increment will vary from 50% less to 50% more than the
% above, with fractions being rounded down.
So, as an example, if you have 1 chit at 4% then you will have a 2-6%
increment towards 100% per turn.
2 189 @
The more chits invested in a particular technology area, the faster you will
progress towards the next level. So, if you have 2 chits if researching level 1
then you will have a 4-12% increment towards 100% per turn.
Each chit makes progress every turn from 0-100%, and once you reach 100%
you will automatically achieve the next level in that category.
9.2.2. Research Breakthroughs

There is a chance every turn of achieving a Research Breakthrough that will
speed your progress by an extra 15-25% that turn.
The chance of a breakthrough is based on the number of chits invested
multiplied by the % chance of progressing per turn.
For example: 1 chit @ 5% gives you a 5% chance every turn that you might
achieve a Research Breakthrough.
While there is some uncertainty about when your research will be
successful, it will definitely occur once research has progressed to 100%. The
mechanism is designed to give a blend of uncertainty and certainty, with no
immediate success on investing the chit, but with ultimate success guaranteed
after a period of time.
When a Breakthrough occurs, you will see a message at the end of your turn
like these:
§ War Department Reports Advances In <research_name> Development
§ Espionage Advances <research_name> Development
9.2.3. Catch Up Bonus

The research formula also has an adjustment that takes into account real life
situations that occur in every war, such as studying captured enemy equipment
and the results of spying and espionage.
Therefore, if a fully mobilized enemy Major has achieved a higher level than
you in something you are researching, then a bonus will be applied to your
progress every turn of 1% per difference in level. This bonus might be further
modified by Research Sharing and Spying & Intelligence as described below.
2 190 @
9.2.4. Spying & Intelligence
Each new level of Spying & Intelligence increases your own research by 1% per
turn. However, this can be impacted if your opponent is also researching and
achieving Spying & Intelligence levels of its own.
The impact can either be to decrease or to negate your research bonus
entirely. Though note that only the intelligence levels of fully mobilized enemy
Majors are taken into account.
For example, if the enemy’s intelligence level is higher than yours, then it
will negate your own Spying & Intelligence. But if your intelligence level is higher
than your enemy’s, your Spying & Intelligence bonus will be the difference
between the two levels.
For example, if the Union has intelligence Level-1 and the Confederacy has
intelligence Level-2, then the Confederacy’s research bonus will only be the
difference of 1. The Union will receive no bonus in their own research as the
Confederacy has a higher level.
If both you and your enemy’s highest Spying & Intelligence levels are the
same, then they simply cancel each other out until one or the other achieve a
new higher level. Essentially Spying & Intelligence helps you if you are ahead of
your opponent but not if you have the same or a lower level in it.
9.2.5. Examples
Our first example represents the research formula using just the Catch up
Bonus.
§ We have just one chit in Leadership at Level 1 (where the normalized
research formula means you have an average 4% progression per turn)
and the enemy currently has Level 3, so the result will be:
§ Base Chance + (highest enemy level - current level) x research chits invested
§ 5 + (3 - 1) x 1 chit = an average 7% progression per turn
§ If we also assume that we have 2 more levels of Spying & Intelligence than
our enemy does, the formula becomes the following:
§ Base Chance + (highest enemy level - current level) + Spying & Intelligence
modifier) x research chits invested
§ 5 + (3 -1) + 2 x 1 chit = an average 9% progression per turn.
2 191 @
If 2 chits were invested then progression would average out at an impressive
18% a turn!
9.3. Viewing Progress

To view your current research progress, hover your mouse over the relevant
research field and the exact advancement % towards the next level will be
shown. Fields that cannot be researched, either because they have been
disabled for that campaign or because the maximum level has already been
reached, will be shown in red.
The green bars show your progress at a glance:
2 192 @
9.4. Progressing to the Next Level
Research will advance a level once your progression reaches 100%.
While progression varies per turn, the chance of a breakthrough does not,
as it is set to be the % for the relevant level, per turn per chit invested.
If you are ahead in Spying & Intelligence research then the chance of a
breakthrough will be 1% higher per level that you are ahead.
So if you have 1 chit invested to research a level 1 technology at 4% a turn,
then progression will be 2-6% per turn if no other Major has yet researched that
level. If we leave aside Spying & Intelligence research for the moment, then the
chance of a breakthrough to speed up your research will be 5% a turn.
Once you attain the next research level, 1 invested chit is consumed by
default and cannot be reinvested or redeemed.
9.5. Research Limits

While chits may vary in cost, the total maximum invested in Research cannot
exceed the allowable MPP limit per Major.
If you change your mind about your investments, an invested chit may be
redeemed at 50% of its original MPP cost. But in doing so you will lose any
progress made.
If your research progresses to the highest possible level in a particular field,
and you had more than 1 chit invested, your surplus chits will automatically be
redeemed for MPPs at the end of your turn.
Some modded campaigns might not follow the rule that consumes chits
when research advances are made. If that were the case then the chits would
remain invested in the given technology after you have successfully progressed
to the next level.
9.6. Research Categories

The following section explains the benefits of each level of upgrade, firstly
for Manual Upgrades, then for Automatic Upgrades. Manual Upgrades are
effectively improvements in equipment and training, while Automatic Upgrades
encompass a broader spectrum including improvements in communication,
doctrine, military intelligence and social and economic mobilization for war.
2 193 @
9.7. Applying Manual Upgrades
To benefit from your research success in the Manual Upgrades category, you
will need to apply the upgrades to individual units. To do this, right click on a
unit and select Upgrade.
You can upgrade some or all of the potential upgrades available, providing
the unit:
§ Hasn’t carried out any actions this turn

§ Is at a supply level of at least 5
§ Isn’t adjacent to the enemy
§ You have sufficient MPPs to cover the cost
Research levels greater than zero will be indicated on

upgraded units with a small number on the bottom right
of their counter as shown left:
9.8. Manual Upgrades

Note: With the following categories, specific upgrade limits can vary according
to unit type.
9.8.1. Infantry Equipment

This research field covers a broad spectrum of improvements in infantry
equipment, including the development of rifled muskets and their
ammunition, standardization of equipment and even small field artillery
pieces, that together enhance the fighting power of infantry units.
Each new level increases the Attack and Defense values for all Infantry
units except Engineers against all other land units, a bonus that scales with
unit size to represent the greater importance of standardized weaponry to
large units: Regiments, Brigades and Rangers receive +0.5 per level, Divisions,
Marines and Mountain Divisions +1, and Corps +2.
Tip! All Majors are advised to research this category as infantry are the main
force in every army and improving their quality will be essential for success.
Production and Reinforcement cost increase per level: 10%.
2 194 @
9.8.2. Skirmishers
Skirmishers are small units of sharpshooters and other light infantry trained
to form a thin line in front of the main body of an army, and harass the enemy
with fire at the beginning of a battle. Many such formations became skilled at
shooting enemy officers, making them a particularly feared, if rarely decisive,
part of the Civil War infantry.
Each new level increases the Demoralization value of all infantry except
Engineers. Regiments and Brigades receive a 5% bonus per level, while other
units receive 10%.
9.8.3. Scouts
Civil War armies relied on the cavalry in order to locate enemy armies and allow
commanders to prevent their forces from being forced into an unfavorable
engagement. While most mounted formations take the form of specialized
cavalry units, the Scouts upgrade allows infantry units to be equipped with a
small cavalry detachment for the purposes of reconnaissance.
Infantry units (except Regiments and Engineers) with the Scouts upgrade
have their Land Spotting radius increased by 1 hex.
9.8.4. Cavalry Equipment

New innovations, particularly the breech-loading carbine and Spencer’s
repeating rifle, represented significant advances in weaponry carried by
cavalry in the Civil War.
Each new level increases the Attack and Defense values for all Cavalry units
against all other land units, a bonus that scales with unit size to represent
the greater importance of standardized weaponry to large units: Cavalry
Brigades and Indians receive +0.5 per level, Cavalry Divisions and Cavalry
Corps receive +1.
2 195 @
9.8.5. Field Artillery
Recent advances in metallurgy allowed combatants in the Civil War to benefit
from large-scale production of rifled cannon, giving field artillery units a
significant advantage in range and accuracy over their smoothbore-equipped
predecessors.
Each new level of Field Artillery research increases the Land Attack of Field
Artillery units by 1 per level, their De-entrenchment value by 0.5 per level, and
their Demoralization value by 5% per level.
Note: This technology is not used in the default 1861 Blue and Gray campaign,
but remains available for use in custom campaigns.
9.8.6. Heavy Mortars

In order to subdue large Confederate defensive works such as those at
Vicksburg and Petersburg, the Union developed a series of very large mortars
and other “siege” artillery pieces.
Each new level of Heavy Mortars increases the Fort Attack values of Siege
Artillery and Railroad Batteries by 1 per level, their De-entrenchment value by
0.5 per level, and their Demoralization value by 5% per level.
9.8.7. Mobility
“Horse artillery”, or light artillery pieces towed by groups of horses and handled
by crew trained to rapidly position, fire and move their guns, was used to great
effect in the French Revolutionary Wars, and was a decisive part of Zachary
Taylor’s success in the Mexican War, with his forces gaining the nickname
“flying artillery”.
Mobility is a technological upgrade that represents all of the technological
and logistical innovations required to allow the quick deployment and
movement of artillery.
Each new level increases the Action Points of Field and Siege Artillery by 1.
2 196 @
9.8.8. Buoyancy Tanks
Buoyancy Tanks, or ballast tanks, are compartments within submarines that
can be filled with water to control the depth of the submarine. The Confederate
submarine H. L. Hunley had two buoyancy tanks that were controlled by valves
and hand-pumps, making it one of the first submarines in the world capable of
quickly diving and resurfacing.
This technology grants Submarines the ability to Dive when attacked,
something they will have a 25% chance of doing.
Tip! Submarines cannot be built until Level 1 of Experimental Submarines is
researched. Make sure to invest in the experiments first!
9.8.9. Naval Weapons

The arrival of armored iron warships necessitated the development of more
powerful naval artillery capable of damaging them, most notably the eleven-
inch Dahlgren guns carried by the Monitor and a variety of other warships.
Each level of Naval Weapons increases the Attack values of all warships
except Submarines, against Forts, Ironclads (of all types), Wooden Ships and
Transports, with these increases per level being larger for larger ships. This
technology also increases the Attack values of Gunboats against all types of
land units, by 0.5 per level. It also increases the Demoralization stat of all
warships except Submarines by 5% per level.
9.8.10. Ironclads
Perhaps no category of weapon was more profoundly affected by the Civil
War than the warship. The first ironclads - the British Warrior and the French
Gloire - were launched only a year before the outbreak of the war, and it was
only one year later that the confrontation between Monitor and Virginia proved
the wooden navies of the world obsolete. Monitor itself would be outclassed
before the end of the war, as more advanced ironclads took to the seas and
filled the place once occupied by Ships of the Line in the world’s navies, as the
first “battleships”.
2 197 @
This technology can be used to upgrade Ironclad-type ships’ Defense values
against all naval units, by 2 per level for Battleships, Cruisers and Ironclads,
and 1 per level for Monitors, Torpedo Boats and River Ironclads.
9.8.11. Naval Engines

Paddle wheels and steam engines were among the first innovations enabling
warships to move faster than the speeds that could be reached by sailing alone.
Frigates and Ships of the Line were fitted with steam engines as early as the
1840s, and while few ocean-going ships were built entirely without a rigging
system until the decades after the Civil War, it was clear that steam, not wind,
would power the warships of the future.
Each level of Naval Engines increases the Action Points of warships, except
submarines, by 2.
9.8.12. Armored Trains

Armored trains were a brand new and still largely experimental innovation at
the beginning of the Civil War, usually consisting of an ad hoc assemblage of
wooden or iron armor to protect a group of riflemen or a small artillery piece.
Although they had not yet matured into the purpose-built behemoths that
would gain fame in the Russian Civil War, they nonetheless proved effective at
protecting vital railroads from enemy partisan bands.
Each new level of Armored Trains increases the Defense values of Armored
Trains by 1 against all land units, and their Action Points by 2.
9.8.13. Fort Modernization

Many of the coastal forts that defended both the Union and Confederacy had
been built decades before the Civil War, and were thus poorly equipped to
defend against the latest generations of artillery weapons. This technology
represents the various improvements made to forts throughout the war,
including the creation of earthworks to defend them and the deployment of
more modern artillery pieces.
2 198 @
Fort Modernization increases the Defense values against all land and naval
units for Blockhouses by 1 per level and for Defenses by 1.5 per level. Defenses
also receive 1.5 Ironclad Attack per level.
Tip! The large number of Confederate forts make this a particularly wise
investment for the Confederacy.
9.8.14. Lighthouses
Unlike other upgrades, Lighthouses are a technology that have been used by the
world’s leading powers for centuries, and no research is required in order to
upgrade Ports with them. The Lighthouse technology does not represent the
construction of the lighthouse towers themselves, but rather their integration
into the broader defensive system, including via the telegraph.
Ports upgraded with Lighthouses have their Naval Spotting range increased
by 2.
Increasing the levels of Lighthouses on ports does not otherwise increase any
production or reinforcement costs.
Note: Due to the nature of the hex owner/controller relationship when Minor
countries may claim territory for Majors, Lighthouses research is presumed to
be a shared technology between a parent Major and its controlled Minors.
For instance, France could upgrade Veracruz in the Mexican Empire. Also,
captured resources may be upgraded, so the Union can upgrade Jacksonville
to watch over the coast of Florida and ensure Confederate warships do not
attempt to recapture it.
Production and Reinforcement cost increase per level: 10 MPPs.
9.9. Automatic Upgrades

Unlike with Manual Upgrades and as the name implies, Majors automatically
benefit from success in the Automatic Upgrades research fields. No manual
intervention is necessary to apply upgrades, and these categories do not
increase any production or reinforcement costs.
2 199 @
9.9.1. Corps Organization
This represents the wide range of improvements in training, doctrines,
communication and organization required to form a Corps, the largest
infantry formation represented by a single unit.
Each level increases the Build Limits of Corps by 4, and their Action Points
by 0.5. Note that Level 1 must be researched before you can build any Corps.
Tip! It cannot be overstated how important this technology is, as Corps will
form the backbone of your armies in the second half of the war. Ignore this at
your peril!
9.9.2. Field Telegraph

Portable telegraph machines, and thousands of miles of wire, allowed
commanders to quickly communicate with their subordinates and civilian
leaders, greatly increasing their ability to command and control their forces.
Each level of Field Telegraph research increases the Command Range of, and
number of units that may be attached to, HQs by 1.
9.9.3. Leadership
Leadership represents the wide range of improvements in command brought on
by staff training, battlefield experience, improved selection of subordinates,
and all the other changes made necessary as the ranks of the pre-war army
swelled from 16,000 to over half a million men.
Leadership increases the Command Rating of HQs by 1 per level, and their
Action Points by 0.5 per level.
9.9.4. Infantry Tactics

Representing investment in training, tactics, doctrine and improvements to
the enlistment system, this category improves the Unit Morale of all Infantry
units except Regiments and Engineers by 10% per level. It also increases
the Artillery Defense values of Divisions, Mountain Divisions, Corps and
Marines by 0.5 per level, and the Naval Defense values of all infantry units
by 0.5 per level.
2 200 @
9.9.5. Cavalry Tactics
Representing investment in training, tactics and doctrine, this category
improves the Unit Morale of all Cavalry units, including Indians, by 10% per
level. It also increases the Build Limit for Cavalry Divisions by 1 per level, and
the Naval Defense values of all cavalry units except Indians by 0.5 per level.
9.9.6. Naval Tactics

This represents both the training and battle experience of your sailors, and
the growing understanding of new technologies including Ironclads and
Submarines, which together increase the Unit Morale of all naval units by 10%
per level. It also increases the amount of enemy MPPs lost when your ships raid
the enemy convoys, making it a particularly useful technology for the Union as
it attempts to shut down the Confederate blockade runners.
9.9.7. Amphibious Warfare

Perhaps inspired by Winfield Scott’s successful Veracruz campaign in 1847,
the Union launched amphibious invasions against virtually every Confederate
port of any significance during the Civil War. Amphibious invasions are well
known as among the riskiest of all military maneuvers, and the training and
doctrines represented by Amphibious Warfare can greatly improve your troops’
odds of success.
Each level attained increases the Build Limits of Amphibious Transports
by 2, and Long Range Amphibious Transports and Marines by 1 each. It also
increases the Action Points of Amphibious Transports by 1, and those of Long
Range Amphibious Transports by 2.
Marines also benefit from Amphibious Warfare, with an increase of 0.5
Infantry and Fort Attack per level.
The Confederacy cannot build any Amphibious Transports by default,
making this technology a necessary investment if they wish to strike at the
Union from the sea!
Note: Amphibious Transports cannot move on the turn the unit embarks
unless level 1 in Amphibious Warfare has been reached.
2 201 @
9.9.8. Experimental Submarines
Throughout the Civil War, both sides experimented with the development
of Submarines, weapons that promised the ability to strike at enemy ships
without being seen. In the 1860s the Submarine is still unproven, but against
an unsuspecting foe they may be a dangerous surprise indeed!
Experimental Submarines increases the Attack values of Submarines against all
enemy naval units. More importantly, it increases the Build Limits of Submarines,
by 1 per level, and Level 1 must be researched in order to build a Submarine.
9.9.9. Experimental Balloons

Thaddeus Lowe’s Balloon Corps represented one of the first attempts to take
advantage of the opportunities offered by aerial reconnaissance in warfare,
presenting the first true alternative to cavalry and mounted scouts for locating
an enemy army.
Experimental Balloons increases the Land and Naval Spotting ranges, and
Action Points of Balloons by 1 per level. More importantly, it increases the
Build Limits of Balloons, by 1 per level, and Level 1 must be researched in order
to build a Balloon.
9.9.10. Spying & Intelligence

Attempts to gather information on, and potentially interrupt, enemy
movements took a wide variety of forms in the Civil War, from the tapping and
cutting of enemy telegraph lines, to networks of sympathizers on the other side
of the border, to simply reading newspapers intended for the enemy public.
Perhaps no battle was more important, nor more profoundly impacted, by the
gathering of intelligence than Antietam, in which General McClellan was able
to benefit from the capture of a copy of Lee’s Special Order 191, detailing his
plans for the battle, four days before it was fought.
Gaining information on enemy deployments will assist in planning your
own offensives or counter attacks, so all Majors will benefit from this area of
research.
Spying & Intelligence can reveal enemy units on the map with a 1% chance per
unit per level, with a limit of 5 units per turn being revealed.
2 202 @
So when a Major has level 2 it will have a 2% chance per turn of spotting
each hidden enemy unit. This can be especially useful in naval warfare where
knowing the location of the enemy’s fleet could make all the difference between
victory and defeat.
Each new level of Spying & Intelligence research increases your own research
bonus by 1% and decreases your opponent’s bonus by 1%.
Spying & Intelligence levels only compete with each other, so if the enemy
has a higher intelligence level than you, the only net effect will be to negate the
benefit you’ll get from your own intelligence level. It won’t prevent or slow the
base research % chance per turn.
Only the Spying & Intelligence levels of fully mobilized Majors are also taken
into account when determining results, and only the Major on each side with
the highest level of Intelligence research affects Research progress.
Spying & Intelligence will also increase the chance of breakthroughs speeding
up your research, so there is a lot to be gained from researching this category.
9.9.11. Logistics
This technology represents improvements in infrastructure for the rapid
deployment and redeployment of forces, as well as for their supply and
reinforcement.
Each new level of Logistics research reduces Rail Movement and regular
Transport costs by 10%.
Logistics also increases by 1 per level HQ’s minimum supply values, and the
Build Limits for Transports for Majors and their Minors. Finally, each level of
Logistics increases the Action Points of Armored Trains by 1.
9.9.12. Production Technology

Advances in any of the Manual Upgrades research areas result in cumulative
increases in production and reinforcement costs for upgraded units. Thus,
to offset these additional costs, developing Production Technology represents
increases in the efficiency with which a country’s industrial capacity is
mobilized for the war effort.
2 203 @
Each new level of Production Technology research decreases unit costs and
the cost of Manual Upgrades by 5%.
If you are playing with Soft Build Limits enabled, Soft Build Limit penalties
are still applied where applicable, but only after the calculation of the final unit
cost minus any reduction due to Production Technology.
9.9.13. Industrial Technology

Mobilization for war and the transformation of economies to a war footing
took time, and this research category represents Majors mobilizing their
resources to support the war effort.
The initial Industrial Modifiers at the start of the war do vary, representing
different factors such as their economic power, their self sufficiency, and their
relative preparation for war.
The Industrial Technology increments default to 10% per level.
9.9.14. Automatic Industrial Mobilization

This is not a research category, but a game feature that you will see in play in
some campaigns where countries can have Resources that aren’t producing
for their respective war efforts at the start of the war, but that will enter into
production as their respective countries increase their military production.
These will show a strength value of zero.
For example, in the Union, a number of resources including the
Pennsylvanian iron mines and Springfield armory will only begin production
on the second turn of the game.
2 204 @
10. POLITICS AND DIPLOMACY
10.1. Alignment Status & Mobilization Values
All countries have an Alignment Status of either Union, Union Minor,
Confederate, Confederate Minor or Neutral.
All countries that are neither fully mobilized nor totally neutral at the start
of a campaign will have a Mobilization Value showing as a %, as well as an
indication of whether they favor the Union or Confederates.
In 1861 Blue and Gray, and other default campaigns, neutral Majors do not
receive any MPPs until they enter the war. In other campaigns, including
unofficial modded campaigns, neutral Majors receive higher income with a
higher Mobilization value, allowing them to step up their preparations for war
by investing in key research areas or important units.
Note that Majors cannot switch sides, so for instance, the Union can only
hope to reduce Spain’s pro-Confederate Mobilization value. They will never be
able to sway Spain into siding with the Union.
10.1.1. Non-Cooperative Majors

Although no Major countries have a non-cooperative setting in the official
campaigns that come with Strategic Command American Civil War, they could be
in unofficial modded campaigns.
The effect of doing this would be that a non-cooperative Major would only
provide a maximum supply value of 3 to units belonging to their allies that
might enter their territory. Units belonging to their allies would not be able
to rail move into or out of their territories, nor would they be able to rail move
into or out of their allies’ territories.
10.1.2. Minor Combatants

Scripted events will trigger changes in the Mobilization Values for both Minors
and neutral Majors. For example, Navajo is a neutral but pro-Confederate
Minor, and it will respond favorably to a Confederate advance in New Mexico,
while the European great powers will respond to both Union and Confederate
2 205 @
actions, particularly along the Atlantic coastline. These successes may not be
sufficient to make them enter the war, or at least not as early as one might
wish, therefore some diplomacy may be required too.
10.2. The Diplomatic Mechanism

The diplomatic mechanism gives each side the opportunity to influence
neutral countries into joining their side.
Each fully mobilized Major can typically invest a limited number of chits
in Diplomacy, although in the default American Civil War campaigns this is
limited to just the Union and Confederacy. Diplomacy chits represent political
efforts as well as the promise of trade, military equipment, and economic
packages that were often used to influence neutrals. The number of chits is
limited to reflect the historical difficulties in bringing neutrals into the war.
The cost of Diplomacy chits depends on the neutral being targeted, with
diplomacy targeted at Majors being more expensive due to the greater value of
bringing them into the war on your side. The maximum diplomatic investment
(i.e. the number of chits) cannot exceed the allowable limit that each Major can
purchase.
Each country has a Mobilization Value that reflects their current political
leaning towards a particular side. It is generally best to focus your diplomatic
efforts on countries that are already leaning towards your side, instead of
investing in countries that had little or no sympathy with your side. For
instance, the Union has more chance of enticing Kentucky than the Five Tribes
of the Indian Territory to enter the war on their side.
Diplomacy can be used to try to delay or prevent an enemy Minor from
entering the war, and there will be times when this is a good thing to do.
If your diplomatic strategy is focused on a particular country, with all your
Majors investing to the maximum, then success will be more likely and the
MPP investment will more likely be worth the economic cost.
Once a diplomacy chit has been purchased and assigned to a country,
in each successive turn there will be a random chance of an increase in its
Mobilization Value towards your side. If you have more chits assigned, there is
a greater chance of success.
2 206 @
The chance per turn for diplomatic influence will be 3% multiplied by the
number of diplomacy chits assigned to the target country.
If diplomacy succeeds, there will be a favorable increase of 7-10% in the
targeted country’s political leaning towards your side, with a 10% chance of
that swing being 20-30% if the targeted country is a Minor.
If a Minor country’s Mobilization Level drops below 0%, then its Political
Alignment will switch to the other side. It will now have a Mobilization Level
towards that side. Note that the Mobilization Level of a Major country may not
drop below 0% and its Political Alignment cannot change.
Once you achieve a diplomatic success, your invested chits are consumed
and the targeted country will move towards your side. At this point the
successful Major will now be able to repurchase and invest that chit, either in
the same country if it is still neutral, or in another one.
Unlike Research, you cannot reclaim an invested diplomacy chit to regain
the MPPs spent. Once a diplomatic investment is made, the MPPs have been
invested in that country and while the chit can be reclaimed and therefore
freed up for use elsewhere, the MPPs cannot be.
Note: Due to the flexibility available in the game engine, it is possible
that some modded campaigns may allow chits to remain invested in a target
country after a success is achieved.
10.3. Contested Diplomacy

At the same time as you are investing in diplomacy, your opponent could also
be purchasing diplomacy chits to influence the same country. In this event,
the difference between the cumulative friendly diplomatic pressure and the
cumulative enemy diplomatic pressure will determine the % chance for a
diplomatic result.
This allows for counter-diplomacy as well as for more interesting and
occasionally surprising diplomatic results under Fog of War whereby the
target of the enemies’ diplomacy remains unknown. Therefore diplomacy
and counter-diplomacy will have a realistic feel, sometimes frustrating and
sometimes exhilarating.
2 207 @
Standard political events (i.e. random political triggers and war readiness
factors) may also change Mobilization Values. These will represent historical
situations, the result of Decision Events, or be the result of successful offensives
that can inspire neutrals to reconsider their position. For instance, the fall of
New Orleans will move the UK, France and Spain away from the Confederacy.
10.4. Impending War Entry

Once a country’s Mobilization Value reaches 90% there is a random automatic
boost of 1-5% per turn, and this will continue until the Mobilization Value
reaches 100%.
10.5. Belligerence
Each Major has a Belligerence setting that is separate to its mobilization
setting, which means that it can be fully mobilized, i.e. at 100% mobilization,
but not necessarily at war with any other country. A Major country that is fully
mobilized can move its units, declare war, invest in diplomacy etc, even if it is
not actually at war with anyone.
This is somewhat hypothetical in the official Strategic Command American
Civil War campaigns, as scripts are in place to make all fully mobilized Majors
be automatically at war with all opposing Majors, with one exception: should
Mexico enter the war (an event that can only occur if France joins the war, for
historical reasons), the Confederacy will be offered the decision of declaring
war on Mexico, which they can decline. If these belligerence scripts were to
be switched off (as can be done should you wish to) it would be possible, for
instance, to have the Union not be at war with a fully mobilized UK.
The Belligerence settings enable you to decide which of the Majors under
your control will declare war.
Fully mobilized Minor countries will follow the belligerence settings of
their Majors. For example, Osage’s Union Parent is the Union, and this means
that when Osage reaches 100% mobilization it will automatically be at war with
all the countries the Union is at war with.
Similarly aligned and fully mobilized Majors can only enter each other’s
territory if they share a common belligerent. Consequently Union units could
2 208 @
not enter Mexico unless the Union and Mexico are both at war with at least one
of the Confederate Majors (in the case of that decision mentioned earlier, if all
scripts were left on their default setting, both the Union and Mexico would be
at war with France). Nor would Mexican units be able to enter the territory of
Union Minors in this instance, because fully mobilized Minors follow the same
belligerence settings as their Majors.
One point to note is that units cannot attack an enemy from a non-
belligerent hex, i.e. Union forces could not attack Confederate units in western
Texas from northeastern Mexico (ie, over the Rio Grande) if Mexico is not yet
at war with the Confederacy.
10.6. The Wider Impact of Declarations of War

The Mobilization Value of neutral Majors and the timing of their eventual war
entry can be greatly affected not only by diplomacy but also by either side’s
declarations of war against other neutrals.
For instance, declaring war on one of the Five Tribes (that is, the Creek,
Cherokee, Seminole, Choctaw and Chickasaw) will automatically swing
the Mobilization Values of the other four against the side declaring war. In
American Civil War these diplomatic shifts can be quite significant, so while it
may be necessary to declare war in order to secure valuable strategic positions,
remember that an overly aggressive strategy could result in the remaining
neutrals banding together to oppose you!
Attacking a neutral Minor will not necessarily bring you into conflict with its
assigned Major, unless that Major is already close to full Mobilization (although
in American Civil War, all neutral Minors are associated with the Union or
Confederacy, with the sole exception being the Mexican Empire, a French
puppet state that cannot be attacked directly). Though nearby Minors may react
to aggression against their neighbors by swinging towards the other side.
Some declarations of war will trigger Fighting Spirit penalties to the
aggressor, e.g. if the Union was to attack the UK, France or Spain.
2 209 @
PART 2
DESIGNING YOUR  OWN
CAMPAIGNS
“Determine that the thing can and shall be done, and then
we shall find the way.”
Abraham Lincoln, in a speech to the House of Representatives, 1848.
1. INTRODUCTION
While we hope that the campaigns that come with Strategic Command American
Civil War provide you with hours of entertainment, this game also comes with
an Editor that you can use to massively increase your enjoyment of this game.
It is very easy to amend the default campaigns if you wish to change some
of their details or to test out different scenarios, and it’s also very easy to design
new campaigns from scratch.
This Editor is no different from the one used to design the default
campaigns, so you have all the tools at your fingertips for designing good
quality campaigns, of course within the confines of the overall game engine.
This guide will talk you through all the Editor’s features, and if you get
stuck at all then please don’t hesitate to post your question on our discussion
forum at Matrix Games.
1.1. First things First

The contents of this Manual includes details on how to use literally everything
in the Editor, from designing a map through deploying units to sitting back
and watching the AI play out both sides in a play-test of your campaign.
But before you get started with this Manual, the best thing to do is to open
up the Editor, open a default campaign, and just try out all the functions you
can see in the top rows.
2 210 @
Playing with these to see what they do is the quickest way to get a feel for
the Editor, for what it can do and just how easy it is to do many things. Use this
Manual as a guide to specific things, but you’ll probably find that within a very
short period of time you’ll have learned far more than if you’d just sat back and
read the Manual.
Above all, have fun while you try things out, and don’t worry about what
things might do. The good thing is that if you are trying things out with a
default campaign then you cannot save any of your changes over it. If you do
want to save them, you will have to go to File and Save As, and rename the
campaign as something else, e.g. Test Campaign.
Once you’ve familiarized yourself a bit through practicing with the Editor,
use the following Manual and let it guide you through everything in more
detail so that you too can start creating wonderful campaigns for either your
own amusement, or for other players to enjoy too!
1.2. Using The Editor

Welcome to our guide on how to use the Editor. Using this you can use it to
amend the existing campaigns or create new ones from scratch!
This guide is written on the assumption that you have at least a basic
understanding of how the game works, though if you come across anything
you don’t understand please either consult the main Game Manual, or post on
our forums at Matrix Games.
1.2.1. Editor Help File

Pressing F1 opens this document, so you can easily access it from within the
Editor.
1.2.2. The Information Panel

At the bottom of the screen is the Editor’s Information Panel which will display
different information as you work on a campaign.
Keep an eye on this panel as it is a useful tool because the information it
shows will vary in accordance with the selection type you are working on.
2 211 @
For example, if you are adding units to the map then information relevant
to the units will show here, whereas if you are editing terrain then it will show
the terrain types instead.
The middle of the Information Panel will always show the X-Y coordinates
of the hex your mouse is currently hovering over, as well as whether it is a
Land, Sea or Land-Sea hex.
2. MENU BUTTONS
Before we proceed further, here is a guide to the Menu Buttons that are
available in the Editor once you have a campaign file open, or are creating a
new one.
2.1. File
2.1.1. File γ Creating a New Campaign
Once the Campaign Editor has fully loaded, a new campaign may be created by
selecting File γ New from the Main Menu bar at the top left of the screen. This
will create a blank campaign template. Use the scroll to set the map size. This
can be from a minimum of 10 x 10 to a maximum of 512 x 256 hexes.
By default the new campaign will be created with all hexes filled with sea,
and in 9. Menu Buttons - Second Row we will look at using the Map commands to
change these hexes so that you can design your own campaign.
2.1.2. File γ Open Default Campaign

To open a default campaign, select File γ Open Default Campaign from the
Main Menu bar.
You may open the original campaigns that come with Strategic Command
American Civil War this way, to either view them or to create your own mods
from these. If you do make any changes to any of these default campaigns you
will need to save your version with a new name, as the original campaigns are
protected.
2 212 @
2.1.3. File γ Open User Campaign
To open any campaigns that you have created or amended, or any user made
campaigns that you have downloaded, select File γ Open User Campaign from
the Main Menu bar.
These campaigns are stored in a different place to the default campaigns,
and any new campaigns you create will be saved here.
Tip: From the Open dialog, it is also possible to right click on a *.cgn file in
the Campaigns directory to delete or rename it.
2.1.4. File γ Saving a Campaign

There are two options to saving a campaign, either File γ Save or File γ Save
As.
Using Save will save the campaign with the current file name, while Save
As allows you to rename the current campaign prior to saving it as a *.cgn file
in the Campaigns directory. Using Save As will also save copies of any custom
files relating to the campaign into the newly named campaign’s folder within
the game’s Campaigns folder.
If when using Save As you select a pre-existing campaign’s file name to save
the files to, then a warning message will prompt you to confirm that you wish
to overwrite the Event scripts for that campaign.
You cannot save over a default campaign, instead you will have to use Save
As and give it a new name.
2.1.5. File γ Import Data

Once a new campaign is created, or with an existing campaign open, the File γ
Import Data command allows you to import data extracted from a different
campaign (see the next item for how to export data).
After clicking on Import Data there will be a Warning Message to check
that you wish to proceed.
If you select Yes to continue, you will now need to choose the folder where
the data to be imported is kept, then press OK.
You can now select to import any or all items from a previous campaign
for use in the campaign that you have open at the moment. The browser will
2 213 @
default to the game’s Data directory and you will have to choose the sub-
directory containing the desired Data files.
To import any data from the Map Layers, the imported map size must
match the current map size. If they don’t match then a warning message will
advise you of the discrepancy, and you will have to adjust the current map size
before importing.
Caution: The import feature will
overwrite the current campaign’s
data with that contained in the
imported *.dat files, so only import
if you are 100% sure or have a backup
just in case.
2.1.6. File γ Export Data

Using the File γ Export Data command allows you to save the current Map
Layers, Country Data, and General Data as *.dat files onto your computer.
The Editor will prompt you to select a folder to export the data to, and if you
haven’t already done so, it will be best to create a new folder specifically for this
data in an easily accessible location.
Select the folder and press OK.
You will now be presented with a Dialog box listing all the different types of
data to be exported. You can select as much or as little as you wish, and there
is a Select All button in the bottom right for use if you wish to export all the
campaign’s data. Click OK once you’ve chosen, and *.dat files will now appear
in that folder containing the information that you have exported.
This Export Data function can be very useful as exporting Data files will
enable you to import some or all of them into another campaign. For instance,
you might be interested in re-using the map of an official campaign for your
own totally different campaign. Using this feature you can import as much or
as little as you like!
Note: Individual data files are NOT saved when the Save or Save As
commands are used; only the *.cgn campaign file and any amended scripts
will be saved using these.
2 214 @
Note: The default Data directory for all export information will be a new
sub-directory with the name of the current campaign (e.g., \Data\1861 Blue and
Gray). From the Browse for Folder dialog that opens when you select Export
Data, you will be able to choose another export folder or make a new folder if
you would rather.
2.1.7. File γ Export Map Positions (F6)

This is useful for script work where you want to use the coordinates of multiple
locations when writing Event scripts.
To execute this feature, click on Map and tick both Edit Hex Layer and
Select Item(s). Now select your chosen map positions and then either press F6
or click on File and select Export Map Positions. This will generate a text file
called map_positions.txt in the main Strategic Command directory pertaining
to the game in question.
You can then cut and paste the generated #MAP_POSITION text into the
appropriate script event, though you might have to rename the control ‘#’ entry
to the appropriate name for some scripts.
By default you can only select the hexes of one country at a time. However,
if you want to select hexes belonging to more than one country at the same
time, simply hold down both your left mouse button and the Shift button, as
this will enable you to select hexes irrespective of their ownership.
Note: Once you have used this feature, the .txt file that it creates will be
added to every time you use this function, so you may want to either delete the
contents of the file or the file itself once you’ve used the exported data.
2.1.8. File γ Export Dates (F7)

This allows you to export the campaign’s dates into a text file, where you will be
able to see on which date it will be a Union or Confederate turn. This can be of
use when scripting to ensure that events happen when you would like them to.
2.1.9. File γ Exit

When you have finished your work for the time being, the File γ Exit command
will close the Editor.
2 215 @
Note: Before closing the file, a warning message will prompt you to save
the current campaign if you have made any changes since it was opened or
last saved.
2.2. Edit
2.2.1. Edit γ Undo
Undo the previous action(s). Up to 10 of the previous actions can be undone.
Ctrl-Z will Undo the action via the keyboard.
2.2.2. Edit γ Redo

Redo the previous action.
Ctrl-Y will Redo the action via the keyboard.
2.2.3. Edit γ Lock and Unlock Scroll

This Locks the map view in the current position, though if unlocked you can
scroll the map using either the mouse cursor or arrow keys.
Tip! Locking the map view is very useful when drawing or editing a new
map and you are constantly selecting sprites from the sprite library on the
right. This prevents the map from shifting whenever you move the mouse
cursor too far in any direction.
2.2.4. Edit γ Change Video Mode (F3)

Select one of the choices of screen resolution.
The Editor will remember the last opened position on your screen, so if for
example you had it open in the top left of your screen, then the next time you
open it it will open up in the same place.
2.2.5. Edit γ Refresh Fonts (F4)

If you load customized fonts into this game’s Fonts folder while a campaign is
open, then pressing F4 to refresh Fonts will show the new fonts when accessing
the Text Layer.
2 216 @
2.2.6. Edit γ Refresh Bitmaps (F5)
This refreshes the Bitmaps for this campaign, so if they have been edited since
you opened the campaign and have saved changes to them, the Editor will now
show them with the latest changes.
Tip! This is a very useful tool if you are customizing any of the image files
in the game. Once an image has been modified, using Refresh Bitmaps or
pressing F5 on your keyboard will automatically reload all the images in the
Editor so that you can immediately see your amended image files without
having to close and reopen the Editor.
2.3. Map
2.3.1. General Map Drawing Tips
2.3.1.1. Offsets
Offsets enable you to fine tune the exact position of items on the map, allowing
you to move them by up to 25 pixels along both the X and Y axis.
To use Offsets, select the Layer relevant to the Hex you wish to adjust, e.g.
Terrain Layer, click on Select Item(s), and right click on the Hex in question.
Select the Offsets option and click on the X and Y scroll buttons to move the
item in question until you are happy with its new position. Click OK when done.
2.3.1.2. Selecting Hexes in the Hex Layer

If you left click and drag with the mouse, you will only select hexes belonging to
the same country as that of the first selected hex. For this selection type, Land/
Sea hexes and all Coastal hexes are treated as Land hexes.
If you left click and drag the mouse while holding down Ctrl, you will select
Land hexes en masse, but they will only be hexes belonging to the same country
as that of the first selected hex. For this selection type, Land/Sea hexes and all
Coastal hexes are treated as Land hexes.
If you left click and drag the mouse while holding down Shift, you will
select any hex, Land and/or Sea, irrespective of their nationality.
If you left click and drag the mouse while holding down Alt, you will only
select Sea hexes. For this selection type, Land/Sea hexes, and all Coastal hexes,
are treated as Sea hexes.
2 217 @
If you left click and drag the mouse while holding down both Shift and
Ctrl keys, you will select hexes en masse of any type, whether Land or Sea,
irrespective of their nationality.
If you left click and drag the mouse while holding down both Alt and Ctrl,
you will select Sea hexes en masse. For this selection type, Land/Sea hexes and
all Coastal hexes are treated as Sea hexes.
2.3.1.3. Drawing/Selecting in all other Layers

Left clicking and dragging with the mouse will select valid game objects
belonging to the currently selected layer.
Left clicking and dragging with the mouse while holding Ctrl will select en
masse valid game objects belonging to the currently selected layer.
2.3.1.4. Right Clicking to Select Items

While you are in Draw mode, right clicking on a hex will select that hex’s sprite
as the current drawing sprite. It will also bring that sprite to the top of the
sprite list on the right hand side of the Editor.
2.3.1.5. The + and – Keys

While you are in Draw mode, if you hover the mouse over a hex and press +
or – on your keyboard then you can scroll respectively up or down the selected
sprite type. For example if you have the Hex Layer selected it will scroll through
that layer. As you scroll, providing your mouse is hovering over the hex, the
sprites will immediately show on the map and you can then select the one that
you prefer.
2.3.2. Map γ Edit Hex Layer

Here you can add and edit Sea, Land and Coastal hexes on the map. Coastal
hexes count as either Land or Sea, depending on the proportion of each in
the hex, and there are also some hexes with both attributes called Land/Sea
hexes. These act as land bridges between land masses, e.g. the Suez Canal or
the Bosphorus Strait in our previous games. In American Civil War, Land/Sea
hexes have also been used to represent navigable rivers such as the Mississippi
and Ohio.
2 218 @
New Land hexes will automatically be aligned to the country that is marked
as Major Country Number 1. See the section on Edit Major Country IDs Data on
how to change this.
Land hexes drawn over the top of pre-existing Land hexes will automatically
have the same country and ownership as the Land hexes that were already
there.
Tip: One technique for drawing a new map is to take a picture of the map
you want, decide on an appropriate scale and overlay a hex grid. From this
you can gain a rough idea of the content needed for each hex, i.e. where to put
coasts, resources etc.
2.3.3. Map γ Edit Terrain Layer

Add and edit forests, mountains, marshes and depressions on the map.
2.3.3.1. Drawing Desert Hexes

When drawing Desert hexes in the Terrain Layer, image numbers 531, 532,
539 and 540 are set as full Desert hex sprites. If you select to draw with one of
them, hold down Ctrl and as you drag and draw with the mouse, the Editor will
automatically select randomly between the four to draw on the map.
This makes things easier when drawing a large desert area as the engine
will automatically introduce randomness into the terrain layer. By releasing
the Ctrl key you can then fine tune the actual desert hexes to suit your design.
2.3.4. Map γ Edit River Layer

Add and edit Rivers and Major Rivers on the map, including river mouths and
tributaries.
Rivers can be very quickly added to the map once you have selected Edit
River Layer by selecting a river sprite from the Selection Column on the right
hand side by left clicking on it.
Now draw a river by left clicking on the map and moving the mouse with
the left mouse button held down. This will draw the river’s path. It isn’t likely
to produce a 100% perfect river at the first attempt, especially not if the river
doubles back on itself, but drawing whole sections of river directly onto the
2 219 @
map, rather than on a hex by hex basis, can be done very quickly with edits
being made afterwards.
If you want to change a River on the map to a Major River, or vice versa, this
can easily be done by doing the following:
Right click on a normal River sprite on the map, then right click again and
the Selection Column will select the matching Major River sprite.
You can now draw this Major River by left clicking on the map, either
overtop of the normal River sprite or elsewhere.
You can then repeat the above steps for any other River sprites that you’d
like to change to Major Rivers.
This process can also be used in reverse to change Major Rivers into Rivers.
With stage 1, each right click is alternating between both types, so right
clicking for a second time on the same spot will go back to the regular River
sprite.
Note that if you wish to create navigable rivers on your map, these are
created by using Land/Sea tiles from the Hex Layer, NOT the River Layer.
2.3.5. Map γ Edit Road Layer

Add and edit (Paved) Roads and Dirt Roads on the map, including their
junctions.
Roads can be very quickly added to the map by selecting a road sprite
from the Selection Column on the right hand side by left clicking on it. Now
draw the road by left clicking on the map and moving the mouse with the left
mouse button held down. You can edit the road, adding or amending junctions
afterwards.
2.3.6. Map γ Edit Rail Layer

Add and edit Rails on the map, including junctions.
Railways can be very quickly added to the map by selecting a rail sprite
from the Selection Column on the right hand side by left clicking on it. Now
draw the railway by left clicking on the map and moving the mouse with the
left mouse button held down to draw its path. You can edit the rail network,
adding or amending junctions afterwards.
2 220 @
2.3.7. Map γ Edit Resource Layer
Add and edit Ports, Mines, Oil Fields, Settlements, Towns, Cities, Major Cities,
Capitals, Major Capitals, Trenches and Fortresses on the map.
Different sprites are included for the Western, Eastern, Mediterranean,
Middle Eastern and Desert regions.
Note: You cannot add additional Capitals to a country that already has a
Capital.
Tip! To see what strength resources will have at the start of a game based
on their connections to Key Resources, saving the campaign will recalculate
their strengths afresh. Simply select the ‘Resource’ layer and when you pass
over a resource, the info in the bottom information bar will show the resource
strength in brackets next to the name.
2.3.8. Map γ Edit Symbol Layer

Add and edit symbols on the map.
These can be used for naval and land Loops, for showing raiding areas, or
for denoting other information as you see fit.
2.3.9. Map γ Edit Text Layer

Add and edit text on the map.
This is used for the names of resources, geographical areas and other
features.
2.3.10. Map γ Edit Unit Layer

Add and edit land, air and naval units on the map.
Note: To add units that will start the game in an Amphibious Transport or
regular Transport, first place the new unit on land. Then right click on it, select
‘Move’ and left click on a sea hex and it will give you the opportunity to place it
as either type of Amphibious Transport or as a regular Transport.
2.3.11. Map γ Edit Weather Layer

Add and edit Weather Zones on the map.
Select the hexes that you wish to assign to a Weather Zone and right click.
This will allow you to set the Weather Zone for these hexes.
2 221 @
With the addition of Weather Zones, if you set an area to be an Arid, Semi-
Arid, or Frozen zone then the look of the terrain will dynamically adjust to the
new Weather Zone.
See Edit Weather Data for additional details on setting Weather Zones for
the campaign.
2.3.12. Map γ Edit Naval Layer

Add and edit Naval Zones on the map.
Select the hexes that you wish to assign to a Naval Zone and right click. This
will allow you to set the Naval Zone for these hexes.
The four naval zones are: Ocean, Coast, River and Impassable.
Land hexes cannot be assigned to naval zones.
2.3.13. Map γ Edit Map Size

Adjust the map’s size by amending its X and Y axis dimensions. Changing the
X axis value will change the right boundary, while changing the Y axis value
will change the map’s bottom boundary.
Note: Any reduction in map size will result in permanent data loss along
the reduced axis, so be sure that this is really what you want to do before
proceeding.
2.3.14. Map γ Shift Contents

Using this you can shift map contents to either the left or right, or up or down.
Only one horizontal or vertical shift may be made per action.
Decide whether you wish to move the map vertically or horizontally and
then manipulate the second or third rows of up/down buttons in accordance
with whether you wish to move the left or right hand column if moving
horizontally, or the top or bottom if moving vertically.
The first row represents the number of columns or rows that a map section
is being shifted. The second and third rows represent the start and end
column/row numbers of the map section to be shifted.
Tip! Practice in a copy of your campaign before amending the original.
Note: Shifting contents will result in permanent data loss from the hexes
along the X or Y axis at the new location.
2 222 @
2.3.15. Editing Layers
The three sections that follow all relate to editing the various layers on the map.
There are eleven different layers, and selecting the correct layer before
proceeding is important as otherwise you may find yourself editing the wrong
layer.
The different layers are shown here, as they appear in the second row at
the top of the Editor. They can be chosen simply by left clicking on the one you
want.
In order, the layers are:
§ Hex
§ Terrain
§ River
§ Road
§ Rail
§ Resource
§ Symbol
§ Text
§ Unit
§ Weather
Note that there is no button for the Naval Zone layer. If you want to change the
Naval Zone layer, you will need to click Map and then Edit Naval Layer.
Hovering your mouse over each one will show its name, e.g. Edit Hex Layer
if hovering over the first.
2.3.16. Map γ Draw

When in Draw mode, left clicking on the map places the currently selected
sprite onto the map, over-writing whatever was previously in the hex.
The currently selected sprite is shown in the Upper Sprite Box at the top
right in the Editor. You can change the selection by using the scroll bar on the
right to go up or down the choices beneath the Upper Sprite Box. Left click
2 223 @
on another sprite to select it, and note how the current selection in the Upper
Sprite Box will change to the newly selected one.
Tip! When in Draw mode, if there is a sprite on the map that you would
like to use elsewhere, right click on the sprite on the map. That sprite will now
display as the current selection in the Upper Sprite Box. Now you can left click
on the map to place this sprite where you would like it.
Note: Using the mini-map to move around while in Draw Mode will only
change your location within the map, it will not make any changes to the
campaign.
2.3.17. Map γ Select Item(s)

Left clicking on the map or mini-map in this Mode WILL NOT make any hex
changes.
§ Select individual hexes by moving your mouse around with the left
mouse button held down. By default left clicking on hexes will only
select the hexes of one country at a time.
§ Select large numbers of hexes at once by moving your mouse around
with both your left mouse and the Ctrl buttons held down.
§ If you want to select hexes belonging to more than one country at the
same time, hold down both your left mouse button and the Shift button
while selecting. This will enable you to select hexes irrespective of their
ownership.
Left clicking on any selected hexes again will deselect them.

Tip! Right or left clicking on a sprite from the sprite library on the right will
display the current selection in the upper right sprite box and automatically
reset the Editor to Draw. This action will return you to the drawing mode, and
any selected hexes will automatically be deselected in the process.
Adding Countries to the Map
While using the Select Item(s) mode, right clicking while in the Edit Hex
Layer Mode will allow you to set Hex Owner/Controller status. This is the
tool to use to define countries on the map, as by setting the Owner you are
assigning hexes to belong to that country.
2 224 @
If the new country doesn’t yet have a Capital, you will need to add one before
you can save the campaign. To do this you will need to select the Resource layer, be
in Draw mode, and add a Capital or Major Capital to one of this country’s hexes.
Note: You can set the hex owner to anyone you wish from the country list. If
choosing a neutral Minor country as the Owner, the Controller will default to
neutral, whereas with a Major the Controller will be itself.
If any countries are set to be at war, i.e. belligerent, then when selecting
hexes their Controller can be set to be either their own controlling Major,
or a Major country on the other side. If used, setting the hexes to belong to
an enemy Major would signify that some territory has been captured by the
enemy before the campaign starts.
2.3.17.1. Editing Items on the Map

All of the following require using the Select Item(s) Mode rather than the Draw
mode.
Right clicking while in the Edit River Layer, Edit Terrain Layer or Edit Resource
Layer modes will allow you to move, delete, rename, or set properties for the
selected feature. This allows terrain features and resources to be named or re-
named, or upgrade levels to be applied if applicable.
For Fortifications, Fortresses and Major Fortresses, under the Properties
dialog you can also set a Destroy On Overrun or Surrender option. This means
that the resource will be removed from the map should it fall into enemy hands.
Hiding Resources: If desired, these can be hidden. To do this, select the Hidden
box that appears in the bottom left of the selected resource’s Properties dialog.
Right clicking while in the Edit Unit Layer Mode will allow you to move,
delete, rename, set properties or set Mode (if applicable) for the selected unit.
Moving a land unit from a Land to a Sea hex will present the option to
have that unit loaded onto a Transport, Amphibious Transport or Amphibious
Transport (Long Range). This also works in reverse, so you can move a unit
from any type of Transport back to land.
Editing units’ initial strength, experience and entrenchment levels, and
supply levels for naval units, can all be done under the Properties dialog. The Set
Mode dialog enables you to set the starting Mode for those units with different
2 225 @
modes, e.g. Artillery can be assigned their starting supply of Shells, Subs to
Silent mode, etc. This mode also lets you set units to Sleep by default.
As you set research levels for the campaign, additional options will become
available for customizing each unit or resource, such as enabling the latter to
be upgraded with Lighthouses.
The Details section under the Properties dialog displays combat values for
units and defense values for resources. The default values and costs will appear
normally, and any upgrades based on higher research levels will appear in
brackets like this: [...].
Unit attributes may not be set higher than your current research levels
allow. See the Edit Research section for additional details on setting research
levels for the campaign.
2.3.18. Map γ Remove Item(s)

With the Remove Item(s) tool selected you can erase hex contents by left
clicking on a hex.
This action is relative to the layer selected. For instance, with the Edit
Terrain Layer Mode selected this will only remove terrain pieces like forests
and mountains. The same applies for all others apart from when the Edit Hex
Layer Mode has been selected, as with this one if you remove a land hex then
literally all the contents of this hex that were dependent on the land will also be
removed, only the Symbol, Text and Weather Layers would remain.
Caution: A warning message WILL NOT prompt you to proceed prior to
making a change.
Tip! Right or left clicking on a sprite from the sprite library on the right will
display the current selection in the upper right sprite box and automatically
reset the Editor to Draw. This is a very quick way to go back to drawing.
2.3.19. Map γ Generate Full Map Screenshots (F8)

To take screenshots of the whole map, press F8.
A subfolder called Screenshots containing multiple images of your map
will be created in the folder: User\Documents\My Games\Strategic Command
American Civil War
2 226 @
2.3.20. Map γ Draw Map Control Values (F9)
Press F9 to see the extent of hex ownership of all fully mobilized countries on
the map. All hexes belonging to neutral countries will display the number zero,
while fully mobilized countries will display the number of their controlling
Major, e.g. Confederacy is 1, Union 5.
2.3.21. Map γ Draw Land Connection Values (F11)

Each set of connected Land hexes are assigned a number, so by pressing F11
you can see if a land mass correctly displays the same number throughout its
length. Neutral countries will be shown as 0.
2.3.22. Map γ Draw Naval Connection Values (F12)

To check that all the Ports you have added to the map can access the sea, press
F12 and check that the number showing over the Port is the same as that over
the Sea hexes they should be accessible to.
The engine automatically divides Sea hexes into numbered Sea Zones, with
all connected Sea hexes being in a zone. All Land hexes and Land/Sea hexes
that are in a neutral inactive country will be shown as 0.
This function will probably only be useful if you have positioned some Ports
in inlets connected to the sea via Land/Sea hexes, but it is useful to use this
function to quickly check that all your Ports will be accessible as intended.
2.4. Campaign
2.4.1. Campaign γ Edit Campaign Data
To edit basic campaign data, select Campaign γ Edit Campaign Data from the
Main Menu bar.
In the Campaign Data field you can set the Start Date, End Date, Who Starts
and Centered Map Position.
You can also provide a brief description of the campaign and claim
authorship of the scenario by inputting your name.
Any dates from year 0 to 9999 may be entered. The initial map display can
be centered by specifying an initial map position in X,Y coordinates.
2 227 @
Campaigns may also be flagged as mini-campaigns. This has no real effect
other than to help order main campaigns first and mini-campaigns second in
the Select Campaign dialog when starting a new game.
Note: The campaign End Date must be greater than the Start Date. A
warning message will prompt you prior to saving a change.
If you click on the Advanced button in the bottom right, this will bring up
the Advanced Game Play Options dialog where you can amend the following:
§ Select the Victory Basis to be Capitals or Objectives. The Capitals option

means countries surrender or are liberated when their Capital and all
Alternate Capitals have been captured. The Objectives option means
that the standard surrender and liberation rules are disabled. In either
case, victory is determined by the campaign’s Victory Event Scripts.
§ Display Borders, Convoy Map and War Maps. If unticked then these
options won’t display in game.
§ Turns Remaining. This is used to advise players when the game is
nearing its end date, to show them how many turns there are still to go.
§ Preferences: Research, Diplomacy and Purchases. If unticked then
these features will be disabled in game.
§ Operational Movement (Land): This option will be unavailable if
unticked. If ticked, then it can be set to be either Unrestricted or by Rail
Only. With Rail Only you can set the minimum connection strength
value for Resources to be able to act as the starting and way points for
Operational Movement by land units. The minimum supply value that
a unit must have in order to be operationally moved can be set here as
well.
§ Operational Movement by Air: This option will be unavailable if unticked.
If ticked, you can set the minimum strength value for Resources to be
able to act as the starting and end points for Operational Movement by
air units. The minimum supply value that a unit must have in order to
be operationally moved can be set here as well.
§ Note: by default, American Civil War has renamed the ‘Operational
Movement’ function from past games ‘Rail Movement’. If you are
designing a campaign where non-rail-based Operational Movement is
2 228 @
a possibility, we would advise you to edit your scenario’s localization
file (NOT the game’s original one!) and use the older name to avoid
confusion.
§ Resource Supply Calculation: should this be Unrestricted or by Rail
Only. If the latter is selected then supply from Key Resources travels
outwards by rail, meaning that resources not connected by rail to a Key
Resource will have lower strength and therefore supply values.
§ The remaining general options are either available in game if ticked, or
unavailable if their button is unticked. These are to allow:
§ Reinforcements
§ Elite Reinforcements
§ Upgrades
§ Transports
§ Amphibious Transports
§ Disbanding
§ Rebasing
§ Consumable Research Chits
§ Consumable Diplomacy Chits
§ Variable Hex Placement
§ Unit Placement Variation Upon DOW (Minors)
2.4.1.1. Notes
§ The Objectives option for Victory Basis disables the Alternate Capitals
feature whereby Capitals move when the first one is captured. All Cities
in the Capitals list will become Objectives, with the first City listed (i.e.,
the Capital) being the primary objective. All objectives will be highlighted
with a yellow ring around them. If using the Objectives option, it might
be wise to set any that would have been Alternate Capitals as Industrial
Centers to allow them to act as supply and production sources if the
primary objective is captured. See the Add/Remove Capitals and Add/
Remove Industrial Centers for more details.
§ The Rebasing option allows rebasing of air units.
2 229 @
§ The Unit Placement Variation Upon DOW (Minors) option randomly
moves by a maximum of one hex the placement of units for Minor
countries when they are declared war upon. This makes planning an
ideal invasion just that little bit harder.
§ The Consumable Research and Diplomacy Chit options mean that one
chit is consumed when a result is achieved.
2.4.2. Campaign γ Edit Country Data

2.4.2.1. Mobilizing Countries
To activate a country in the Editor, select Campaign γ Edit Country Data from
the Main Menu bar. In the following we will go through each section of the
Country Data area in turn.
2.4.2.2. Select Country

Each individual country’s data must be edited separately, and you can select
the country you wish to activate in the Select Country list on the left.
Each country that is represented on the map must have a Capital, but it is
not necessary for all countries that will be involved in the war to be represented
directly on the map, as Events can be used to create countries during a game.
Please refer to the Editing Events section for details on how to do this.
2.4.2.3. Flags
Here you can set each country’s:
§ Alignment as Neutral; Union or Confederate

§ Confederate Parent if the country is a Minor. If the selected country is a
Major then the default status is None.
§ Union Parent if the country is a Minor. If the selected country is a Major
then the default status is None.
§ Build Restrictions as None; Home Builds or Home/Occupied.
§ Scorched Earth to be None; On Invasion; On Liberation or Full.
§ Aircraft Operating Restriction as None, Home Country Only or Home/
Controlled.
2 230 @
Minimum requirements are as follows:
§ There must be at least one fully mobilized Major country. This can be
either Union or Confederate.
§ All Minor countries must have both a Union and Confederate Parent
defined. These Parents do not have to be fully activated, but they cannot
be Neutral.
2.4.2.4. Build Restrictions

Setting a country’s Build Restrictions to Home Builds Only limits the
deployment of new units to within their home country.
The Home/Occupied setting allows new units to be deployed both within
the home country and also within any cooperative countries directly under
that Major’s control.
Setting Build Restrictions to None allows unit construction in any friendly
cooperative territories if a direct land connection with the home Capital is
available.
2.4.2.5. Scorched Earth

Scorched Earth means that resources suffer damage when they are captured
or liberated.
The Full setting sets Scorched Earth to occur whenever their resources
change hands, whereas the On Invasion or On Liberation settings mean that
it would only happen either when a country loses its resources, or when it
regains them, but not both.
2.4.2.6. Aircraft Restriction

Aircraft Restriction denotes whether or not this country’s air units will be able
to operate to other countries.
Home Country Only means that air units can only operate within their own
country.
Home/Controlled means that a Major can operate its air units within its
own home country and any territory they occupy, including their subordinate
Minors, but not to or from territory controlled by their allies.
2 231 @
2.4.2.7. Mobilization % and Status
Set a country’s Mobilization % from 0 to 100. Note that:
§ If a Neutral Alignment has been selected, then 0% Mobilization will

automatically display.
§ If a country has a pro-Union or pro-Confederate leaning of less than
100%, then the country is considered neutral (though not neutrally
aligned) and not yet at war with anyone.
§ If a Mobilized Status is selected, then 100% Mobilization will
automatically display.
Although a country’s initial alignment in a campaign may be set as Union or

Confederate with a positive Mobilization %, for Minors, diplomacy or game
events could drop this value below 0%. Should this happen, the alignment
switches with a positive value towards the other side, as countries never have a
negative Mobilization Value.
Surrendered or Annexed. Here you can set any activated Minor countries
to have either status, defining the Occupier country for each in the box below.
Surrendered means that the country’s forces are removed from play and their
territory is occupied by the Occupier.
Annexed is a way to remove a pre-existing country and its armed forces
from the map, with its territory transferred to its Occupier. This is useful as
a quick way of editing a campaign like 1861 Blue and Gray into one that starts
several years later, as states that exist on the map can be ticked as annexed. If
you change your mind, then this can always be undone by simply unticking the
Annexed box.
Note: Changing a Major’s status may also reset the Surrender or Annexation
status of its dependents, as well as their Parent and/or Mobilization Status.
The Union and Confederate parents of an annexed Minor do not have to be
fully activated, but they cannot be Neutral. Also, annexing a country may reset
its Capitals or Industrial Centers lists. A warning message will prompt you to
confirm prior to making a change.
Set country Cooperative status. If ticked this allows a country to be fully
cooperative with its allies and vice versa. Non-cooperative countries:
2 232 @
§ Cannot operate their units into territory controlled by their allies.
§ Their Resources will provide a maximum of 3 supply to units belonging
to other non-cooperative countries.
§ They will not intercept or escort for each other.
§ Non-cooperative Majors that liberate Minor countries will override the
previous Parent country setting and become the new parent.
Examples: (The limited number of geographically significant Minors in

American Civil War means this point is more easily illustrated with an example
from our WWI game).
§ If Serbia were to be set as a non-cooperative Entente Major then:

§ It cannot operate land or air units to British, French or Russian territory,
and vice versa.
§ If the British conquer Greece and Serbia is fully mobilized, no Greek
resources would benefit from being connected to full strength Serbian
resources.
§ Montenegro has Serbia as its Parent, but if Montenegro is conquered
by the Central Powers and then liberated by the British, it will become
subordinate to the UK and not Serbia.
§ In contrast, Canada’s resources will benefit from their connection to the
USA when the latter enters the war, as both Canada and the USA are
cooperative.
2.4.2.8. Coop. Restriction
Restrictions can be added to the Cooperative status, so that it is possible
to denote whether or not units of countries allied to this one will be able to
operate in and out of this country.
If the restriction is (None) then there are no restrictions and cooperative
countries’ resources will supply each other, and both can operate air and land
units in and out of each others’ territory.
If the setting is Supply Only then units from other countries can receive
supply from that country’s resources, but no units from other countries can be
operated into, through or within this country.
2 233 @
2.4.2.9. Belligerence
Use this tick box to assign who is at war with whom when the campaign starts.
This only applies to Majors, as their subordinate Minors will automatically
adopt the same Belligerence settings as their Parent Major.
2.4.2.10. Unit Orientation

Set the default orientation of units when they aren’t in enemy contact range.
This is based on the unit facings in the image files that are set by default to face
the right, or east.
The Mirrored orientation flips the default unit image to the left, i.e. facing
west. The default orientation for a country will also affect friendly units placed
in that country, so this is a useful tool to ensure that units adopt a logical facing
according to their location.
The Reflect at Position option can be used separately or in addition to the
Mirrored option. It means that a country’s units will automatically face the
opposite way if they are on the other side of this Position.
Example: The default unit orientation for France is to face west. If the
Reflect at Position option is ticked, then any units east of that position will
automatically face to the east. This means that the default for a country like
France which faces the prospect of a two front war (ie. in Mexico and the
Confederacy) is for the units to face outwards towards the enemy.
2.4.2.11. Proximity and Facing

Any enemy land or air units that are within 5 hexes of each other, and connected
by land to each other, will automatically face off against each other as logically
as possible. Otherwise, if there is no unit within 5 hexes then they will face in
their default orientation. For naval units the face-off range is 8 hexes.
2.4.2.12. HQs
Ticking the Attachable Minors tickbox will enable the selected Major to
command units belonging to their subordinate Minors. Thus for example,
Confederate HQs can be set to command Seminole units, and Union HQs can
command Osage units.
2 234 @
2.4.2.13. Modifiers
Here you can set the:
§ Initial Military Production Points from 0 to 9999 MPPs (Majors only).
§ Industrial Modifier % from 0 to 1000 (Majors only).
§ Fighting Spirit – Start (FS) (Majors only). Use this if your campaign
starts part way through a war, by setting a figure lower than the one
you assign to Fighting Spirit - Upper in the box below. The difference
can represent Fighting Spirit losses due to casualties and lost resources
prior to the campaign starting.
§ Fighting Spirit – Upper (FS) (Majors only).
§ Max Occupational Efficiency % of captured resources from 0 to 100.
§ Soft Build Penalty % from 0 to 100.
§ Fortress Build Delay from 0 to 365 days.
§ Min Paratroops Prepare Supply Level from 0 to 21. This is not applicable
in the American Civil War engine so can be ignored.
§ Max HQ Attachments from 0 to 25.
§ Max HQ Attachment Range from 0 to 25.
2.4.3. Setting Key Resources

Key Resources are Capitals; Industrial Centers; Primary Supply Centers and
Secondary Supply Centers.
2.4.4. Alphanumeric sort

Urban Resource names can be sorted either according to their position on
the map, or in alphanumeric order. The latter is the default, but if you would
like to sort them according to their position on the map, then untick the
Alphanumeric button.
2.4.5. Urban Resources

Each country’s Urban Resources are listed in two separate columns, one on
the left and another to the right of the middle. Select locations from the list on
the left to add them to the Capitals or Industrial Centers lists. Locations in the
right hand list can be selected and added to the lists of Primary and Secondary
Supply Centers.
2 235 @
2.4.6. Add/Remove Capitals
Define a country’s Capital first and any alternate Capital(s) subsequently, in
order, if applicable. If the current Capital is captured, the game will then move
the country’s Capital to the next one listed that is still under friendly control.
A country will only have one active Capital at a time during a game, and it will
begin checking for surrender once its final Capital is captured.
If Capitals are liberated then the Capital can return to a previous location.
2.4.6.1. Add/Remove Industrial Centers

Define locations in addition to a country’s Capital that can serve as Industrial
Centers. These Industrial Centers will not only act as a supply source similar
to a Capital, but players will also be able to build and deploy units at urban
resources that can trace a line of friendly hexes to these Industrial Centers.
2.4.6.2. Add/Remove Primary and Secondary Supply Centers

Define locations in addition to a country’s Capital and Industrial Centers that
can serve as Primary and Secondary Supply Centers. These Supply Centers will
provide supply but unless there is a line of friendly hexes directly connecting
them to a Capital or Industrial Center, players will not be able to build units here.
Note that an occupier gains the pre-existing Primary and Secondary Supply
Centers when the country surrenders.
2.4.6.3. Customized Values & Restore Defaults

This game comes with default data settings for all countries and unit types.
Any amendments you make will be classed as customized values, and these
customized values will be displayed with an asterisk (*).
Selecting Restore Defaults at the bottom of the screen will enable you to
restore some or all default values according to your selection.
Unit Build Lists: There will be a delay when restoring their defaults, as well
as a warning message as the campaign needs to be saved before doing so.
Note: When you’ve finished editing, click on the OK button in the bottom
right to go back to the Country Data screen, then click OK again to go back to
the Editor itself.
Tip! It is wise to save your changes on a regular basis.
2 236 @
2.4.7. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Unit Build Data
Here you can set Unit Build Limits for each unit type for each country. They
can be set from -1 to 255. If set to -1 then no number will appear in the Build
Limit, and the unit type will not appear in the Purchase screen during a game.
Note: Build limits do not restrict the number of units that can be placed on
the map at the start of a campaign. Thus it is possible, if desired, to have units
on the map that cannot be rebuilt once they have been destroyed, an example
being the fortress Defenses controlled by both the Union and Confederacy at
the start of the game.
2.4.7.1. Unit Name Lists

In this section on the right of the screen you can add/amend the unit names for
all unit types for all countries.
Units with these names will then be available for deployment directly onto
the map in the Editor, or for adding to the Purchase and Deployment Queues,
or simply to be purchased in game. With HQ units you can set their Command
Ratings from 1 to 10.
Select the country on the left whose Build List you wish to edit. Then select
the relevant unit type, add a name in the field at the top right called Name:
Click Add/Edit and the new name will appear in the List: box. Names may be
amended or deleted from the list by clicking Remove near the bottom of the
screen.
Note: During a game, renaming units is possible providing a unit of that
country and type doesn’t already have that name.
Tip: By setting build limits at the 255 maximum you would effectively have
a game with no limits.
2.4.8. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Unit Cost Data

Set unit cost from 0 to 9999 MPPs by unit type for each individual country.
All unit costs represent their costs without any research upgrades applied.
2 237 @
2.4.9. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Production Delay Data
Here you can set the time it will take for new units to be ready for deployment
from when they are purchased. This can be set to either Turns or Months using
the buttons at the bottom left.
If set to Turns, the delay can be from 0 to 365 Turns for each unit type for
each individual country. If set to Months, then from 0 to 60.
2.4.10. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Combat Target Data

You can customize the Combat Target Values for any units in a campaign,
changing any of their values for attack, defense, movement etc.
Attack and Defense values can be set to range from 0 to 10 by unit and
resource type for each individual country, while most General Combat Target
Values can range from 0 to 25. Exceptions to the latter are:
§ The number of Interceptions, Escorts, Attacks can be set to a maximum

of 2.
§ Min Shells and Max Shells can vary from 1 to 10 for applicable artillery
unit types.
§ De-Entrenchment can vary from 0 – 8.
§ De-Moralization can range from 0 – 100%.
With Anti-Aircraft units, their Intercept Range is the range at which they will
attempt to shoot down attacking enemy aircraft. The Number of Interceptions
determines the maximum number of enemy air attacks they can attempt to
fire at in any one turn.
Loss Evasion in Land and Naval Combat can be set from 0 – 100%, with
different values applied if desired for attacking and defending. Note that this
is the % chance that this unit type will suffer no losses at all when attacking or
defending.
In the Extra area you can set the Raid Multiplier in MPPs for unit types
capable of raiding (naval units and bombers), and Enemy Fighting Spirit Losses
(Per Raid). The latter is used to inflict a penalty per Raider on the Fighting Spirit
of a Convoy recipient. For example, for every Union Gunboat that does at least
1 MPP damage to a Confederate convoy route, the Confederacy will also lose
2 238 @
8 FS points. The Raid Multiplier (MPPs) can be set to a maximum of 100, and
the Enemy Fighting Spirit Losses (Per Raid) can be set to a maximum of 5,000.
Lastly, the Target Type is shown. As combat is resolved between the
competing Attack and Defense Values by Target Type, it is recommended to
familiarize yourself with them a little, so that the values you assign will be most
applicable for your campaign.
Note: All values in this area represent their values without any research
upgrades applied. Please see the Research section for additional details
regarding how higher technology levels affect Combat Target Values.
2.4.10.1. Apply Data

At the bottom of the screen you’ll notice that between the Restore Defaults and
OK button there is one called Apply Data. This tool enables you to effectively
apply the settings for one country to another. This can really speed up your
editing so be sure to try it out!
From the Combat Target Data screen select a country whose Combat Target
Values you would like to apply to another. Click on Apply Data.
Note that the selected country is shown right at the top of the newly opened
Dialog Box, e.g. Apply Current Data (UK γ).
Select countries on the left hand side that you would like to have the data
applied to, and then select the unit type(s) on the right that will receive the
same statistics as the selected country. If every country and/or unit type is to
have the same Combat Target Values, then you can use the Select All buttons
at the bottom.
The Apply Data function works in this way throughout the Editor, allowing
data from one country to be applied to others.
2.4.11. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Research

You can set the research values for each individual Major country for each
research type. Select a Major on the left whose research values and costs you
wish to view and/or edit.
The Current Research level, Maximum Research level, current Chits
Assigned, and Maximum Chits Assignable may be set from 0 to 5. The cost of
2 239 @
each research chit can be set from 0 to 1000 MPPs in increments of 5 MPPs for
each category. The Maximum Research MPP investment is set at the bottom of
the screen, and it can be set from 0 to 10,000 MPPs.
The cost of research chits already invested is automatically shown in the
Current Research MPP field to the right of the Maximum Research MPP field,
and this updates itself if more are invested.
If your campaign has the setting in place for research chits to remain
invested in an area after technology advances are achieved*, you may wish to
increase the research cost per chit invested.
*This is effected by unticking the Consumable Research Chits button by
going to Campaign γ Edit Campaign Data γ Advanced. If ticked then one
research chit is consumed whenever a research advance is achieved.
The Apply Data button works in exactly the same way as it does for Combat
Target Values (see above) allowing you to transfer the settings from one
country to others.
Tip! By setting Max Level values at 0 you can effectively block research
in particular areas, while by setting the Maximum Research at 0 MPP for a
Major you can effectively prevent it from performing any research. And if you
would rather there was no research at all in your campaign, go to Campaign γ
Edit Campaign Data γ Advanced and untick the Research button under
Preferences in the bottom left.
2.4.11.1. Advanced Research Options

By clicking on the Advanced tab in the bottom right, it is possible to fine tune the
increments that each level of research will provide. This provides a large amount
of flexibility so that different countries can have different abilities. For example,
each country’s increment per research level attained in Production Technology may
be set from 5 to 100%, and for Industrial Technology from 5 to 100%.
The option to set Research Progression (Per Chit) only applies to Majors, so do
not change any while you have a Minor country selected as doing so will not
affect anything in game.
Minors’ armed forces can be set to be Upgradeable by selecting the Minor
on the left hand side and ensuring that the Minors button in the top middle
2 240 @
is ticked. They will then be able to upgrade in line with the research success
of their Parent Major and their own upgrade limits. The cost of upgrading
relative to the cost of upgrading its Parent Major is set using the Relative Cost
(%) button.
In the top right is a box entitled Research Sharing (Increases Catch Up Bonus).
This is where you can set the ability for fully mobilized Major countries to
share research. If you select a Major then the drop down box will display all the
friendly Majors that this Major could potentially share research with.
If the box is ticked then it will share research with that country. Sharing
can be set to work one way, or both. For it to work both ways, e.g. between the
UK and France, then both countries will have to have each others’ box ticked.
Moving to the central area of the Advanced tab, General Research Increments
can be set here as follows:
§ Subs – here you can set the Initial Dive % chance of a Submarine with no
upgrades to dive. The Dive Increments are the increase in chance of the
Submarine diving when it is attacked, with every upgrade of Buoyancy
Tanks that it receives.
§ Anti-Submarine Warfare – The % set here will be subtracted from the
Submarine’s % chance of diving, so its effect will be to reduce the chance
of the Submarine diving. It is generally recommended to have Initial
ASW set at zero. ASW Increments represent the increase per level of
Anti-Submarine Warfare research that will be deducted from enemy
Submarines’ chances of diving when they are attacked.
§ Note: ASW has been set to zero in the default campaigns, and we
strongly recommend you do the same if designing a campaign set in the
Civil War era. In this game, ASW is tied to the technology slot filled by
Fort Modernization, which will need to be replaced if you wish to include
ASW in a custom campaign.
§ Resource Bombardment – here you can set the % chance that a unit
that targets resources (e.g. Monitors) can also hit a unit that might be
occupying the resource. This % can be increased through upgrading the
unit’s primary attack research category, e.g. Naval Weapons.
2 241 @
§ Increments % – here you can fine tune the % increases that Majors will
benefit from by researching these four categories. These refer to the:
§ % bonus to your research that can be gained from Spying & Intelligence,
or the decrease in your opponent’s bonus.
§ The decrease in costs gained by Logistics research.
§ The decrease in unit production and reinforcement costs from
Production Technology.
§ The increase in home country economic production from Industrial
Technology research.
§ Accuracy Loss Beyond Base Range (Per Hex) – this enables you to make
Artillery firing at longer ranges lose effectiveness the further away the
target is. This can be useful if research upgrades will increase Artillery
ranges, as it may not be desirable for them to have the same potency at
(say) a range of 4 hexes that they have at a range of 1 hex.
Note: If you change the benefits that any category provides, it will be best
to update the Research Tool-tips too for your campaign. To do this, open up
the game’s official localization.txt file which can be found within the main
installation folder.
Search for #GAME_RESEARCH_MENU_TEXT and copy the relevant lines
that will need to be changed to your own campaign’s localization.txt file, and
amend the details within your file. See Customize your Campaign for further
details.
2.4.11.2. Upgrade Data (Per Research Level)

When in the Advanced tab for Research, click on the Upgrades button in the
bottom right. Here you can fine tune specific research categories, costs and
the maximum number of levels that each unit type can gain from research.
These can be set independently for each Major, and their respective Minors
will automatically have the same settings.
Each unit type can be assigned up to 3 research categories. If you have 3
set and wish to remove or change one, tick the Disabled? box relevant to the
category. This will remove that one, and if you desire you can then click the
2 242 @
tickbox next to the one you want to add from the list below, then tick the Select
as replacement box.
You can also re-order the categories as needed by using the Up/Down
buttons in the top right.
Important: Resources can only be upgraded with Lighthouses, and with the
other unit types, be careful not to apply research categories that really don’t
apply to them. For instance, giving an infantry unit the ability to upgrade
with Naval Weapons is not likely to help that unit, because changing research
categories will not change the fundamental nature of the unit being upgraded.
2.4.11.3. Upgrade Increments

To change the specific benefits units receive from upgrades, click on the
Upgrade Increments button at the bottom of the screen. Select the country,
unit type and upgrade category you wish to amend. You can set the exact
increment amounts per category, unit type and country. There are limits, e.g.
Attack and Defense values can only increment by a maximum of 10 per level,
spotting ranges and Action Points by 25.
Tip! Restore Defaults and Apply Data work in this area too, and the latter may
be especially useful here. Click OK when done.
2.4.11.4. Automatic Increments

To change the benefits Majors receive from Automatic Upgrades, click on the
Automatic Increments button in the bottom right of the Advanced tab. Here
you can select the specific upgrade types by country and unit type, as well as
setting the increments per level. The customization this allows is very wide-
ranging, so take care that too many upgrades won’t combine to inadvertently
turn a unit into a really powerful super-unit!
Note: Increases in unit Build Limits from Automatic Research will not show
in the Editor, but they will show in the game itself.
2.4.12. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Diplomacy

Customizing the diplomatic options for a campaign can be accomplished from
the Edit Country Data dialog and selecting the Edit Diplomacy option.
2 243 @
Set the maximum number of diplomacy chits between 0 and 100 for each
individual Major country.
Set Influence costs from 0 and 1000 MPPs for four different types of
diplomatic action:
§ Friendly Minor
§ Enemy/Neutral Minor
§ Friendly Major
§ Enemy Major
The Influence % Per Chit is the chance every turn of achieving a diplomatic success,
according to the number of chits invested. This can be set from 0 to 100.
The Effect Range % is where you can set the % increase in Mobilization
achieved by a diplomatic success. The left hand number sets the minimum
increase in Mobilization, and the right the maximum.
The Minor Influence Bonus % (Per Hit) is the chance per diplomatic success
that a Minor will receive an extra boost in its Mobilization % beyond the
minimum and maximum set in the top row of the Effect Range % area. This
chance of a bonus can also be set from 0 to 100.
Example: The default influence is 5% per chit with an effect range of
7-10%. If influence against a Minor is successful during a turn, the default
Minor Bonus provides a 10% chance that the actual effect of the diplomatic
breakthrough will be 27-40%, as the effect range of the bonus is set at 20-30%.
In the Diplomatic Status box you can set the initial number of assigned
diplomatic chits for each individual country, as chosen from the Select Country
list on the left. Up to the maximum investable limit for each Major can be
invested against a country, providing that country doesn’t have a limit on the
number of chits that can be invested in it. This can be set in the Diplomatic Chit
Assignment Limit (If Applicable) area.
Bear in mind when setting the initial investments that the net % chance of
a diplomatic success is the cumulative effect of all the chits invested against it
by both sides.
Tick the Block Investment Towards This Country? Box if you wish to prevent
a Major from conducting diplomacy against a selected country. This also
prevents players from declaring war on that country.
2 244 @
Click on the OK button when done.
Just as with research, the option exists for diplomacy chits to remain
invested in an area after a diplomatic breakthrough has been achieved, and if
you do use this option, you may wish to increase the diplomacy cost per chit
invested. To do this go to Campaign γ Edit Campaign Data γ Advanced and
untick the Consumable Diplomacy Chits button.
Note: The maximum number of diplomacy chits cannot be less than the
currently assigned chits. A warning message will prompt you to reduce
assigned chits first.
2.4.13. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Production Queue

Here you can select units by country and by type for arrival once the date
specified has been reached.
Strength, experience and available research levels can be set for them all.
The Full Research option means that the unit will arrive fully upgraded with
whatever applicable technologies have been researched by its production date.
If Full Research is selected then it won’t be possible to set individual research
levels if any are available at the start of the campaign.
Unit arrival dates can be set for any date, regardless of the Production Delay
for that unit type. Whether or not the Production Delay option is selected, units
in the Production Queue will arrive once the date specified has been reached.
Note that in American Civil War, units can only deploy in cities, major cities or
capitals by default, however if another resource (e.g. a town) is set here then
that unit will still be able to deploy at the chosen location.
A Destination Resource can be set where the unit will deploy. If this
Destination falls to the enemy then the unit will deploy at the next best
resource.
If you want to edit something that is already in the Production Queue, click
on the unit and you can edit its arrival destination, strength, research etc. If
any features are grayed out then they cannot be edited.
Click on ‘Add/Edit’ at the bottom of the screen when done, and it will add/
update the item on the Production Queue to have the new settings.
2 245 @
Note: All new units will deploy with a supply value of 10, though during
the end turn sequence the supply of land and air units will then be adjusted
according to their proximity to supply sources.
2.4.14. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Strength/Reinforce/

Reformation Data
In this area you can set a number of unit specific qualities on a country by
country basis.
Select the country and unit type you would like to edit. You can amend its
Maximum Strength, with values between 1 and 10 being allowed.
Reinforcement and Elite Reinforcement costs can be set as a % of the unit’s
base cost in MPPs (i.e. before any research upgrades are added) per strength
point they receive as reinforcements. The cost of Elite Reinforcements should
generally be set at least as high, if not higher than normal Reinforcements as
they represent the incorporation of good quality troops within the unit.
The Reformation area signifies whether or not the unit can be rebuilt if it
is destroyed. If the button is ticked, then it can be rebuilt but only if it was
destroyed when it had a Minimum Supply value that was at least as high as the
number set in the Min Supply box.
The cost to rebuild the unit after its destruction is the % Reformation Cost,
as a % of the unit’s base cost in MPPs. The % Reformation Delay dictates the
time it will take from paying the MPPs for its reformation and it arriving for
deployment, as a % of the time it would take to create a new unit of this type.
2.4.15. Campaign γ Edit Country Data γ Edit Resource Data

Here you can set the economic value of all resources by country, from 0 to
10 MPPs per strength point for every resource type. MPP values per strength
point can be set to include quarters, e.g. 0.25, 0.50 and 0.75 as well as whole
numbers.
Note that changing the MPP resource value for a City will affect the
economic penalties from Convoy raiding as described in Chapter 6 on
Movement and Combat.
2 246 @
The Fighting Spirit (FS) value of resources can be set here too, with the value
set being the FS points that a Major will gain every turn that it occupies a resource
of this type belonging to an active Major. This value automatically equals the per
turn penalty that the active Major that has lost the resource suffers. The FS value
of these resources can be set on a country by country basis.
The % damage that a resource will suffer from Scorched Earth when it
changes hands is also set here. Minimum and maximum values can be set so
that there is variability in the damage suffered by resources when they are
captured or liberated.
2.4.16. Campaign γ Edit Major Country  IDs Data

There can be a maximum of 10 Majors in your campaign, and you can select
these from any of the countries in the Country List on the left hand side.
To make a country a Major, providing the limit of 10 hasn’t already been
reached, select it on the left hand side and click on the >> button.
Click on Set Display Source on the right to select which set of Bitmaps it
will use in the campaign. This may save any Bitmaps having to be amended if
they can use those belonging to a pre-existing default set. For instance if you
want two Majors to use the same unit sprites in game, then by assigning the
same Bitmap source they will do so.
Each Major is given an Index number, starting at 1. Use the Up and Down
buttons to put the Majors in order, with all Confederate Majors followed by all
the Union ones.
Index 1 is automatically the first Confederate Major in the First Confederate
Major ID Index. Set the First Union Major ID Index button to the first Union Major.
Important: It is crucial that all Confederate Majors are listed before any
Union ones.
You can remove any countries from being Majors by selecting them in the
Major Country IDs list and clicking on the << button to remove them.
Click on the OK button when done.
2.4.17. Campaign γ Edit Weather Data

Here you can edit Weather Data and set Weather Zone values.
2 247 @
Each area of the map requires a Weather Zone according to its climate,
so to add a new Weather Zone, the first thing to do is to click on Set Climate
and choose between Temperate, Frozen, Semi-Arid and Arid. Now give your
Weather Zone a name, e.g. Florida.
In the Primary and Secondary Seasonal Effects (Land), and the Seasonal
Effects (Sea) boxes, you can set the % chance per turn of the weather being of a
certain type, in accordance with the season.
For example, it could have a 60% chance of being clear in a winter turn, 10%
of being Mud and 30% of being Frozen. A Weather Zone can include both land
and sea effects, as it can cover as wide an area as appropriate.
Once you’ve named your Weather Zone and set its effects, click Add at the
bottom left. The new Weather Zone will appear in the Zone List on the right.
To edit a Weather Zone, select it from the Zone List, make any desired
change, and then click Edit/Update to save your changes.
To delete a Weather Zone, select it from the Zone List on the right and click
Remove at the bottom.
To close the Weather Zone Data dialog, click OK.
The cumulative trigger percentages for effects cannot exceed 100% for each
season. The default seasonal effect is Clear or Calm if less than 100% is entered
for the trigger values. Even so, it is recommended to ensure that the Trigger %
for all items within each category add up to 100 as a way of checking that the
settings are as intended.
In addition to the four normal seasons, four separate sub-seasons are
provided for Late Spring (May 1 to June 20), Early Fall (September 21 to October
14), Late Fall (December 1 to December 20), and Late Winter (March 1 to March
20). These don’t need to be filled in, but if they are then their Trigger % will
apply for the periods in question. If they aren’t filled in then the Trigger % for
the main seasons will apply during these periods.
2.4.18. Campaign γ Edit Weather Data γ Advanced

The Advanced Weather Data screen can be used to advise the game engine
which Weather Zones border each other. If this is done then it will make for
smoother transitions between different Weather Zones.
2 248 @
For example, if a Weather Zone has a temperate climate and currently has
snow, for any adjacent temperate zones where mud is possible its weather will
be set to mud, whereas otherwise the latter might have been clear.
2.4.19. Campaign γ Edit Turn/Economic Data

In this area, the Turn Length can be set to be Seasonal, Daily or Numbered.
Seasonal turn lengths are set by default to one week in Summer, two weeks
in Spring and Fall, and four weeks in Winter, but these can be adjusted.
Daily turn lengths can be set between 1 and 365 days.
Numbered turns are for campaigns where the date will not change, and
instead the campaign will last for as many turns as are listed here, unless any
Victory Conditions are achieved prior to then.
Select Turns to be Alternate or Simultaneous. Alternate turns advance the
date on each side’s turn, while Simultaneous turns use the same date for both
sides’ turns.
Under MPP Collection, if you tick the None box then resources will not
provide any income to either side.
Ticking Normalized will equalize production capability over the course of
the year if the campaign is set to have seasonal variations in turn lengths. This
isn’t used in the default campaigns that come with the game but it can be used
with campaigns using seasonal turns to increase production in winter turns
and decrease it in summer turns. MPP collection would then be adjusted for
Normalized production. All income from resources, including from Convoys
are then adjusted to determine the final total of MPPs. Note that income or
expenditure due to Decision Events will not be affected by selecting this option.
Caution: A simple change from Alternate to Simultaneous turns will
essentially double the number of turns each year, doubling economic production
in the process. Beware that this would significantly change a campaign unless
costs are increased or resource values are decreased accordingly.
2.4.20. Campaign γ Edit Defense  Bonus Data

Here you can set or amend the bonuses that defending units receive from the
terrain and resources that they are in. The higher the value, the harder it will
be for the attacking unit to defeat the defending unit.
2 249 @
Each terrain/resource type can have different Defense Bonuses set
according to all the different attacking unit types, ranging from -1 to 8. The
negative defense bonus means that land units occupying that hex type have
their attack values halved, so in effect it becomes a Defense Bonus for the unit
not in this terrain type when it is attacked by a unit that is in this terrain type.
Terrain and resource data are generic and apply to all unit types for all
countries.
Note: The Resource map layer takes precedence over the Terrain map layer
for a hex’s Defense Bonus. So a City on a Mountain will only get the Defense
Bonus for a City, not for a Mountain or for a Mountain plus a City.
2.4.21. Campaign γ Edit Movement  Cost Data

In the left side of this area, entitled Set Movement Costs, you can set additional
movement costs for each terrain type. These additional costs can be from 0 to
8 Action Points, or they can be set as impassable by using the downwards scroll
arrow. You can also set additional movement cost penalties for crossing enemy
rivers. Movement costs are generic and apply to all unit types for all countries.
Clear hexes default to costing 1 Action Point to move into or out of, so they
aren’t included in the editable list. For Terrain types that you would like to
cost no more than clear hexes, set their extra cost values to zero. Otherwise a
positive value signifies the additional Action Point cost of entering or leaving
this hex type.
These editable movement costs start at River and end at Storms, two thirds
of the way down the second column. The remainder of the categories in the
second column represent MPP costs as a proportion of a unit’s Purchase cost
for operating or transporting the unit. Note that operating air units costs
double that of land units.
The three Fixed Cost categories at the bottom are set MPP costs that will
be charged for carrying out any of these activities. If MPP costs are set here, as
well as in the % costs sections above them, then both will be charged. So you
can set either or both to apply, in accordance with the following formula:
Total Cost = Unit Cost * % Cost + Fixed Cost
The Action Points Multiplier for Forced March and Naval Cruise can be
edited in the bottom left hand corner.
2 250 @
2.4.22. 1. Editing Zone of Control Effects
On the right we have an editable list where units can be set as Front Line,
Support, or exerting No Zone of Control. You can also edit the exact parameters
of Front Line and Support units to determine the Action Point penalty for
enemy units coming within their Zone of Control, and the number of units
required to be adjacent to these enemy units for the Zone of Control to have
any effect.
Examples:
§ If Front Line units impose a penalty of 1, and 1 unit is required to effect the
penalty, then the presence of any front line units will impose that penalty.
§ If Front Line units impose a penalty of 1, and 2 units are required to
effect the penalty, then the presence of 2 or more front line units will
impose that penalty.
§ If Front Line units impose a penalty of 1, and 2 units are required to
effect the penalty, while 4 Second Line units are required to exert the
same penalty, then:
§ 1 Front Line unit will not impose the penalty.
§ 1-3 Second Line units will not impose the penalty.
§ But 2 Front Line, or 1 Front Line and 3 Second Line units will impose
the penalty.
2.4.23. Campaign γ Edit Combat Data
In this section the following things can be edited:
§ Experience Point Allotment from combat.

§ Max Unit Experience.
§ Combat Losses (essentially the die rolls that modify combat results).
§ Naval Supply Losses from combat.
§ Hidden and Prepared Attack Bonuses.
§ The Penalties for attacking across watercourses.
§ The % chance of Amphibious units suffering casualties on landing.
§ The chance of units retreating when attacked, according to the position
they occupy.
§ The distance retreating units can potentially retreat.
2 251 @
All of these things can be edited for each unit type, so that for instance,
experience gains for artillery can be different to those for infantry and tank
units, or cavalry units can be set to retreat more hexes than infantry.
2.4.24. Campaign γ Edit Naval Damage Data

This section is where you can amend the % chance of all types of naval unit
receiving some sort of damage when there are storms at sea. The damage can
either be in strength point losses, unit morale losses, or both.
As the minimum and maximum Strength and/or Morale Losses can be set
to zero, this allows for full customization, whereby some unit types could be
made invulnerable to storms, while other types can be set to suffer.
2.4.25. Campaign γ Edit Morale Data

Here the morale penalties and bonuses that units receive in the following
situations can be edited:
§ When a friendly country is liberated, with separate editable entries for
land and naval units (air units as classed as land units).
§ When a friendly country surrenders, with separate editable entries for
land and naval units (air units as classed as land units).
§ The unit morale penalty for Operating (Rail Moving) a unit.
§ The unit morale penalty for using Forced March.
§ The unit morale penalty for swapping units.
§ The initial unit morale of new units.
2.4.26. Campaign γ Edit Penalties/ Bonuses Data

Here you can set combat penalties and bonuses that units will receive simply
by being in a certain terrain or resource type.
For example, Partisans can be set to have increased defensive bonuses if
they are occupying Mountains or Forests. Conversely, Cavalry units could be
set to have lower defensive abilities if they are defending an urban area against
attacks by Soft or Infantry target types.
Tip! There are innumerable options here, but be careful to ensure that
players will understand them, otherwise confusion could arise.
2 252 @
2.4.27. Campaign γ Edit AI Scripts
See Chapter 3: Scripts, the AI and General Advice
2.4.28. Campaign γ Edit Event Scripts

See Chapter 3: Scripts, the AI and General Advice
2.4.29. Campaign γ Replicating Layers

The following four functions copy the layer in question to the new one.
§ Replicate Road Layer To Rail Layer

§ Replicate Rail Layer To Road Layer
§ Replicate Resource Names To Text Layer
§ Replicate Text Layer To Resource Names
The aim of this is to save you time in designing a map, so that you can for
instance, just draw the rail network, replicate it to the Road Layer, and then all
you need to do is adjust the Road Layer if you don’t want it to be an identical
copy of the Rail Layer.
The Replicate Resource Names To Text Layer function will not overwrite any
pre-existing Text Layer entries.
In contrast, the Replicate Text Layer to Resource Names function will overwrite
pre-existing Resource names, so if you update the Text Layer and then want
to update the Resource Layer with the new name at the Resource location it
will do so.
2.5. Go To γ Select Map Position

Input the co-ordinates of where you would like to be taken to on the map, and
click OK.
2.6. View
2.6.1. View γ Mini-Map
Toggle the mini-map on/off. Clicking on the mini-map is a very useful way of
moving quickly to a different location on the map.
2 253 @
2.6.2. View γ Text
This turns the Text Layer On/Off.
Turning the Text Layer off enables you to see the map in its natural state,
which can be useful when trying to fine tune the position of an element, or
checking that something is as aesthetically pleasing as possible.
Note that if the Text Layer is on, the text will temporarily disappear when
you scroll the map.
2.6.3. View γ Sprite Indexes

Every image sprite relating to the graphics used in the Editor has a sprite
index number. You can turn these on for the current Layer you have selected
by clicking on View γ Sprite Indexes. This can be very useful as an aid in fine
tuning your design.
2.6.4. View γ Grid

Toggle the hex style grid on/off.
2.6.5. View γ Borders

Toggle national borders on/off.
2.6.6. View γ All Layers

Toggle all map layers on/off.
With this set to off, the map only displays the layers defined by the current
edit mode. This action is dependent on the hierarchy of the map layer selected.
For example, the Edit Terrain Layer Mode will only display the hex, river and
terrain layers, but no Resources, units or weather.
Selecting the Resource layer and then using this function to turn off other
layers is very useful, as it will show the map pretty much how it will appear in
the game without any units showing.
2.6.7. View γ National Colors

You can toggle national colors on/off. This is useful for checking the look of
the map as some players may play with National Colors on, while others might
2 254 @
turn them off, and ensuring the map looks as good as possible in both styles
is useful.
2.6.8. View γ Double Selection Columns

Here you can turn Double Selection Columns on/off. This is a very useful tool
when editing as it doubles the options showing on the screen of the currently
selected layer.
Tip! Right clicking on the map while in Draw Mode will take you to the
currently selected sprite of the currently selected layer, in the right hand
column of sprites.
2.7. Preferences
Border Style – Select White, Orange or Black for national borders.
Unit Style – Select 3-D or NATO counter styles.
Unit Counter Style – This only applies when 3-D units are shown, and is a
simple on/off toggle.
Unit Research Level Style – Switch between the two ways of showing unit
upgrades, either as incremental icons or as numbers.
2.8. Language
Interface Text – Choose between English and Spanish.
2.9. Mods
Here you can select and de-select any installed Mods.
2.10. Help
Pressing Help Topics... opens an online Help file.
2.11. Menu Buttons - Second Row

Many of these are shortcuts to items included in the first row, so for these their
explanations can be found in the above section.
They are listed in order, starting from the left, as follows:
2 255 @
§ New
§ Open Default Campaign
§ Open User Campaign
§ Save
§ Undo
§ Redo
§ Lock Scroll
§ Unlock Scroll
§ Draw
§ Select Item(s)
§ Remove Item(s)
§ Edit Hex Layer
§ Edit Terrain Layer
§ Edit River Layer
§ Edit Road Layer
§ Edit Rail Layer
§ Edit Resource Layer
§ Edit Symbol Layer
§ Edit Text Layer
§ Edit Unit Layer
§ Edit Weather Layer
§ View Mini-Map
§ Toggle Text
§ Toggle Sprite Indexes on Map
§ Toggle Grid
§ Toggle Borders
§ View All Layers
§ View National Colors
§ View Double Selection Columns
2.11.1. Zoom In/Out

The two buttons on the extreme top right are zoom functions that can be
useful to see how your design looks on a grander scale, and then you can zoom
back in to see things at their normal level.
2 256 @
3. SCRIPTS, THE AI &
GENERAL ADVICE
3.1. Editing Event Scripts
To edit Event scripts, select Campaign and then Edit Event Scripts from the
Main Menu bar.
Select the script to edit and then click Open/Edit. Your default text editor
should open with the script file. Notepad, WordPad and Notepad++ which
all support UTF-8 character encoding should work fine (the game supports
Unicode (UTF-8) and over 650 languages for modding).
Each script file may contain multiple events, separated by a blank line.
After editing the script, save the text file and then go back to the Script
window in the Editor. You will notice that the name of the script type you have
edited now has an * next to it, and this is to show that the script needs to be
updated in order to check that all the scripts in the file are correctly formatted.
3.1.1. Updating Scripts

Click Update in the Script window. If the scripts are correctly formatted,
after a little while (the time taken will depend on how many scripts there are)
the update should complete. If it is successful, the * will disappear and each
separate event name will appear in the Event List box as a reference for the
selected script.
If there are any errors, the Editor should give you an error message as well as
some detail including indication of the problem and the affected line number.
To correct the error, go to the relevant line number in the text file, check and
correct the issue, and then repeat the Update process. Keep repeating the
process until the error asterisk no longer appears in the Script dialog.
There are two other Update buttons:
§ Update All may be used to force a manual update of all scripts.
2 257 @
§ Update * which should be used if you are confident that your script
changes don’t include any formatting errors. This will update them but
if any are incorrectly formatted it won’t highlight the specific location
of the error.
It is not necessary to update every time you make a change, but you must do
so before playing your campaign for these Event scripts to work properly. The
Editor will also prompt you to update scripts as you make changes on the map,
and the same advice applies: only update when necessary, i.e. before playing
your campaign.
The event scripts for individual campaigns are saved in their Events sub-
directory.
Example: The 1861 Blue and Gray campaign has a sub-directory named _1861
Blue and Gray. This is where the specific scripts for 1861 Blue and Gray are stored.
These files may also be copied or edited directly with any text editor, though
editing the originals will amend the default campaign.
3.1.2. Script Templates

The basic structures for each type of event script can be found in the game’s
Templates folder (do not amend the contents of this file). When you save a
new campaign, it will save with these script templates in its new folder. If you
open an existing campaign and click on File γ Save As, then the scripts from
the campaign you have open will be saved into your new campaign’s folder.
3.1.3. Script Flags

Scripts can be turned on or off using the #FLAG command line. If you want
the event to be active in the campaign then set #FLAG= 1, otherwise set it to
be #FLAG= 0. This can be useful in testing, or for leaving optional scripts in a
campaign that players can turn on or off as they desire in the game’s options.
3.1.4. Failsafe Dates

These are present for use in some script types, e.g. Unit, Belligerence and
Resource. The way they work is that if all other conditions required for the
2 258 @
event have been reached apart from the Trigger %, then once the Failsafe Date
is reached then the event will fire if it didn’t fire before. If you don’t want the
event to fire unless the Trigger % is reached, then set the Failsafe Date to be
beyond the campaign’s end date.
3.1.5. Condition Positions

If you don’t want a Condition Position to be involved in the trigger for a script,
then set it as follows:
dummy condition position (always satisfied)
#CONDITION_POSITION= 0,0 [0,0] [0,0] [0] [0]
Script Types
A general description of the different types of events found in the game is
provided below.
3.1.6. Convoy
This event transfers MPPs from a source Port in an owner country to a
destination Port in a recipient country. The owner and recipient countries must
have similar leanings (i.e. they must both be pro-Union or pro-Confederate).
In addition, both source and destination Ports must have a strength
level of at least 5 in order to have a fully functioning Convoy. If the owner is
a Minor, then the recipient must be its parent Major. The trigger values for
both countries are related to their Mobilization Value. A percentage value
establishes the amount of MPPs transferable via Convoy, subject to possible
seasonal reductions and Convoy raiding.
Multiple scripts may be set for the same #SENDER_ID= and/or
#RECIPIENT_ID= to allow for several Convoys between countries. However,
there can only be one active Convoy at a time from each country. Should a
destination Port no longer be available due to enemy occupation or having a
strength level less than 5, then the engine will search for an alternative Convoy
script that it can use.
Convoy routes can be defined by setting Waypoints. Convoys start at a
Source Port, pass through each Waypoint in the order specified, and end at
a Destination Port. A path of valid Sea or Land/Sea hexes between Waypoints
2 259 @
is required. The game code will calculate the most direct path between
Waypoints, and the Convoy will be marked with arrows to show its direction.
Waypoints can be set to include hexes on the edge of the map, with the
next Waypoint being a sea hex also on the edge. This enables a convoy to
“sail” beyond the edge of the map for a portion of its journey, e.g. sailing
around Africa from the Atlantic to the Red Sea, where only Northern Africa
is represented on the map. When doing so, Waypoints along the bottom most
hexes need to be set to an “odd” x position in order to function properly.
If the Convoy route passes through a friendly Port while en route to its
destination, and the Port is either damaged to below strength 5 or captured,
then the Convoy will be disrupted.
For Convoys between Major powers, players have the option to decide how
much will be transferred each turn. The transfer amount remains locked in
until changed by the player via the Convoy Map, where an up and down arrow
for the selected Convoy can be used to adjust the transfer value.
3.1.7. Resource
This event is used to mobilize resources. Resource positions included in these
scripts will be inactive at the start of the campaign, with supply and MPP values
of zero. Only when the Resource script’s trigger condition is satisfied will they
commence production, with their strength values and MPP values relative to
their strength, rising by 1 point per turn.
3.1.8. Supply
This event causes resource positions to suffer strength reductions. Among
other potential triggers, supply events can be set to be seasonal.
3.1.9. Strength
This event can be used to generate Strength and Morale losses for units within
a specified range. For example, this event can be used to simulate the effect of
yellow fever epidemics on American forces in the Caribbean, or due to large
scale desertions.
2 260 @
3.1.10. Unit
This event causes new units to appear in destination resource positions, either
in response to a Decision or when a trigger condition is satisfied. Note that the
new units will arrive with either no research if #FULL_RESEARCH= 0, or their
current maximum research levels already applied if #FULL_RESEARCH= 1.
Unit scripts set to fire when a country reaches 100% Mobilization will
immediately deploy if the relevant country is declared war upon and all other
triggers are met.
There is a Private setting that can be used to make it so that only the owner’s
side will see any mention of a unit deploying. This is to avoid giving the enemy
information that they shouldn’t have.
Defenses are the only unit type that can be set to arrive at any friendly hex.
All others have to arrive at friendly Resources. Note that units can be set to
deploy at ANY resource via script, not just cities or capitals as is the case when
they are purchased.
Multiple #DESTINATION_POSITION= are supported, simply add further
ones beneath so that they will be alternatives if the first one isn’t available
when the units are due to deploy.
All units need to be able to be placed at a desired #DESTINATION_
POSITION and if not the engine will move on to the next one on the list, if
there is one. If they all fail, i.e. not all units can be placed at at least one of the
#DESTINATION_POSITION=, then the event fails.
3.1.11. Free Unit

This event will allow Land and Air units of a surrendering country to continue
fighting when their own country surrenders, providing they are outside their
own borders and in territory controlled by a friendly power. Naval units of the
surrendering country may become free wherever they are.
Free units will now be controlled by the receiving country, who is
responsible for their reinforcements and upgrades.
2 261 @
3.1.12. Partisan
This event triggers partisan activity at specified map locations. These locations
can be either resources, including Mine and Oil hexes, or terrain elements.
Partisans cannot trigger in clear hexes.
Partisan activity can either be simply disruptive, whereby resources receive
strength losses due to their activity, or actual Partisan units can appear on the map.
The field #ADD_UNIT= can accept the following values:
(values range [0, 2]; False= 0; True= 1; True (if <= build limit)= 2
If True= 0 then no unit will be deployed, if True = 1 then a unit will deploy,
and if True= 2 then a unit will only deploy if the Partisan Build Limit has not
already been reached. This means that you can prevent excessive Partisan
units being deployed if you feel that such a circumstance could arise.
3.1.13. Territory
This event causes territory to be transferred from one country to another when
triggered, and it can also be used to have new states appear on the map.
The first #MAP_POSITION= will be chosen as the new Capital if this is used
to form a new state.
The #REMOVE field allows you to specify if you would like to remove enemy
units from within the territory when the event fires.
If the #COUNTRY_ID and #RECIPIENT_ID are the same, TERRITORY
scripts can be used to move a nation’s capital (for example, the Confederacy
moving its capital from Montgomery AL to Richmond VA). To do this, the first
#MAP_POSITION should be the location of the new capital, and the second
#MAP_POSITION the current capital. Note that this will set the old capital to
be an alternate capital.
3.1.14. Annexation
This event causes a whole country’s territory to be annexed by another. The
annexed country will not produce any partisans to fight the country that
annexes them. The annexed country’s former Capital will be transformed into
a Primary Supply Center for its new owner, while Primary Supply Centers and
Industrial Centers will retain their former status.
2 262 @
3.1.15. Surrender #1
This event causes a country’s territory to be transferred to another country
when the country losing the territory surrenders.
The transfer of territory may be to a newly created country with a new
Capital, or to the conquering country. This is different than a normal surrender
where the conquering country merely occupies the conquered territory, which
can potentially be liberated at a later date. This event makes the territory an
inherent part of the country that receives it.
This script type can also be used to transfer territory to the surrendering
country itself, and the use of this feature would be to form an active
“Government in exile”, e.g. the British transferring their Capital to Canada in
WWII.
3.1.16. Surrender #2
This event can be used to force the surrender of a given country on a specified
date. An example would be the ability to simulate the defeat of the Apaches in
the Battle of the Apache Pass, to make way for the California Column’s arrival
in New Mexico.
3.1.17. War Entry

This event allows a neutral country to fully mobilize and enter the war when a
specific trigger condition is satisfied.
3.1.18. Mobilization #1
This event allows Declarations of War to trigger neutral countries to have their
Mobilization Values moved towards either the Union or Confederates.
This event allows a neutral country to have its Mobilization Value moved
towards either the Union or Confederates when a specified condition is
satisfied. This Mobilization script type is ideally suited for mobilizing countries
in response to the presence, or absence, of units in a given location, or within
a specified range of a given location.
2 263 @
This event allows a neutral country to have its Mobilization Value moved
towards either the Union or Confederates, either on a set date, when certain
political conditions have been met, or in response to a Decision Event.
This event allows penalties or bonuses to be applied to countries when
Declarations of War are made. Essentially, the purpose of this script is to
punish ahistoric declarations of war, and it can be used to directly punish
or boost a Major’s Fighting Spirit, or to trigger events in the same way that
Decision Events do.
If the #DECISION field has been completed, i.e. with a Decision Number,
then providing the #COUNTRY_ID= is a fully mobilized country when the
Declaration of War is made, any Events that are set to be triggered by the
Decision Number can now fire.
3.1.22. Belligerence
This event is used to set countries at war with each other in certain
circumstances, such as ensuring the UK and Union are at war after the British
recognize the Confederacy.
3.1.23. Loop
This event allows a country’s units to move off-map between start and finish
positions with a specified number of turns to delay completion of the Loop. If
the Loop fails due to the presence of enemy units at the finish positions, then
units will be returned to their start positions. The Loop script will only initiate
on a moving unit’s turn. Units in a Loop will be lost if the parent country
surrenders.
§ If COUNTRY_ID = 0 then all countries of the completed ALIGNMENT_

ID can use the LOOP, i.e. either all Union or all Confederate countries
can use this LOOP.
§ If COUNTRY_ID = 0 and ALIGNMENT_ID = 0 [i.e. Neutral] then any
unit can use the LOOP, i.e. Neutral, Union or Confederate.
2 264 @
§ If COUNTRY_ID is not equal to 0, then only that country can use the
LOOP, and only if that COUNTRY_ID has the matching alignment value
as specified in ALIGNMENT_ID.
Use the Symbol Layer to place a suitable symbol on the map to indicate where
Loops start and finish. These do not have any other effect on play, they are just
there to inform players of the hexes where a Loop starts.
You should also use the Text Layer to add a brief description on the map of
all Loops’ destination and its Delay value, so that players know how long their
units will be off-map when using Loops.
It is best practice to ensure that every Loop has at least 2 finish locations,
unless it is inappropriate in a specific case for there to be more than one.
§ If there is a #FRIENDLY_POSITION= specified (no matter what

position) then the arrival land hex must be friendly controlled.
§ If there is no #FRIENDLY_POSITION= specified, then units using
Loops will be able to arrive and take control of the destination hexes,
even if they are under enemy control.
Note: Starting hexes at sea are not defined as part of any Weather Zone, to
prevent weather effects from interfering with movements.
3.1.24. Victory
This event defines Union and Confederate Victory Conditions based on the
control of map positions, as well as any that might be triggered by Decision
Events. For instance, Decision Events can be used for negotiations to see if one
side has the will to continue the fight, triggering a relevant Victory Condition
if it hasn’t.
3.1.25. Popup
This event displays a text message based on specific trigger conditions or on
or after a specified date. The message is for information only and has no effect
on game play.
The #MESSAGE= field can support the following special characters:
2 265 @
§ %N = newline or carriage return
§ %T = horizontal tab
§ %R = right align text, must be applied at the beginning of a newline,
otherwise ignored
§ %C = center align text, must be applied at the beginning of a newline,
otherwise ignored
§ %B = bold text, must be applied for each word you wish to bold
§ %V = italic text, must be applied for each word you wish to italicize
Multiple #ALIGNMENT_POSITION= can be set, or this field can be left empty

if it isn’t applicable.
There is a Private setting that can be used to make it so that only the event
owner’s side will be aware of a message.
Popup Scripts can also be used to display symbols from the Symbol Layer
on the map, if certain conditions are met, for instance the colored hexes used
to signify Loop locations that can only be used by one side in 1861 Blue and Gray.
This can be done by setting #DISPLAY_STYLE= 2.xx where x is the number of
the image in the Symbol layer. As an example, #DISPLAY_STYLE= 2.7 would
display the 7th image in the Symbol layer.
When this function is used, the #POPUP text will be shown as an on-screen
popup (similar to those seen over convoy lines), when you mouse over the
hexes indicated by #MAP_POSITION in your script.
Viewing PopUp Events in the Editor

Once you’ve added or amended any PopUp Events, providing you Update
the script you can then see these scripts as they would appear in the game by
selecting PopUp and clicking on the View Button that appears in the bottom
right of the screen where you Update the scripts (Campaign → Edit Event Scripts).
If you edit any PopUp scripts while you are viewing them, when you left
click on the viewing panel it will refresh to show you the latest version of the
relevant script.
Any on-map Symbols associated with Popup scripts will automatically
display on the map in the Editor upon Updating the script. If multiple such
2 266 @
scripts are used to display symbols on a single hex, only the one associated with
the latest script in the Popup script file will be visible.
3.1.26. Fighting Spirit

This event is used to add or subtract Fighting Spirit points when triggered.
Multiple #ALIGNMENT_POSITION= can be set, or this field can be left
empty if it isn’t applicable.
3.1.27. Decision
This event provides the player with a choice, the consequences of which can be
used to trigger other scripts.
The details of the Decision should be spelled out in the #MESSAGE field,
though to avoid having too much text in that area, some details can also be put
in the #NOTES field.
You can select coordinates on the map by filling in the #NOTES_POSITION=
field. When a player is presented with the Decision and they click on the ‘View
Map’ button, they will then be taken to the location designated in that field.
This allows players to view the location most relevant to that Decision. This
field can be left empty if there isn’t a specific location relevant to the Decision.
Decision Events that do not contain a #MESSAGE entry are treated as an
automatic ‘YES’ decision selection. This can be useful in campaign design as
a trigger for events when it would be inappropriate to offer players an actual
decision. They can also be used to either add or deduct MPPs from a country,
e.g. to represent a temporary increase or decrease in the military budget.
To assist with the fine tuning of Decision Events, multiple #ALIGNMENT_
POSITION= can be set, or this field can be left empty if it isn’t applicable.
With the #TYPE=field, the engine works through events in the following
sequence:
§ The Decision Event fires

§ The engine works through all events looking for scripts to be triggered
by this Decision Event.
§ The engine fires the next DECISION event in the list of events whose
trigger has been met.
2 267 @
§ When this process has been completed, any Decisions that were TYPE=2
will be reset to a null state, waiting to be triggered again on each and
every subsequent turn when their conditions are met.
The #MESSAGE= field can support the following special characters:
§ %N = newline or carriage return

§ %T = horizontal tab
§ %R = right align text, must be applied at the beginning of a newline,
otherwise ignored
§ %C = center align text, must be applied at the beginning of a newline,
otherwise ignored
§ %B = bold text, must be applied for each word you wish to bold
§ %V = italic text, must be applied for each word you wish to italicize
Viewing Decision Events in the Editor

Once you’ve added or amended any Decision Events, providing you Update
the script you can then see these scripts as they would appear in the game by
selecting Decision and clicking on the View Button that appears in the bottom
right of the screen where you Update the scripts (Campaign → Edit Event
Scripts).
If you edit any Decision scripts while you are viewing them, when you left
click on the viewing panel it will refresh to show you the latest version of the
relevant script.
3.2. Editing Artificial Intelligence Scripts

To edit Artificial Intelligence (AI) scripts for the computer opponent, select
Campaign and then Edit AI Scripts from the Main Menu bar. This will allow
you to edit all of the AI’s specific script types.
As with editing Event scripts, select the AI script to edit and then click
Open/Edit. If you open them, each one has a small write-up about what they
do and how to use them.
After editing the script, save the text file and update the script(s) like you
would with Event files.
2 268 @
The default AI script templates are located in the game’s Templates\AI
directory. The AI scripts for individual campaigns are saved in the Scripts\AI
sub-directory created for each campaign in the Campaigns directory.
A general description of the different types of AI events found in the game
is provided below.
3.2.1. Guard
This event handles AI requirements for guarding places on the map.
3.2.2. Fortification
This event handles the AI’s construction of Fortifications.
3.2.3. Offensive
This event handles AI requirements for preparing and executing operations
such as launching a Union offensive into neutral Kentucky.
Generally the AI can manage offensives without requiring scripts once it
is at war with a country, providing it has built up the necessary units and any
resources of lesser importance are added to the AI’s Exclusion Lists.
To view and amend the AI’s Exclusion Lists, click on Campaign γ Edit AI
Scripts and then click on the Advanced button in the bottom right. Resources
can then be excluded or included from each side’s lists, and it is recommended
to start by excluding everything, and then when you run your tests, study the
results as you selectively remove important resources from the Exclusion List.
Info: The AI will not declare war on neutral countries when the weather in
the region is Rain, Snow or Sandstorms.
3.2.4. Amphibious
This event handles the AI’s launching of amphibious landings, and the AI will
automatically try to assign a HQ to this script.
3.2.5. Transport
This event handles the AI’s transporting of units from Port to Port on the map,
and the AI will automatically try to assign a HQ to this script.
2 269 @
3.2.6. Amphibious Minor
This event handles the AI’s launching of amphibious landings, but without
using a HQ.
3.2.7. Transport Minor

This event handles the AI’s transporting of units from Port to Port on the map,
but this will not move HQs.
3.2.8. Fleet
This event handles the AI’s naval movements and offensives.
3.2.9. Purchases
This event handles AI purchases on a turn-by-turn basis.
Units that have been destroyed will only be rebuilt if there is a matching
Purchase script entry for this unit type. However, if there are no Purchase
scripts for the country whose unit has been destroyed, then this rule doesn’t
apply, for instance you don’t need to create Purchase scripts for all Minors
in the game, as the AI can attempt to rebuild their destroyed units without a
script being in place for that Minor.
3.2.10. Diplomacy
This event handles AI diplomacy allocation on a turn-by-turn basis.
3.2.11. Research
This event handles AI research allocation on a turn-by-turn basis.
3.3. Suggestions For Creating a New Campaign

The Editor is a powerful tool not only for adjusting the current campaigns,
but also for creating brand new ones. You can try your hand at reproducing
old favorites or developing completely new campaigns using the Strategic
Command game engine. The possibilities are virtually endless!
This game’s mechanics for combat, economics, diplomacy and research can
be applied to a very wide range of conflicts. The Editor is flexible enough to
2 270 @
allow a significant amount of customization for other time periods, and for
virtually any scale and scope.
3.3.1. Develop a Design

The first step for creating a new campaign is to decide what the fundamental
elements of your design are going to be. You may already have an idea about
the time period, the location, and the forces involved.
Now you need to decide on some specifics for your game. How big do
you want your map to be? How long should each game turn last? What size
should your combat units be: Corps or Divisions for operational campaigns,
or something smaller for tactical battles? How complex your game will be and
how long it may take to play will depend on what you decide at the outset.
Once you determine how large your map needs to be, start a new campaign
by selecting File γ New as described above in the Creating a New Campaign
section. Here you can define your new map size and begin filling in the various
map layers using the instructions and tips provided.
You may also want to use the Import Data menu to select items and settings
from a pre-existing campaign for re-use in your own campaign, since editing
existing data is generally easier than starting from scratch. Save your new
campaign with its own name to create a new sub-directory for it with its own
campaign.ini file.
3.3.2. Customize Your Campaign

Once you’ve saved your new campaign, in the Campaigns directory there will
be a sub-directory for your new campaign, and within this sub-directory you
will find a campaign.ini file containing the lines:
#CUSTOM_BITMAPS= 1
#CUSTOM_INTERFACE= 1
#CUSTOM_SOUND= 1
#CUSTOM_MUSIC= 1
#CUSTOM_FONTS= 1
#CUSTOM_LOCALIZATION= 1
The setting of = 1 means that the campaign will automatically use any
2 271 @
custom files and localization that you add to it. Changing any to = 0 means
that the campaign would not use any custom settings for the relevant field.
#CUSTOM_BITMAPS= 1
To use custom bitmaps you will need to create a Bitmaps sub-directory
within your custom campaign directory for your customized items. Then copy
the original default Bitmaps file(s) that you wish to amend, pasting them into
your campaign’s own Bitmaps sub-directory, and amend the new file. The
game will then use these customized items instead of the default image files.
Caution: Be very careful when editing image files, as you do not want to
amend the original files that come with this game. Make sure that you are
editing copies, rather than the originals themselves. Making backups as you
work is also recommended.
#CUSTOM_INTERFACE= 1
You can customize the images used in the game interface, such as having
alternate flag_sprites for the Major countries involved in your campaign or just
changing the appearance of the interface. You will need to create an Interface
sub-directory within your custom campaign directory for your customized
items. Copy over the original files that you wish to amend from the game’s
interface folder and paste them into this new sub-directory. The game will
then use these customized items instead of the default ones.
#CUSTOM_SOUND= 1
To use custom sound files you will need to create a Sound sub-directory
within your custom campaign directory for your customized items. Place your
edited .ogg files there. The game will then use these customized items instead
of the default .ogg files.
#CUSTOM_MUSIC= 1
To use custom music you will need to create a Music sub-directory within
your custom campaign directory for your customized items. Place your edited
.ogg files there. The game will then use these customized items instead of the
default .ogg files.
#CUSTOM_FONTS= 1
To use custom fonts you will need to create a Fonts sub-directory within
your custom campaign directory for your customized items. Place your custom
2 272 @
.ttf or .otf files there. You may need to right click and install these fonts onto
your system and then the Editor will list these customized items when editing
the text layer of the campaign. The customized fonts will then show in game
when you load the campaign.
Note: A warning message will let you know if you have done something
wrong when attempting to load a campaign using any of the above
customizations.
#CUSTOM_LOCALIZATION= 1
Custom localization means that you will be able to rename many of the
game’s elements, including the names of countries, unit types, research
categories, etc.
To do this you will need to create a new localization.txt file within the custom
campaign sub-directory for your customized items.
You can do this by copying some or all of the original localization.txt file
from the game’s main directory into your custom campaign sub-directory. The
“#NAME=” items are all names used by the game engine code itself and cannot
be edited, but any or all of the text names to the right of the “=” sign can be
edited.
It is strongly recommended to only include entries in your localization.txt
file where you are using an edited entry, as otherwise the load time for turns
could increase unnecessarily if more entries are included than are needed. The
game will then use these customized items instead of the default text names.
Example: Consider a Roman game with Rome instead of the Union, and
Legions instead of Cavalry. In the combat target dialog and properties dialog
sections of the localization.txt file, change Cavalry Attack to Legion Attack. In
the terrain dialog, change Cavalry Defense to Legion Defense. In the Country
IDs, change Union to Rome. In the Unit IDs, change Cavalry to Legion. In the
Research IDs, change Cavalry Equipment to Legion Equipment, and so on.
3.3.3. Add Your Own Media

Adding images to the campaign to provide historical ambience or information
for players can be very useful, and the image guidelines are as follows:
2 273 @
§ Save all image files as .png files
§ The size of the image should be 732 x 412 pixels
§ Save them in a Media folder inside the subfolder for your campaign
§ Type the name of the image you wish to use, including the file extension
(i.e. .png) into the relevant script’s row #IMAGE= . More than one image
name can be typed here, separating them with a comma, and the engine
will choose at random an image to show whenever the script fires.
Use the images within the default Media folder, found within the installation
folder, as a guide. Any suitable images can be re-used in your own campaign.
Adding sound to the campaign can also be useful, and the sound guidelines
are as follows:
§ Save all sound files as .ogg files

§ Save them in a Media folder inside the subfolder for your campaign
§ Type the name of the sound you wish to use, including the file extension
(i.e. .ogg) into the relevant script’s row #SOUND= . More than one sound
name can be typed here, separating them with a comma, and the engine
will choose at random a sound to play whenever the script fires.
3.3.4. Playtest Your Campaign

Getting your map and unit counters to look good is easy enough if you have
some artistic skills, and even if you aren’t very artistic, you might be surprised
at how much you can do!
Getting your new game design to work smoothly will require some more
effort, especially if you are making significant changes to the default values of
the original game.
A good rule of thumb is to start simple, and then gradually add desired
complexity. First verify that your basic features work as desired and then
slowly build in more advanced features. If you try to do too much too fast, it
may be very difficult to determine how to resolve a complex problem with your
game design.
So, if designing a new campaign totally from scratch, it’s best to start with
just one section of the map roughly worked out. Use this area as a combat
2 274 @
testing ground to check that things like the map scale, the unit density you
have in mind and the essential combat values of those units are in line with
your desired result.
Once your game is running smoothly and you have had time to evaluate its
strengths and weaknesses, further adjustments for play balance and variability
can be made. Take your time and have some fun with the game design process!
If there are any special instructions or information a player will need to
know about your campaign, it will be best to include a separate readme.txt file
containing these in your Campaign’s folder.
3.4. Further Advice & Information

3.4.1. Text on the Map Edge
On the left edge of the map (the y axis) there is a restriction in place to
prevent any text being added that couldn’t be read by the game engine, as it
would be outside the readable area.
3.4.2. Unused Terrain Sprites

Some terrain sprites have not been utilized for this release, and these have a
large red X through them within the sprite file. These sprites are available for
modding use, and will be used in future expansions as our range of official
graphics is expanded.
3.4.3. Design Parameters

As previously discussed in the above sections, the Campaign Editor does have
some parameters for campaign design. In summary:
§ The minimum map size is 10x10 hexes. The maximum map size is
512x256 hexes.
§ As a minimum requirement, there MUST be at least one fully activated
Union or Confederate Major country. Also, all Minor countries MUST
have both a Union and Confederate parent defined.
2 275 @
§ The game will support a maximum of 120 countries, of which 10 can be
Majors, the rest being Minors, and their names can be defined in the
localization.txt file.
§ All countries represented on the map MUST have a Capital, and they can
only have one active Capital at a time during a game.
§ Campaigns may be set to run through any dates from year 0 to 9999, and
the campaign end date must be greater than the start date.
3.4.4. Testing the AI in Game

There are 3 standard features available via the F1, F2, and F3 keys that can be
used when developing and testing AI scripts in game.
F1 creates a DEBUG subfolder in the “SAVE” directory that creates saved
game files for each turn played by both you and the AI. This can be a useful
reference for when you see the AI do something unexpected, as you can easily
use the save file to load up the turn again to re-watch the AI’s maneuvers in
action.
These files will be saved in the following folder:
\Users\<username>\Documents\My Games\Strategic Command American
Civil War\Save\DEBUG
F2 creates a DEBUGLOGS folder with files that keeps track of AI Planning,
Research and Diplomacy investments as well as turn-by-turn Weather
information. In addition, it creates a summaries.log file which lists all the losses,
military activity, and research activity for each turn for easy reference.
These files will be saved in the following folder:
\Users\<username>\Documents\My Games\Strategic Command American
Civil War\DEBUGLOGS
F3 triggers the AI to play against itself. This is very handy whenever you
would like to see just how balanced your AI scripts are for both sides and/or if
you quickly want to observe your AI planning from both sides. This button can
be turned on before or during game play. If you press it before selecting any
campaigns then the AI will play itself right from the very first turn, and you can
sit back and watch or just review its progress periodically to see if things are
roughly in line with your expectations.
2 276 @
4. BEYOND THE CIVIL WAR
Due to the less advanced technology available to the combatants, warfare
during the 19th century requires less variety in units when compared to the
conflicts of the 20th century.
Strategic Command American Civil War was developed from the same engine
used to create the earlier titles in the Strategic Command 3 series, and players
familiar with the previous games will notice that there are a number of
mechanics used in those games that have not been used in the default content
for American Civil War: there’s not much use for Fighters or Tanks when neither
would be invented until half a century later. Fortunately, we have sought to
keep as many of these mechanics in the game engine as possible in case they
prove useful to other scenario designers who would like to take advantage of
the new features offered in American Civil War.
Note that all of the leftover mechanics in this section have been carried
over directly from WWII: War in Europe and will behave exactly as in that game
except where otherwise noted. To keep this manual focused on the mechanics
seen in American Civil War specifically, ‘leftovers’ such as air units will not
be described in this manual, and you are encouraged to read the manual for
WWII: War in Europe for further information on these.
In the script files for 1861 Blue and Gray and the other default campaigns,
there may be occasional references to ‘Axis’ and ‘Allied’ nations. This is merely
a consequence of Strategic Command’s origins as a WWII game, and will not
adversely affect gameplay or scenario design in any way. In 1861 Blue and Gray,
we have used the ‘Axis’ (that is, blue or “1”) side to represent the Union, and the
‘Allied’ (red/”2”) side for the Confederacy.
4.1. Unused Units

The following unit categories have not been used in the American Civil War
game and retain the same characteristics as they had in WWII: War in Europe.
Note all Unit IDs listed here are the same as those used in the game’s scripts
and localization files (eg. HQ is 0, Regiment is 1 etc).
2 277 @
§ 15= Anti-Air
§ 16= Rocket Artillery
§ 21= Rockets
§ 22= Reconnaissance
§ 24= Anti-Tank
§ 25= Light Tanks
§ 26= Tanks
§ 27= Heavy Tanks
§ 29= Fighters
§ 30= Tactical Bombers
§ 31= Medium Bombers
§ 32= Strategic Bombers
American Civil War also introduced new Target Type categories, as well as
rendering some unnecessary for this game, which have been renamed as ‘-’.
Around line 2050 in the game’s localization file, those unused categories can
be reintroduced to the game with the following names:
§ #TARGET_TYPE_TANK= Tank
§ #TARGET_TYPE_FIGHTER= Fighter
§ #TARGET_TYPE_BOMBER= Bomber
§ …
§ #TARGET_TYPE_ANTI-AIR= Anti-Air
The Anti-Air category will be used by Unit ID 15, the Tank category by 21, 22, 24,
25, 26 and 27, the Fighter category by 29, and the Bomber category by 30, 31 and
32. Note that Unit ID 16 uses the Artillery category (which it shares with some
default American Civil War units).
Note that the former aircraft carrier category is also referenced in the
localization file, however there are no units associated to this category and the
American Civil War engine does not allow for aircraft carrier units. Similarly,
Unit ID 9, which represented Paratroops in War in Europe, and Unit ID 34,
which represented Kamikazes, cannot be used in this way in American Civil
War as they have been replaced with the Indian and Cruiser units respectively
and the associated functionality removed.
2 278 @
4.2. Convoy Raiders
In both WWII: War in Europe and American Civil War, some types of naval units
can be used to raid convoy routes. In American Civil War, all naval units have
this functionality, although some (such as Submarines) do not take advantage
of this by default, it is possible to enable raiding for any of the naval units
included in American Civil War by adjusting their Raid Multiplier (MPPs),
which can be found in the Combat Target Data menu, which is accessed
through Country Data. This is also true for those naval unit types whose Unit
IDs did not correspond to naval units in previous games, such as Battleships
and Cruisers.
4.3. Research Changes

Although American Civil War includes a wide range of new technology types
to research, there have been no changes to the underlying research system in
this game, and it remains theoretically possible to change all technologies in
the game to behave exactly as they did in WWII: War in Europe by editing the
various values in Research Data and its sub-menus. While it is not the role of
this section to detail every change that would need to be made to do so, the
following may be of particular interest to designers wishing to use some of
the options offered on the Advanced Research Data screen (which is found by
accessing Research Data, then ‘Advanced’):
‘Subs’ refers to the chance that subs will dive for each level of the technology
assigned to RESEARCH_ID 7. In American Civil War this is the Buoyancy Tanks
upgrade, while in War in Europe it was called Advanced Subs.
ASW refers to the reduction of the chance that an enemy sub will dive per
each level of the technology assigned to RESEARCH_ID 12. In American Civil
War this slot is used by the Fort Modernization upgrade (and in the default
campaigns it is set to zero as it is not relevant to the game). In War in Europe
this was the Anti-Submarine Warfare tech.
The four options listed under ‘Increments’ behave identically to their War
in Europe counterparts.
The six units under the Accuracy Loss section, reading down and then to
the right, are Unit IDs 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 and 21.
2 279 @
5. CREDITS
Fury software
Game Design
Hubert Cater
Associate Game Design
Bill Runacre, Ryan O’Shea
Programmer
Hubert Cater
Assistant Programmer
Bill Macon
Campaign and Scenario Design
Ryan O’Shea
Development Testers
Dan Fenton, Michael Kollmann, Beriand, Old Crow Balthazor, JWW, Parat,
redrum68, The Land, lionel1957, Fafnir, gwgardner
User Manual and Layout
Ryan O’Shea, Bill Runacre, Myriam Bell
Editing
Bill Runacre
Sounds
Matt Faller
Music
Daniel Sadowski
Artwork and Graphic Design
Jean-Vincent Roy, Wastelands Interactive, Adriana Bienati
Special Thanks
Coral Bliss, Eddie Cater, Sophia Cater, Claudia Petracca
2 280 @
Matrix Games
CEO
Iain McNeil
CFO
JD McNeil
CMO
Marco A. Minoli
Technical Director
Philip Veale
Creative Director
Richard Evans
CEO, Matrix Games LLC
Erik Rutins
Executive Producer
David Sharrock
Producers
Mark Hardisty, Neil McKenna
Project Manager
Josh Fan
Associate Producers
Jenny Zsibrita, Sam O’Neill
Assistant Producer
Anny Sims
Senior Brand Manager
Giulia Sellitto, Alberto Casulini
Brand Manager
Roberto Neri
Junior Brand Manager
Marco Tonello
Social Media Strategist
Vincenzo Fallara
2 281 @
E-commerce Manager
Giulia Costa
Media Relations
Paolo Paglianti
Production Design
Adriana Bienati
Lead Artist
Pat Ward
Artist
Koen Bekkema
Manual Layout
Myriam Bell
Operations Lead
Matthew Ravenwood
Operations Team
Joseph Stephenson, Callum Morris
Head of Accounts
Dean Walker
Admin Assistant
Richard Baker
HR Manager
Kayleigh Lawrence
Customer Support Staff
Paulo Costa, Joseph Miller
Web Development
Valery Vidershpan, Andrea Nicola, Fernando Turi, Yurri Shmeloyv
2 282 @

Strategic Command Manual Secesión

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Strategic Command Manual Secesión

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Strategic Command Manual Secesión

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GAME MANUAL

3. UNDERSTANDING THE GAME INTERFACE 24

4. 1861 BLUE AND GRAY TUTORIAL 61

6. MOVEMENT AND COMBAT 111

8. UNIT TYPES 174

10. POLITICS AND DIPLOMACY 205

2. MENU BUTTONS 212

4. BEYOND THE CIVIL WAR 277

§ 1861 Blue and Gray

Hubert Cater, President

2.1.3. File Locations

2.1.4. Resolving Issues

2.1.5. Uninstalling the Game

2.1.6. Game Updates

2.1.7. Game Forums

2.1.8. Help and Feedback

2.1.9. Error Handling

3. UNDERSTANDING THE GAME

3.2. New Game

§ Turn Length (Seasonal or Daily)

3.2.1. Choose Side

3.2.3. Computer Bonus

3.4. Advanced Options

3.4.2. Map Text

Click OK to return to the Advanced options when done.

3.4.4.1. Options in Multiplayer

3.4.4.2. Taskbar Icon

3.5. The In-Game Interface

3.5.2.1. War Maps

3.5.2.2. How to Declare War

3.5.2.3. The Strategy Map and Convoy Map

3.5.2.6. New Units

3.5.2.8. Influencing Major Powers

§ The cost per chit

3.5.2.10. Research Tooltips

3.5.2.11. Reclaiming Chits

3.5.2.12. The Research Table

3.5.3. Right Hand Buttons

3.5.4. Unit Display

3.5.5.1. Combat Predictions

3.5.5.2. Information Panel Buttons

3.6.2. Glossary of Abbreviations

3.6.3. Symbols On The Map

Major River Field

Major Lake Oasis

Hill Dirt Road

High Mountain Navigable River

Mine Major Capital

Town Major Fortress

Fortified Town Fortification

City River Port

Major City Port

3.6.6. Miscellaneous Symbols

Loops – units placed on these locations will transfer

Stars – these hexes are important for certain game effects.

Flags – these hexes are important for certain game effects,

State Borders – marks the locations of state borders on

3.6.7. Combat Interface Definitions

3.6.9. Target Types

Each unit also has the following values: